WO2021203373A1 - Channel measurement method and communication apparatus - Google Patents

Channel measurement method and communication apparatus Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2021203373A1
WO2021203373A1 PCT/CN2020/084017 CN2020084017W WO2021203373A1 WO 2021203373 A1 WO2021203373 A1 WO 2021203373A1 CN 2020084017 W CN2020084017 W CN 2020084017W WO 2021203373 A1 WO2021203373 A1 WO 2021203373A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
reference signal
precoding
frequency domain
angle
delay
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2020/084017
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
秦启波
范利
种稚萌
葛士斌
汪洁
毕晓艳
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Priority to PCT/CN2020/084017 priority Critical patent/WO2021203373A1/en
Priority to CN202080098856.0A priority patent/CN115315906B/en
Publication of WO2021203373A1 publication Critical patent/WO2021203373A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04BTRANSMISSION
    • H04B17/00Monitoring; Testing
    • H04B17/30Monitoring; Testing of propagation channels
    • H04B17/309Measuring or estimating channel quality parameters
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04BTRANSMISSION
    • H04B7/00Radio transmission systems, i.e. using radiation field
    • H04B7/02Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas
    • H04B7/04Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas
    • H04B7/0413MIMO systems
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04LTRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path

Definitions

  • This application relates to the field of wireless communication, and more specifically, to a channel measurement method and communication device.
  • massive multiple-input multiple-output massive MIMO
  • network equipment can reduce the interference between multiple users and the interference between multiple signal streams of the same user through precoding. Conducive to improving signal quality, realizing space division multiplexing, and improving spectrum utilization.
  • the terminal device may determine the precoding matrix based on downlink channel measurement, and hopes to make the network device obtain the same or similar precoding matrix as the precoding matrix determined by the terminal device through feedback. Specifically, the terminal device may, for example, instruct to construct the precoding matrix by feeding back one or more spatial vectors, one or more frequency domain vectors, and one or more weighting coefficients.
  • this feedback method brings a large feedback overhead.
  • the network equipment can use the estimation of the uplink channel to obtain the reciprocity information of the downlink channel, such as delay and angle.
  • the network device can pre-code the downlink reference signal based on the delay and angle before sending it, so as to reduce the feedback overhead of the terminal device.
  • the pilot overhead will increase with the increase in the number of terminal devices.
  • This application provides a channel measurement method and communication device in order to reduce pilot overhead.
  • a channel measurement method is provided, which may be executed by a terminal device, or may also be executed by a component (such as a circuit, a chip, or a chip system, etc.) configured in the terminal device. This application does not limit this.
  • the method includes: generating first indication information, the first indication information being determined based on the received precoding reference signal, the precoding of the precoding reference signal is determined by K angle delay pairs, and the K angle time delay Each angle delay pair in the delay pair includes an angle vector and a delay vector; the first indication information is used to indicate K weighting coefficients corresponding to the K angle delay pairs, and the K angle delay pairs And the corresponding K weighting coefficients are used to construct a precoding matrix; each of the K weighting coefficients is determined based on the precoding reference signal carried on part of the N frequency domain units; wherein, N is the number of frequency domain units included in the transmission bandwidth of the reference signal, K and N are both integers greater than 1, and the first indication information is sent.
  • a channel measurement method is provided.
  • the method may be executed by a network device, or may also be executed by a component (such as a circuit, a chip, or a chip system, etc.) configured in the network device. This application does not limit this.
  • the method includes: receiving first indication information, the first indication information being determined based on a precoding reference signal, the precoding of the precoding reference signal is determined by K angle delay pairs, and the K angle delay pairs are centered Each angle delay pair includes an angle vector and a delay vector; the first indication information is used to indicate the K weighting coefficients corresponding to the K angle delay pairs, the K angle delay pairs and their corresponding The K weighting coefficients are used to construct the precoding matrix; each weighting coefficient of the K weighting coefficients is determined based on the precoding reference signal carried on part of the N frequency domain units; where N is the reference The number of frequency domain units included in the transmission bandwidth of the signal, K and N are both integers greater than 1, and the precoding matrix corresponding to each frequency domain unit is determined based on the first indication information.
  • the network device can load K angle delay pairs onto some of the N frequency domain units, so that the number of frequency domain units loaded into one angle delay pair can be reduced. If each angle delay pair is loaded on N frequency domain units, N frequency domain units are needed to carry the precoding reference signal corresponding to one angle delay pair; but if each angle delay pair is loaded on On some of the N frequency domain units, the N frequency domain units originally used to carry one angle delay pair can be used to carry precoding reference signals corresponding to more angle delay pairs. Therefore, when the number of angle delay pairs K is constant, the pilot overhead can be reduced, thereby facilitating full utilization of effective spectrum resources.
  • the terminal device can also determine the weighting coefficient corresponding to the angle delay pair according to the channel estimation value on the frequency domain unit loaded with the same angle delay pair, which also reduces the calculation amount of the terminal device to a certain extent.
  • each weighting coefficient of the K weighting coefficients is precoded by received on at least one of the N frequency domain units.
  • the reference signal determines that the at least one frequency domain unit is part of the N frequency domain units, and any two frequency domain units in the at least one frequency domain unit are separated by at least Q/D-1 frequency.
  • Domain unit; Q is an integer greater than 1, Q ⁇ K; D is the pilot density, 0 ⁇ D ⁇ 1; Q/D is an integer.
  • the precoding reference signal corresponding to each angle delay pair can be evenly distributed in the frequency domain at intervals of Q/D-1 frequency domain units, which is like loading each angle delay pair evenly on N frequency domain units. Therefore, the terminal device can obtain the channel state information of each frequency domain position, which is beneficial to obtain more accurate measurement results.
  • the network device can reduce the pilot overhead by adjusting the angle delay logarithm Q corresponding to each reference signal port, which is very flexible and convenient.
  • each of the K weighting coefficients is a sum of at least one estimated value determined based on the precoding reference signal received on the at least one frequency domain unit, and each of the at least one estimated value The estimated value is obtained by performing channel estimation based on the precoding reference signal received on one of the at least one frequency domain unit.
  • the precoding reference signal corresponds to P reference signal ports
  • the precoding of the precoding reference signal corresponding to each reference signal port includes spatial weights and frequency domain weights
  • the precoding corresponding to each reference signal port The precoding of the coded reference signal is determined by the Q angle delay pairs in the K angle delay pairs; P ⁇ K, and P is a positive integer.
  • the configuration of the reference signal port in the prior art can be continued. That is, the time-frequency resource configured as the same reference signal port is still used to carry the reference signal of the reference signal port, but the difference is that the reference signal of the reference signal port is precoding loaded with Q angle delay pairs Reference signal.
  • the terminal device does not need to perceive the specific process of the network device generating the precoding reference signal, and only needs to determine how to calculate the weighting coefficient corresponding to each angle delay pair according to the Q value. Therefore, the compatibility is strong.
  • the Q angle vectors included in the Q angle delay pairs are Q airspace weight vectors, and each airspace weight vector in the Q airspace weight vectors includes multiple airspace weights; the Q The spatial weight vector is used to alternately pre-encode the reference signals carried on the N frequency domain units; the Q delay vectors contained in the Q angle delay pair are used to determine the N frequency domain weights.
  • the N frequency domain weights correspond to the N frequency domain units, and are used for precoding the reference signals carried on the N frequency domain units.
  • each of the Q angle vectors can be used as a precoding spatial weight vector.
  • the Q angle vectors corresponding to the same reference signal port can be polled on N frequency domain units.
  • Part of the frequency domain weights in the Q delay vectors can be loaded on the N frequency domain units.
  • Q time delay vectors can be recombined to obtain Q frequency domain weight vectors, and each frequency domain weight vector is smaller than the length of the time delay vector, thereby reducing the number of frequency domain units loaded.
  • the precoding corresponding to the p-th reference signal port among the P reference signal ports received on the n-th frequency domain unit among the N frequency domain units includes a spatial weight vector and at least one frequency domain Weight;
  • the spatial weight vector is the (p-1)Q+(n-1)%Q+1th angle vector among the K angle vectors included in the K angle delay pairs;
  • the at least one frequency domain Weight matrix The value of the nth row and pth column in the matrix; Determined by the matrix F, the matrix F is a matrix constructed by the P delay vectors contained in the P angle delay pairs, the matrix And matrix F are satisfied: Among them,% means the remainder operation, q:Q:end means from the qth value to the last value, the value is taken with the increment of Q; 1 ⁇ n ⁇ N, 1 ⁇ p ⁇ P, n and p are both Positive integer.
  • the method further includes: receiving second indication information, where the second indication information is used to indicate a reporting rule for the K weighting coefficients.
  • the method further includes: sending second indication information, where the second indication information is used to indicate a reporting rule for the K weighting coefficients.
  • the network device can further indicate the reporting rules of P ⁇ Q (ie, K) weighting coefficients corresponding to the P reference signal ports, so as to facilitate the terminal device Generate the first indication information and parse the first indication information according to the same reporting rule as the network device.
  • the coefficients c p, q in the K weighting coefficients correspond to the p-th reference signal port among the P reference signal ports, and the Q-th angle delay centering corresponding to the p-th reference signal port
  • the q-th angle delay pair, 1 ⁇ p ⁇ P, 1 ⁇ q ⁇ Q, are all integers.
  • a possible reporting rule is: sequentially take values from 1 to P to p, and for each value of p, report the corresponding Q coefficients.
  • the reporting rule is to give priority to reporting by row.
  • Another possible reporting rule is: sequentially take values from 1 to Q to q, and for each value of q, report the corresponding P coefficients.
  • the reporting rule is to report by column first.
  • the precoding reference signal corresponds to K reference signal ports, and the precoding of the precoding reference signal corresponding to each reference signal port is determined by one of the K angle delay pairs.
  • each reference signal port corresponds to an angle delay pair
  • the number of reference signal ports P is equal to the number K of angle delay pairs.
  • the K weighting coefficients determined by the terminal device are weighting coefficients corresponding to K reference signal ports, and also weighting coefficients corresponding to K angle delay pairs.
  • the terminal device can report the K weighting coefficients in the existing manner.
  • the frequency domain units corresponding to the precoding reference signal of each reference signal port are discretely distributed in the frequency domain.
  • the frequency domain units corresponding to the same reference signal port are evenly distributed at intervals of Q/D-1 frequency domain units.
  • the precoding of the precoding reference signal corresponding to each of the K reference signal ports includes a spatial weight vector and a frequency domain.
  • Weight vector the spatial weight vector in the precoding corresponding to the k-th reference signal port among the K reference signal ports is the angle vector of the k-th angle-delay pair in the K angle-delay pairs, the The frequency domain weight vector corresponding to the k-th reference signal port is determined by the delay vector of the k-th angle delay pair.
  • each of the K angle vectors can be used as a precoding spatial weight vector. Since frequency domain units corresponding to the same reference signal port are evenly distributed at intervals of Q/D-1 frequency domain units, corresponding to the same time-frequency position on the N frequency domain units, Q angle vectors are used alternately. Each angle vector corresponds to a reference signal port.
  • K time delay vectors can be reorganized to obtain K frequency domain weight vectors. Since the frequency domain units corresponding to the same reference signal port are evenly distributed at intervals of Q/D-1 frequency domain units, it corresponds to the same time-frequency position on the N frequency domain units. The frequency domain weights are used alternately. Part of the frequency domain weights in the Q delay vectors can be reorganized to obtain Q frequency domain weight vectors. The length of each frequency domain weight vector is reduced compared to the length of the delay vector, so that the number of loaded frequency domain units can be reduced.
  • the precoding frequency domain weight of the precoding reference signal of the kth reference signal port received on the nth frequency domain unit of the N frequency domain units is the kth angle delay pair
  • the nth element in the delay vector of; 1 ⁇ n ⁇ N, 1 ⁇ k ⁇ K, n and k are integers.
  • the method further includes: receiving third indication information, where the third indication information is used to indicate the value of Q.
  • the method further includes: sending third indication information, where the third indication information is used to indicate the value of Q.
  • the Q value can be flexibly configured.
  • the network device sends third indication information to the terminal device to indicate the value of Q, so that the terminal device can determine the frequency domain unit corresponding to each angle delay pair according to the Q value, and then determine the weighting coefficient corresponding to each angle delay pair .
  • the value of Q is a predefined value.
  • the Q value can be fixed.
  • a communication device may be a terminal device or a component in the terminal device.
  • the communication device may include various modules or units for executing the first aspect and the method in any one of the possible implementation manners of the first aspect.
  • a communication device including a processor.
  • the processor is coupled to the memory and can be used to execute instructions in the memory to implement the method in any one of the possible implementation manners of the first aspect.
  • the communication device further includes a memory.
  • the communication device further includes a communication interface, the processor is coupled with the communication interface, and the communication interface is used to input and/or output information, and the information includes at least one of instructions and data.
  • the communication device is a terminal device.
  • the communication interface may be a transceiver, or an input/output interface.
  • the transceiver may be a transceiver circuit.
  • the input/output interface may be an input/output circuit.
  • the communication device is a chip or a chip system configured in a terminal device.
  • the communication interface may be an input/output interface, an interface circuit, an output circuit, an input circuit, a pin or a related circuit, etc.
  • the processor may also be embodied as a processing circuit or a logic circuit.
  • a communication device may be a terminal device or a component in the terminal device.
  • the communication device may include various modules or units for executing the second aspect and the method in any one of the possible implementation manners of the second aspect.
  • a communication device including a processor.
  • the processor is coupled to the memory and can be used to execute instructions in the memory to implement the method in any one of the possible implementation manners of the second aspect.
  • the communication device further includes a memory.
  • the communication device further includes a communication interface, the processor is coupled with the communication interface, and the communication interface is used to input and/or output information, and the information includes at least one of instructions and data.
  • the communication device is a network device.
  • the communication interface may be a transceiver, or an input/output interface.
  • the transceiver may be a transceiver circuit.
  • the input/output interface may be an input/output circuit.
  • the communication device is a chip or a chip system configured in a network device.
  • the communication interface may be an input/output interface, an interface circuit, an output circuit, an input circuit, a pin, or a related circuit.
  • the processor may also be embodied as a processing circuit or a logic circuit.
  • a processor including: an input circuit, an output circuit, and a processing circuit.
  • the processing circuit is configured to receive a signal through the input circuit and transmit a signal through the output circuit, so that the processor executes the method in any one of the foregoing first aspect and the second aspect.
  • the above-mentioned processor may be a chip, the input circuit may be an input pin, the output circuit may be an output pin, and the processing circuit may be a transistor, a gate circuit, a flip-flop, and various logic circuits.
  • the input signal received by the input circuit may be received and input by, for example, but not limited to, a receiver, and the signal output by the output circuit may be, for example, but not limited to, output to the transmitter and transmitted by the transmitter, and the input circuit and output
  • the circuit can be the same circuit, which is used as an input circuit and an output circuit at different times.
  • the embodiments of the present application do not limit the specific implementation manners of the processor and various circuits.
  • a processing device including a communication interface and a processor.
  • the communication interface is coupled with the processor.
  • the communication interface is used to input and/or output information.
  • the information includes at least one of instructions and data.
  • the processor is configured to execute a computer program, so that the processing device executes the method in any one of the possible implementation manners of the first aspect and the second aspect.
  • processors there are one or more processors, and one or more memories.
  • a processing device including a processor and a memory.
  • the processor is used to read instructions stored in the memory, and can receive signals through a receiver, and transmit signals through a transmitter, so that the processing device executes the method in any one of the possible implementation manners of the first aspect and the second aspect .
  • processors there are one or more processors, and one or more memories.
  • the memory may be integrated with the processor, or the memory and the processor may be provided separately.
  • the memory can be a non-transitory (non-transitory) memory, such as a read only memory (ROM), which can be integrated with the processor on the same chip, or can be set in different On the chip, the embodiment of the present application does not limit the type of the memory and the setting mode of the memory and the processor.
  • ROM read only memory
  • sending instruction information may be a process of outputting instruction information from the processor
  • receiving instruction information may be a process of inputting received instruction information to the processor.
  • the information output by the processing may be output to the transmitter, and the input information received by the processor may come from the receiver.
  • the transmitter and receiver can be collectively referred to as a transceiver.
  • the devices in the eighth and ninth aspects described above may be chips, and the processor may be implemented by hardware or software.
  • the processor When implemented by hardware, the processor may be a logic circuit, an integrated circuit, etc.;
  • the processor When implemented by software, the processor may be a general-purpose processor, which is implemented by reading software codes stored in the memory.
  • the memory may be integrated in the processor, may be located outside the processor, and exist independently.
  • a computer program product includes: a computer program (also called code, or instruction), which when the computer program is run, causes a computer to execute the first aspect and the first aspect described above.
  • the method in any one of the two possible implementation modes.
  • a computer-readable medium stores a computer program (also referred to as code, or instruction) when it runs on a computer, so that the computer executes the above-mentioned first aspect and The method in any possible implementation of the second aspect.
  • a computer program also referred to as code, or instruction
  • a communication system including the aforementioned terminal device and network device.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of a communication system applicable to the channel measurement method provided by an embodiment of the present application
  • Figure 2 is a schematic diagram of precoding a reference signal based on a delay vector
  • Fig. 3 is a schematic diagram of loading an angle delay pair to a reference signal and determining a weighting coefficient
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic flowchart of a channel measurement method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figures 5 and 6 show Q angle delay pairs corresponding to one reference signal port
  • FIG. 7 shows the corresponding relationship between the weighting coefficients of each RB and each angle delay pair
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic flowchart of a channel measurement method provided by another embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 9 shows a schematic diagram of the distribution of multiple reference signal ports on N RBs
  • FIGS. 10 and 11 are schematic block diagrams of communication devices provided by embodiments of the present application.
  • FIG. 12 is a schematic structural diagram of a terminal device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 13 is a schematic structural diagram of a network device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • LTE Long Term Evolution
  • FDD frequency division duplex
  • TDD time division duplex
  • UMTS universal mobile telecommunication system
  • WiMAX worldwide interoperability for microwave access
  • 5G mobile communication system may include non-standalone (NSA) and/or standalone (SA).
  • the technical solution provided in this application can also be applied to machine type communication (MTC), inter-machine communication long-term evolution technology (Long Term Evolution-machine, LTE-M), and device-to-device (D2D) Network, machine to machine (M2M) network, Internet of things (IoT) network or other networks.
  • MTC machine type communication
  • LTE-M inter-machine communication long-term evolution technology
  • D2D device-to-device
  • M2M machine to machine
  • IoT Internet of things
  • the IoT network may include, for example, the Internet of Vehicles.
  • V2X vehicle to other devices
  • V2X vehicle to other devices
  • V2X vehicle to other devices
  • V2X vehicle to other devices
  • the V2X may include: vehicle to vehicle (V2V) communication, and the vehicle communicates with Infrastructure (vehicle to infrastructure, V2I) communication, vehicle to pedestrian communication (V2P) or vehicle to network (V2N) communication, etc.
  • V2V vehicle to vehicle
  • V2I infrastructure
  • V2P vehicle to pedestrian communication
  • V2N vehicle to network
  • the network device may be any device that has a wireless transceiver function.
  • This equipment includes but is not limited to: evolved Node B (eNB), radio network controller (RNC), Node B (NB), base station controller (BSC) , Base transceiver station (BTS), home base station (for example, home evolved NodeB, or home Node B, HNB), baseband unit (BBU), wireless fidelity (wireless fidelity, WiFi) system Access point (AP), wireless relay node, wireless backhaul node, transmission point (TP), or transmission and reception point (TRP), etc.
  • eNB evolved Node B
  • RNC radio network controller
  • NB Node B
  • BSC base station controller
  • BBU Base transceiver station
  • home base station for example, home evolved NodeB, or home Node B, HNB
  • BBU baseband unit
  • wireless fidelity wireless fidelity, WiFi
  • AP wireless relay node
  • TP transmission point
  • TRP transmission and reception point
  • the gNB may include a centralized unit (CU) and a DU.
  • the gNB may also include an active antenna unit (AAU).
  • CU implements some functions of gNB, and DU implements some functions of gNB.
  • CU is responsible for processing non-real-time protocols and services, implementing radio resource control (RRC), and packet data convergence protocol (PDCP) The function of the layer.
  • RRC radio resource control
  • PDCP packet data convergence protocol
  • the DU is responsible for processing physical layer protocols and real-time services, and implements the functions of the radio link control (RLC) layer, medium access control (MAC) layer, and physical (physical, PHY) layer.
  • RLC radio link control
  • MAC medium access control
  • PHY physical layer
  • the network device may be a device that includes one or more of a CU node, a DU node, and an AAU node.
  • the CU can be divided into network equipment in an access network (radio access network, RAN), and the CU can also be divided into network equipment in a core network (core network, CN), which is not limited in this application.
  • the network equipment provides services for the cell, and the terminal equipment communicates with the cell through the transmission resources (for example, frequency domain resources, or spectrum resources) allocated by the network equipment, and the cell may belong to a macro base station (for example, a macro eNB or a macro gNB, etc.) , It may also belong to the base station corresponding to the small cell, where the small cell may include: metro cell, micro cell, pico cell, femto cell, etc. These small cells have the characteristics of small coverage area and low transmit power, and are suitable for providing high-speed data transmission services.
  • a macro base station for example, a macro eNB or a macro gNB, etc.
  • the small cell may include: metro cell, micro cell, pico cell, femto cell, etc.
  • terminal equipment may also be referred to as user equipment (UE), access terminal, user unit, user station, mobile station, mobile station, remote station, remote terminal, mobile equipment, user terminal, Terminal, wireless communication equipment, user agent or user device.
  • UE user equipment
  • the terminal device may be a device that provides voice/data connectivity to the user, for example, a handheld device with a wireless connection function, a vehicle-mounted device, and so on.
  • some examples of terminals can be: mobile phones (mobile phones), tablets (pads), computers with wireless transceiver functions (such as laptops, palmtop computers, etc.), mobile Internet devices (mobile internet devices, MID), virtual reality Virtual reality (VR) equipment, augmented reality (AR) equipment, wireless terminals in industrial control, wireless terminals in self-driving (self-driving), and wireless in remote medical (remote medical) Terminals, wireless terminals in smart grids, wireless terminals in transportation safety, wireless terminals in smart cities, wireless terminals in smart homes, cellular phones, cordless Telephone, session initiation protocol (SIP) telephone, wireless local loop (WLL) station, personal digital assistant (PDA), handheld device with wireless communication function, computing device or connection Other processing equipment to wireless modems, in-vehicle equipment, wearable equipment, terminal equipment in the 5G network, or
  • wearable devices can also be called wearable smart devices, which are the general term for using wearable technology to intelligently design daily wear and develop wearable devices, such as glasses, gloves, watches, clothing and shoes.
  • a wearable device is a portable device that is directly worn on the body or integrated into the user's clothes or accessories.
  • Wearable devices are not only a kind of hardware device, but also realize powerful functions through software support, data interaction, and cloud interaction.
  • wearable smart devices include full-featured, large-sized, complete or partial functions that can be achieved without relying on smart phones, such as smart watches or smart glasses, and only focus on a certain type of application function, and need to cooperate with other devices such as smart phones.
  • the terminal device may also be a terminal device in an Internet of Things (IoT) system.
  • IoT Internet of Things
  • IoT is an important part of the development of information technology in the future. Its main technical feature is to connect objects to the network through communication technology, so as to realize the intelligent network of human-machine interconnection and interconnection of things. IoT technology can achieve massive connections, deep coverage, and power-saving terminals through, for example, narrowband (NB) technology.
  • NB narrowband
  • terminal devices can also include sensors such as smart printers, train detectors, gas stations, etc.
  • the main functions include collecting data (some terminal devices), receiving control information and downlink data from network devices, and sending electromagnetic waves to transmit uplink data to network devices. .
  • FIG. 1 shows a schematic diagram of a communication system 100 applicable to the method provided in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication system 100 may include at least one network device, such as the network device 101 shown in FIG. 1; the communication system 100 may also include at least one terminal device, such as the terminal devices 102 to 102 shown in FIG. 107. Wherein, the terminal devices 102 to 107 may be mobile or fixed.
  • the network device 101 and one or more of the terminal devices 102 to 107 can communicate through a wireless link.
  • Each network device can provide communication coverage for a specific geographic area, and can communicate with terminal devices located in the coverage area. For example, the network device may send configuration information to the terminal device, and the terminal device may send uplink data to the network device based on the configuration information; for another example, the network device may send downlink data to the terminal device. Therefore, the network device 101 and the terminal devices 102 to 107 in Fig. 1 constitute a communication system.
  • the terminal devices can communicate directly.
  • D2D technology can be used to realize direct communication between terminal devices.
  • D2D technology can be used for direct communication.
  • the terminal device 106 and the terminal device 107 may communicate with the terminal device 105 individually or at the same time.
  • the terminal devices 105 to 107 may also communicate with the network device 101, respectively. For example, it can directly communicate with the network device 101, as shown in the figure, the terminal devices 105 and 106 can directly communicate with the network device 101; it can also communicate with the network device 101 indirectly, as the terminal device 107 in the figure communicates with the network device via the terminal device 105 101 communication.
  • FIG. 1 exemplarily shows a network device, multiple terminal devices, and communication links between each communication device.
  • the communication system 100 may include multiple network devices, and the coverage of each network device may include other numbers of terminal devices, for example, more or fewer terminal devices. This application does not limit this.
  • Each of the aforementioned communication devices may be configured with multiple antennas.
  • the plurality of antennas may include at least one transmitting antenna for transmitting signals and at least one receiving antenna for receiving signals.
  • each communication device additionally includes a transmitter chain and a receiver chain.
  • Those of ordinary skill in the art can understand that they can all include multiple components related to signal transmission and reception (such as processors, modulators, multiplexers, etc.). , Demodulator, demultiplexer or antenna, etc.). Therefore, multiple antenna technology can be used to communicate between network devices and terminal devices.
  • the wireless communication system 100 may also include other network entities such as a network controller and a mobility management entity, and the embodiment of the present application is not limited thereto.
  • K the number of angle delay pairs, K>1 and an integer
  • P the number of reference signal ports, that is, the number of ports after spatial domain precoding and frequency domain precoding are performed on the reference signal, P ⁇ 1 and an integer;
  • Q-1 The number of frequency domain units between two adjacent frequency domain units corresponding to the same angular delay pair, used to describe the minimum between two frequency domain units corresponding to the same angular delay pair Interval, Q>1 and an integer;
  • N the number of frequency domain units included in the transmission bandwidth of the reference signal, N>1 and an integer;
  • T the number of transmitting antenna ports, T>1 and an integer
  • F a frequency domain weight matrix, which can be expressed as a matrix with a dimension of N ⁇ K in the embodiment of this application;
  • S Spatial weight matrix, which can be expressed as a matrix with a dimension of T ⁇ K in the embodiment of this application;
  • C A coefficient matrix, which can be expressed as a diagonal matrix with a dimension of K ⁇ K in the embodiment of the present application.
  • serial numbers can be started from 1.
  • N frequency domain units may include the first frequency domain unit to the Nth frequency domain unit
  • the K angle delay pairs may include the first angle delay pair to the Kth angle delay pair
  • P references The signal port may include the first reference signal port to the P-th reference signal port, and so on.
  • the specific implementation is not limited to this. For example, it can also be numbered consecutively from 0.
  • the N frequency domain units may include the 0th frequency domain unit to the N-1th frequency domain unit
  • the K angle delay pairs may include the 0th angle delay pair to the K-1th angle delay pair
  • the P reference signal ports may include the 0th reference signal port to the P-1th reference signal port, etc., which are not listed here for brevity.
  • the superscript T represents transpose, for example, AT represents the transpose of matrix (or vector) A.
  • the superscript H represents the conjugate transpose, for example, A H represents the conjugate transpose of the matrix (or vector) A.
  • the function A(:, p) means to take the first row to the last row of the p-th column in the matrix A, that is, take the p-th column in the matrix A.
  • A(q,:) represents taking the first column to the last column of the qth row in matrix A, that is, taking the qth row in matrix A.
  • the function A(a, Q, b:, p) indicates that in the p-th column in the matrix, the starting behavior a and the ending behavior b are taken with Q as the incremental value. That is to say, the difference of the corresponding row number in matrix A of the obtained value is Q or an integer multiple of Q.
  • the function A(1, Q, end:, p) indicates that the value of the p-th column of the matrix A is taken from the first row to the last row with the increment of Q.
  • the function diag() represents a diagonal matrix.
  • N%Q means taking the remainder of N/Q.
  • the angle vector and the delay vector are both column vectors as an example to illustrate the embodiments provided in this application, but this should not constitute any limitation to this application. Based on the same concept, those skilled in the art can also think of other more possible expressions.
  • used to indicate can include both used for direct indication and used for indirect indication.
  • the indication information may directly indicate A or indirectly indicate A, but it does not mean that A must be carried in the indication information.
  • the information indicated by the instruction information is called the information to be indicated.
  • the information to be indicated can be directly indicated, such as the information to be indicated or the information to be indicated. Indicates the index of the information, etc.
  • the information to be indicated can also be indicated indirectly by indicating other information, where there is an association relationship between the other information and the information to be indicated. It is also possible to indicate only a part of the information to be indicated, while other parts of the information to be indicated are known or agreed in advance. For example, it is also possible to realize the indication of specific information by means of a pre-arranged order (for example, stipulated in an agreement) of various information, so as to reduce the indication overhead to a certain extent.
  • the precoding matrix is composed of precoding vectors, and each precoding vector in the precoding matrix may have the same parts in terms of composition or other attributes.
  • the specific instruction manner may also be various existing instruction manners, such as but not limited to the foregoing instruction manners and various combinations thereof.
  • the required instruction method can be selected according to specific needs.
  • the embodiment of the application does not limit the selected instruction method.
  • the instruction method involved in the embodiment of the application should be understood as covering that can make the instruction to be instructed Various methods for obtaining information to be indicated.
  • the information to be instructed can be sent together as a whole, or divided into multiple sub-information to be sent separately, and the sending period and/or sending timing of these sub-information can be the same or different.
  • the specific sending method is not limited in this application.
  • the sending period and/or sending timing of these sub-information may be pre-defined, for example, pre-defined according to a protocol, or configured by the transmitting end device by sending configuration information to the receiving end device.
  • the configuration information may include, for example, but not limited to, one or a combination of at least two of radio resource control signaling, medium access control (medium access control, MAC) layer signaling, and physical layer signaling.
  • radio resource control signaling such as packet radio resource control (RRC) signaling
  • MAC layer signaling for example, includes MAC control element (CE);
  • physical layer signaling for example, includes downlink control information (downlink control). information, DCI).
  • pre-defined or “pre-configured” can be realized by pre-saving corresponding codes, tables or other methods that can be used to indicate relevant information in the device (for example, including terminal devices and network devices).
  • the specific implementation method is not limited.
  • "saving” may refer to storing in one or more memories.
  • the one or more memories may be provided separately, or integrated in an encoder or decoder, a processor, or a communication device.
  • the one or more memories may also be partly provided separately, and partly integrated in a decoder, a processor, or a communication device.
  • the type of the memory can be any form of storage medium, which is not limited in this application.
  • the “protocols” involved in the embodiments of the present application may refer to standard protocols in the communication field, for example, may include LTE protocol, NR protocol, and related protocols applied to future communication systems, which are not limited in this application.
  • At least one refers to one or more, and “multiple” refers to two or more.
  • And/or describes the association relationship of the associated objects, indicating that there can be three relationships, for example, A and/or B, which can mean: A alone exists, A and B exist at the same time, and B exists alone, where A, B can be singular or plural.
  • the character “/” generally indicates that the associated objects before and after are in an “or” relationship.
  • "The following at least one item (a)” or similar expressions refers to any combination of these items, including any combination of a single item (a) or a plurality of items (a).
  • At least one of a, b, and c can mean: a, or, b, or, c, or, a and b, or, a and c, or, b and c, or, a , B, and c.
  • a, b, and c can be single or multiple.
  • Channel reciprocity In some communication modes, such as TDD, the uplink and downlink channels transmit signals on the same frequency domain resources and different time domain resources. In a relatively short time (for example, the coherence time of channel propagation), it can be considered that the channel fading experienced by the signals on the uplink and downlink channels is the same. This is the reciprocity of the uplink and downlink channels.
  • the network equipment Based on the reciprocity of the uplink and downlink channels, the network equipment can measure the uplink channel based on the uplink reference signal, such as a sounding reference signal (SRS).
  • SRS sounding reference signal
  • the downlink channel can be estimated according to the uplink channel, so that the precoding matrix for downlink transmission can be determined.
  • the uplink and downlink channels do not have complete reciprocity, and the uplink channel is used to determine the precoding matrix for downlink transmission. It cannot be adapted to the downlink channel.
  • the uplink and downlink channels in the FDD mode still have partial reciprocity, for example, the reciprocity of angle and the reciprocity of delay. Therefore, angle and delay can also be called reciprocity parameters.
  • Multipath time delay causes frequency selective fading, which is the change of frequency domain channel.
  • the time delay is the transmission time of the wireless signal on different transmission paths, which is determined by the distance and speed, and has nothing to do with the frequency domain of the wireless signal.
  • signals are transmitted on different transmission paths, there are different transmission delays due to different distances. Since the physical location between the network equipment and the terminal equipment is fixed, the multipath distribution of the uplink and downlink channels is the same in terms of delay. Therefore, the uplink and downlink channels in the FDD mode with delay can be considered the same, or in other words, reciprocal.
  • the angle may refer to the angle of arrival (AOA) at which the signal reaches the receiving antenna via the wireless channel, or may refer to the angle of departure (AOD) at which the signal is transmitted through the transmitting antenna.
  • AOA angle of arrival
  • AOD angle of departure
  • the angle may refer to the angle of arrival at which the uplink signal reaches the network device, and may also refer to the angle of departure at which the network device transmits the downlink signal. Due to the reciprocity of the transmission paths of the uplink and downlink channels on different frequencies, the arrival angle of the uplink reference signal and the departure angle of the downlink reference signal can be considered to be reciprocal.
  • each angle can be characterized by an angle vector.
  • Each delay can be characterized by a delay vector. Therefore, in the embodiment of the present application, an angle vector may represent an angle, and a delay vector may represent a time delay.
  • an angle delay pair may include an angle vector and a delay vector.
  • Angle vector It can also be called a space vector, beam vector, etc.
  • the angle vector can be understood as a precoding vector used for beamforming the reference signal.
  • the process of precoding the reference signal based on the angle vector can also be regarded as a process of spatial domain (or simply, spatial domain) precoding.
  • the angle vector can be a vector of length T.
  • T can represent the number of transmitting antenna ports, T>1 and an integer.
  • T spatial weights or weights for short
  • the T weights can be used to weight the T transmit antenna ports so that the T transmit antennas
  • the reference signal emitted by the port has a certain spatial directivity, so as to realize beamforming.
  • Precoding the reference signal based on different angle vectors is equivalent to beamforming the transmitting antenna port based on different angle vectors, so that the transmitted reference signals have different spatial directivities.
  • the angle vector is a Discrete Fourier Transform (DFT) vector.
  • the DFT vector may refer to the vector in the DFT matrix.
  • the angle vector is the conjugate transpose vector of the DFT vector.
  • the DFT conjugate transpose vector may refer to the column vector in the conjugate transpose matrix of the DFT matrix.
  • the angle vector is an oversampled DFT vector.
  • the oversampled DFT vector may refer to the vector in the oversampled DFT matrix.
  • the angle vector may be, for example, the 3rd Generation Partnership Project (3GPP) technical specification (TS) 38.214 version 15 (release 15, R15) or type II (type II) in R16. II) Two-dimensional (2dimensions, 2D)-DFT vector v l,m defined in the codebook.
  • 3GPP 3rd Generation Partnership Project
  • TS Technical specification
  • type II type II
  • the angle vector can be a 2D-DFT vector or an oversampled 2D-DFT vector.
  • the delay vector can also be taken from the DFT matrix. This application does not limit the specific form of the delay vector.
  • angle vector is a form for expressing an angle proposed in this application.
  • the angle vector is only named for the convenience of distinguishing from the delay vector, and should not constitute any limitation in this application. This application does not exclude the possibility of defining other names in future agreements to represent the same or similar meanings.
  • V can be expressed as a matrix with a dimension of R ⁇ T.
  • R is the number of receiving antenna ports
  • T is the number of transmitting antenna ports
  • R and T are both positive integers.
  • the precoded reference signal obtained by precoding the reference signal based on the angle vector can be transmitted to the terminal device through the downlink channel. Therefore, the channel measured by the terminal device according to the received precoding reference signal is equivalent to The channel with the angle vector loaded.
  • loading the angle vector ak to the downlink channel V can be expressed as Va k .
  • the angle vector is loaded on the reference signal, that is, the angle vector is loaded on the channel.
  • Time delay vector It can also be called a frequency domain vector.
  • the delay vector is a vector used to represent the changing law of the channel in the frequency domain.
  • multipath delay causes frequency selective fading.
  • the time delay of the signal in the time domain can be equivalent to the phase gradual change in the frequency domain.
  • the change law of the phase of the channel in each frequency domain unit can be represented by a time delay vector.
  • the delay vector can be used to represent the delay characteristics of the channel.
  • the delay vector can be a vector of length N.
  • N may represent the number of frequency domain units used to carry the reference signal, and N>1 and is an integer.
  • N may represent the number of frequency domain units used to carry the reference signal, and N>1 and is an integer.
  • N may represent the number of frequency domain units used to carry the reference signal, and N>1 and is an integer.
  • N includes N frequency domain weights (or simply, weights), and the N weights can be used to perform phase rotation on N frequency domain units, respectively.
  • Precoding the reference signal based on different delay vectors is equivalent to performing phase rotation on each frequency domain unit of the channel based on different delay vectors. Moreover, the angle of phase rotation of the same frequency domain unit can be different.
  • the delay vector is a DFT vector.
  • the DFT vector may be a vector in the DFT matrix.
  • the delay vector is a conjugate transpose vector of the DFT vector.
  • the DFT conjugate transpose vector may refer to the column vector in the conjugate transpose matrix of the DFT matrix.
  • the delay vector is an oversampled DFT vector.
  • the oversampled DFT vector may refer to the vector in the oversampled DFT matrix.
  • the delay vector can also be taken from the DFT matrix. This application does not limit the specific form of the delay vector.
  • the delay vector is a form of time delay proposed in this application.
  • the delay vector is only named for the convenience of distinguishing from the angle vector, and should not constitute any limitation in this application. This application does not exclude the possibility of defining other names in future agreements to represent the same or similar meanings.
  • the precoded reference signal can be transmitted to the terminal device through the downlink channel. Therefore, the channel measured by the terminal device according to the received precoding reference signal is equivalent to The channel with the delay vector loaded.
  • the delay vector is loaded on the reference signal, that is, the delay vector is loaded on the channel.
  • multiple weights in the delay vector are respectively loaded on multiple frequency domain units of the channel, and each weight is loaded on a frequency domain unit.
  • the N weights in the delay vector can be loaded into the load on the On the reference signal of the N RBs, that is, the N elements in the delay vector are respectively loaded on the N RBs.
  • precoding the reference signal based on the delay vector is similar to the processing method of spatial precoding, except that the spatial vector (or angle vector) is replaced with a delay vector.
  • the frequency domain precoding of the reference signal based on the delay vector may be performed before or after the resource mapping, which is not limited in this application.
  • Fig. 2 shows a schematic diagram of precoding the reference signals carried on N RBs based on the delay vector bk.
  • the N RBs may include RB#1, RB#2 to RB#N, for example.
  • Each square in the figure represents an RB.
  • each RB in the figure may include one or more resource elements (RE) for carrying reference signals.
  • RE resource elements
  • the delay vector b k is loaded on N RBs, corresponding phase rotations can be performed on the N RBs respectively.
  • the N weights in the delay vector may correspond to the N RBs in a one-to-one correspondence.
  • the elements in the frequency domain vector b k Can be loaded on RB#1
  • the elements in the delay vector b k Can be loaded on RB#2
  • the elements in the delay vector b k Can be loaded on RB#N.
  • the nth element in the delay vector b k Can be loaded on RB#n.
  • I will not list them all here.
  • FIG. 2 is only an example, and shows an example of loading the delay vector b k to N RBs. But this should not constitute any limitation to this application.
  • the N RBs used to carry the reference signal in FIG. 2 may be consecutive N RBs or discontinuous N RBs, which is not limited in this application.
  • the network device can load more delay vectors on the above N RBs.
  • the frequency domain unit may be, for example, a subband, or RB, or RB group (resource block group, RBG), precoding resource block group (precoding resource block group, PRG), and so on. This application does not limit this.
  • each frequency domain unit is an RB.
  • Each element in the delay vector can be loaded on one RB.
  • the length N of the delay vector can be equal to the number of RBs in the broadband.
  • each weight in it corresponds to one RB.
  • each frequency domain unit is a subband.
  • Each element in the delay vector can be loaded on a subband.
  • the length N of the delay vector can be equal to the number of subbands in the broadband.
  • each weight in it corresponds to a subband.
  • Reference signal It can also be called a pilot (pilot), reference sequence, etc.
  • the reference signal may be a reference signal used for channel measurement.
  • the reference signal may be a channel state information reference signal (CSI-RS) used for downlink channel measurement, or it may be an SRS used for uplink channel measurement.
  • CSI-RS channel state information reference signal
  • SRS uplink channel measurement
  • the network device may precode the reference signal based on the angle vector and the delay vector to generate a precoded reference signal, or simply a precoded reference signal.
  • the process of precoding the reference signal based on the angle vector and the delay vector has been described above, and for brevity, it will not be repeated here.
  • reference signals involved in this application are all pre-coded reference signals, in the following for convenience of description, the pre-coded reference signals are simply referred to as reference signals.
  • Port It can also be called an antenna port.
  • the port may include a transmitting antenna port, a reference signal port, and a receiving port.
  • the transmitting antenna port may refer to an actual independent transmitting unit (transceiver unit, TxRU).
  • TxRU transmitting unit
  • the transmitting antenna port may refer to the TxRU of the network device.
  • the letter T can be used to indicate the number of transmitting antenna ports, and T>1 and is an integer.
  • the reference signal port may refer to a port corresponding to the reference signal. Since the reference signal is pre-coded based on the angle vector and the delay vector, the reference signal port may refer to the port of the pre-coded reference signal. For example, each reference signal port corresponds to an angle vector and a delay vector.
  • the letter P can be used to indicate the number of reference signal ports, and P ⁇ 1 and is an integer.
  • the receiving port can be understood as the receiving antenna of the receiving device.
  • the receiving port may refer to the receiving antenna of the terminal device.
  • the letter R can be used to indicate the number of receiving ports, and R ⁇ 1 and is an integer.
  • both the transmitting antenna port and the reference signal port can be referred to as the transmitting port.
  • the transmission bandwidth of the reference signal can refer to the bandwidth used to transmit the reference signal, which is a reference signal used for channel measurement, such as CSI-RS.
  • the transmission bandwidth of the reference signal may be, for example, the total bandwidth of the resource of the reference signal sent by a certain terminal device as described below, for example, the precoding reference signal resource occupied by the P reference signal ports sent by a certain terminal device The total bandwidth of the resource.
  • the transmission bandwidth of the reference signal may be the frequency domain occupied bandwidth of the CSI measurement resource.
  • the frequency-domain occupied bandwidth of the CSI measurement resource may be configured by high-level signaling, such as CSI-Frequency Occupation (CSI-Frequency Occupation).
  • pilot density the ratio of resource elements (resource elements, RE) occupied by reference signals of the same reference signal port to the number of frequency domain units N in the transmission bandwidth of the reference signal.
  • the pilot density of the reference signal of a certain reference signal port is 1, which can indicate that in the bandwidth occupied by the reference signal of this reference signal port, each RB has an RE used to carry the reference signal port.
  • Reference signal; for another example, the pilot density of the reference signal of a certain reference signal port is 0.5, which can indicate that in the bandwidth occupied by the reference signal of this reference signal port, one of every two RBs includes this
  • the RE of the reference signal of the reference signal port or in other words, there is at least one RB between two RBs used to carry the reference signal of this port.
  • the pilot density may be a value less than or equal to 1.
  • the pilot density is 1 or 0.5.
  • Space-frequency matrix It can be understood as a channel matrix in the frequency domain, which can be used to determine the precoding matrix.
  • the space-frequency matrix can be used to determine the downlink channel matrix of each frequency domain unit, and then the precoding matrix corresponding to each frequency domain unit can be determined.
  • the channel matrix corresponding to a certain frequency domain unit may be, for example, a conjugate transpose of a matrix constructed from column vectors corresponding to the same frequency domain unit in the space frequency matrix corresponding to each receiving port. For example, extracting the nth column vector in the space-frequency matrix corresponding to each receiving port, and arranging it from left to right according to the order of the receiving ports, a matrix of dimension T ⁇ R can be obtained. R represents the number of receiving ports, R ⁇ 1 and is an integer. After the matrix is conjugate transposed, the channel matrix V n of the nth frequency domain unit can be obtained.
  • the channel matrix V n of the nth frequency domain unit can be used to determine the precoding matrix of the nth frequency domain unit.
  • the channel matrix V n is subjected to singular value decomposition (SVD) to obtain the Conjugate transpose.
  • SVD singular value decomposition
  • performing SVD on the conjugate transpose of the channel matrix V n to obtain the precoding matrix.
  • the space-frequency matrix is an intermediate quantity used to determine the precoding matrix.
  • the concept of the space-frequency matrix is introduced for the convenience of understanding and description, but this does not mean that the space-frequency matrix will be generated. Based on the same concept, those skilled in the art can obtain different forms such as vectors or ordered arrays through different algorithms to replace the space-frequency matrix, thereby determining the precoding matrix. This application does not limit this.
  • F can represent a matrix constructed from one or more delay vectors
  • S can represent a matrix constructed from one or more angle vectors
  • C can represent a weighting coefficient construction corresponding to each angle vector and each delay vector Of the matrix.
  • the matrix F constructed by one or more delay vectors is recorded as a frequency domain weight matrix
  • the matrix S constructed by one or more angle vectors is recorded as a spatial weight matrix
  • the matrix C constructed by the weighting coefficient corresponding to each angle vector and each delay vector is recorded as the coefficient matrix.
  • the coefficient matrix C can be a K ⁇ K diagonal matrix, for example, it can be expressed as
  • the frequency domain weight matrix F may be, for example, a matrix with a dimension of N ⁇ K, for example, it may be expressed as [b 1 ... b K ].
  • the spatial weight matrix S may be, for example, a matrix with a dimension of T ⁇ K, for example, it may be expressed as [a 1 ... a K ]. Therefore, the space frequency matrix can satisfy:
  • each weighting coefficient in the coefficient matrix C corresponds to a delay vector in the frequency domain weight matrix F and an angle vector in the spatial domain weight matrix S.
  • the element c k,k in the kth row and kth column of the coefficient matrix C corresponds to the kth delay vector and the spatial domain in the frequency domain weight matrix F
  • the weighting coefficient of the k-th angle vector in the weight matrix S is the weighting coefficient of the k-th angle vector in the weight matrix S.
  • the k-th delay vector in the frequency-domain weight matrix F and the k-th angle vector in the spatial weight matrix S can be combined to obtain an angle-delay pair, or space-frequency vector pair, space-frequency pair, etc. . Therefore, from the K delay vectors in the frequency domain weight matrix and the K angle vectors in the spatial weight matrix, K angle delay pairs can be combined, and each angle delay pair contains an angle vector and a time delay. Extension vector.
  • the K angle delay pairs may correspond to the K weighting coefficients in the coefficient matrix C in a one-to-one correspondence.
  • the weighting coefficient c k, k in the coefficient matrix C may correspond to the angle delay pair of the k-th delay vector and the k-th angle vector, that is, the k-th angle delay pair.
  • any two angle delay pairs include different angle vectors, and/or any two angle delay pairs include different delay vectors.
  • any two angle delay pairs are different at least in at least one of the following: the angle vector and the delay vector. Therefore, it can be understood that there may be one or more repeated delay vectors in the K delay vectors in the frequency domain weight matrix F, and there may also be one or more in the K angle vectors in the spatial weight matrix S.
  • the repeated angle vectors are not limited in this application, as long as the K angle delay pairs obtained by the combination are different from each other. In other words, the above K angle delay pairs may be obtained by combining one or more mutually different angle vectors and one or more mutually different delay vectors.
  • the subscripts 1 to K in the above delay vectors b 1 to b 4 and the angle vectors a 1 to a 4 are only convenient for distinguishing the delay vector and the angle vector corresponding to different angle delay pairs, and the delay vector in the vector Or the angle has nothing to do.
  • the frequency domain weight matrix F, the spatial domain weight matrix S, and the coefficient matrix C listed above are only examples for ease of understanding.
  • the coefficient matrix C may not be expressed in the form of a diagonal matrix.
  • the coefficient matrix C can be expressed as a matrix of dimension L ⁇ M, L represents the number of delay vectors, M represents the number of angle vectors, L and M are both positive integers;
  • the frequency domain weight matrix F can be expressed as N ⁇ L matrix;
  • the spatial weight matrix S can be expressed as a T ⁇ M matrix.
  • the element c l,m in the lth row and mth column of the coefficient matrix C can correspond to the L delay vectors
  • the m-th angle vector in the l-th delay vector and the M-th angle vector is the weighting coefficient corresponding to the l-th delay vector and the m-th angle vector.
  • the coefficient matrix C is expressed as The frequency-domain weight matrix F is expressed as [b 1 ... b L ], and the spatial-domain weight matrix S is expressed as [a 1 ... a M ], then the above-mentioned space-frequency matrix H can satisfy:
  • the L delay vectors in the frequency domain weight matrix F are different from each other, and the M angle vectors in the angle weight matrix S are also different from each other.
  • the angle vectors can be combined to obtain L ⁇ M angle delay pairs.
  • the network device may pre-load multiple angle delay pairs on the reference signal, or in other words, precode the reference signal based on the multiple angle delay pairs.
  • the terminal device can perform channel estimation based on the received reference signal, and determine it based on the reference signal received on the same frequency domain unit corresponding to the same angle delay pair Perform full-band accumulation of the channel estimation value to obtain the weighting coefficient corresponding to the angle delay pair.
  • the terminal device may feed back the weighting coefficients corresponding to the multiple angle delay pairs to the network device, so that the network device can reconstruct the downlink channel, and then determine the precoding matrix adapted to the downlink channel.
  • Fig. 3 shows the process of determining the weighting coefficient corresponding to the angle delay pair after loading the angle delay pair on N RBs.
  • the network device can pre-encode the reference signal based on the k-th angle delay in the above K angle-delay pairs, that is, the angle vector a k in the k-th angle delay pair and the time
  • the delay vector b k is respectively loaded on the N RBs shown in Fig. 3, and then channel estimation can be performed on the reference signals received on the N RBs to obtain N estimated values.
  • the estimated value on the nth RB is recorded for Then the weighting coefficient corresponding to the k-th angle delay pair can be obtained as
  • the pilot overhead will increase linearly with the increase in the number of terminal equipment. If the number of terminal devices in the cell is large, the pilot overhead will become unacceptable.
  • this application provides a channel measurement method in order to reduce pilot overhead.
  • the terminal device shown in the following embodiments can be replaced with components configured in the terminal device (such as circuits, chips, chip systems, or other functional modules that can call and execute programs, etc.); the network devices shown in the following embodiments can be replaced For configuration and network equipment components (such as circuits, chips, chip systems or other functional modules that can call and execute programs, etc.).
  • the program recording the code of the method provided in the embodiment of the present application can be used to implement the channel measurement according to the method provided in the embodiment of the present application.
  • K angle delay pairs included K delay vectors are used to construct the frequency domain weight matrix F, and the dimension of the frequency domain weight matrix F is N ⁇ K; K angles The K angle vectors included in the delay pair are used to construct the spatial weight matrix S, and the dimension of the constructed spatial weight matrix S is T ⁇ K.
  • the frequency domain unit is RB.
  • the number of RBs included in the reference signal resource is N.
  • the following embodiments all use a transmitting antenna and a receiving antenna port in a polarization direction as examples to illustrate the channel measurement method provided in the embodiments of the present application.
  • a receiving port is taken as an example to illustrate the channel measurement method provided in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the polarization direction of the transmitting antenna of the network device is not limited, and the number of receiving antenna ports of the terminal device is also not limited.
  • the angle vector can still be a vector of length T.
  • the network device may transmit the precoding reference signal corresponding to the same angle delay pair through the transmitting antennas in the two polarization directions.
  • the terminal device can perform measurement and feedback based on the same method described below.
  • the first indication information generated by the terminal device in the following embodiment may be used to indicate R groups of weighting coefficients, and each group of weighting coefficients includes K weighting coefficients corresponding to K angle delay pairs.
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic flowchart of a channel measurement method 400 provided by an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 4, the method 400 may include step 410 to step 450. Hereinafter, each step in the method 400 will be described in detail with reference to the accompanying drawings.
  • step 410 the network device generates a precoding reference signal.
  • the network device may pre-encode the reference signal based on the K angle delay pairs to obtain the pre-encoded reference signal.
  • the K angle delay pairs include one or more angle vectors and one or more delay vectors. The relationship between the angle delay pair and the angle vector and the delay vector has been described in detail above, and for the sake of brevity, it will not be repeated here.
  • the above-mentioned one or more angle vectors and one or more delay vectors may be based on the reciprocity of the uplink and downlink channels, and the stronger one or more angle vectors and the stronger one or more are determined by the network equipment based on the uplink channel measurement.
  • Multi-delay vector For example, the network device can determine the uplink channel by DFT in the space domain and the frequency domain, or use existing estimation algorithms, such as joint angle and delay estimation (JADE) algorithms. This application does not limit this.
  • JADE joint angle and delay estimation
  • the aforementioned one or more angle vectors and one or more delay vectors may also be statistically determined by the network device based on feedback results of one or more previous downlink channel measurements. This application does not limit this.
  • the network device may reduce the delay of each angle to the number of loaded RBs. For example, each delay vector is loaded on a part of the N RBs, so that the RBs loaded with the reference signal of the same angle delay pair are discretely distributed among the N RBs. That is, the RB corresponding to each angular delay pair is a part of the N RBs.
  • the network device may configure P reference signal ports for each terminal device, and each reference signal port corresponds to Q angle delay pairs, that is, the reference signal configured by the network device for each terminal device may be a load A precoding reference signal with a total of P ⁇ Q angle delay pairs is obtained.
  • the precoding reference signal received by each terminal device corresponds to P reference signal ports. Since each reference signal port corresponds to Q angle delay pairs, that is, the network device generates a precoding reference signal for each terminal device.
  • each of the Q angle vectors included in the Q angle delay pairs includes multiple spatial weights, and the Q angle vectors can be used as Q spatial weight vectors.
  • the reference signals on the N RBs are pre-coded. That is, Q angle vectors corresponding to one reference signal port are used to perform precoding polling on N RBs.
  • the Q delay vectors included in the Q angle delay pairs are used to determine N frequency domain weights, and the N frequency domain weights can correspond to the N RBs for Precoding the reference signals carried on N RBs. That is, N frequency domain weights are determined from Q delay vectors corresponding to one reference signal port. The N frequency domain weights may be extracted from Q delay vectors.
  • the 18 RBs may include RB#1 to RB#18.
  • Fig. 5 shows an example where the pilot density D is 1.
  • the pilot density is 1, which means that each RB has an RE used to carry the reference signal of the same reference signal port.
  • the RE in each RB is not shown in the figure, it can be understood that each RB in RB#1 to RB#18 in the figure has an RE for carrying the precoding reference signal of the same reference signal port. Since each reference signal port can correspond to Q angle delay pairs, consecutive Q RBs corresponding to the same reference signal port can correspond to Q different angle delay pairs, that is, each reference signal port corresponds to each reference signal port. The consecutive Q RBs may respectively correspond to Q different angle delay pairs. Therefore, in FIG. 5, every 4 consecutive RBs corresponding to the same reference signal port may correspond to 4 different angle delay pairs.
  • the four angular delay pairs corresponding to the same reference signal port shown in the figure include (a 1 , b 1 ), (a 2 , b 2 ), (a 3 , b 3 ), (a 4 , b 4 ).
  • RB#1, RB#5, RB#9, RB#13, RB#17 can correspond to the same angle delay pair (a 1 , b 1 )
  • RB#2, RB#6, RB#10, RB #14, RB#18 can correspond to the same angle delay pair (a 2 , b 2 )
  • RB#3, RB#7, RB#11, RB#15 can correspond to the same angle delay pair (a 3 ,b 3 )
  • RB#4, RB#8, RB#12, and RB#16 may correspond to the same angle delay pair (a 4 , b 4 ).
  • the minimum interval between RBs corresponding to each angular delay pair in FIG. 5 is 3 RBs. It can be seen that the number of RBs corresponding to each angle delay pair does not exceed indivual. As in Fig. 5, the number of RBs corresponding to each angular delay pair is 4 or 5.
  • FIG. 5 shows an example of loading angle vectors a 1 to a 4 on each RB
  • FIG. 5 shows loading delay vectors b 1 to b 4 To the examples on each RB.
  • the angle vector a 1 can be loaded on RB#1, RB#5, RB#9, RB#13, RB#17, and the angle vector a 2 can be loaded on RB#2 , RB#6, RB#10, RB#14, RB#18, angle vector a 3 can be loaded on RB#3, RB#7, RB#11, RB#15, angle vector a 4 can be loaded On RB#4, RB#8, RB#12, RB#16.
  • the angle vectors a 1 to a 4 are loaded on each RB in turn, forming multiple cycles, that is, corresponding to the same reference signal port. Every 4 consecutive RBs can correspond to 4 different angle vectors respectively.
  • the first weight in the delay vector b 1 Can be loaded on RB#1, the second weight in the delay vector b 2 Can be loaded on RB#2, the third weight in the delay vector b 3 Can be loaded on RB#3, the fourth weight in the delay vector b 4 Can be loaded on RB#4, the 5th weight in the delay vector b 1 Can be loaded on RB#5, the sixth weight in the delay vector b 2 Can be loaded on RB#6, the seventh weight in the delay vector b 3 Can be loaded on RB#7, the 8th weight in the delay vector b 4 Can be loaded on RB#8, and so on, until the 18th weight in the delay vector b 2 Loaded on RB#18, that is, every 4 consecutive RBs corresponding to the same reference signal port can correspond to 4 different delay vectors.
  • the pilot density D is 1, and the length of the delay vector is N.
  • the weights in the four delay vectors are loaded onto each RB in turn. That is to say, every 4 RBs of the 18 RBs form a cycle, from RB#1 to RB#4, the 4 RBs are loaded in turn and are taken from the 4 weights in the delay vectors b 1 to b 4 respectively.
  • the 4 RBs are loaded in turn and are taken from the 4 weights of the delay vectors b 1 to b 4 , from RB#9 to RB#12, the 4 RBs are again The four weights in the delay vectors b 1 to b 4 are taken in turn to be loaded, and so on, until each of the 18 RBs is loaded with a frequency domain weight.
  • the 18 RBs are loaded with 4 angle vectors and 4 delay vectors, that is, 4 angle delay pairs are loaded. It can be seen that when the pilot density is 1, there are at least 3 RBs between every two RBs loaded with the same angular delay pair, that is, Q-1 RBs.
  • the network device can load the Q angle delay pairs corresponding to the reference signal port onto the N RBs based on the method described above.
  • the network device can reorganize the frequency domain weight matrix F constructed from the K delay vectors to obtain a new frequency domain weight matrix Then based on the frequency domain weight matrix obtained by recombination Perform frequency domain precoding on the reference signal.
  • q:Q:end means from the qth to the last, the value is taken in increments of Q.
  • q is traversed from 1 to Q to determine the N frequency domain weights corresponding to the p-th reference signal port .
  • the weights are extracted with the increment of Q, and the extracted weights are used as the matrix
  • the weight of the second column take the second row, sixth row, tenth row, fourteenth row, and eighteenth row of the first column in matrix F.
  • the weights are extracted with Q as the increment, and the extracted weights are used as the matrix
  • the weight of the third column take the third row, the seventh row, the 11th row, and the 15th row of the third column in the matrix F.
  • the weights are extracted with Q as the increment, and the extracted weights are used as the matrix For example, in the above example, take the 4th row, 8th row, 12th row, and 16th row of the 4th column in matrix F.
  • the N frequency domain weights corresponding to the N RBs are as follows:
  • the network device can determine the N ⁇ P frequency domain weights corresponding to the P reference signal ports from the K delay vectors.
  • the N ⁇ P frequency domain weights can construct an N ⁇ P-dimensional matrix, that is, the matrix It is an N ⁇ P dimensional matrix.
  • the matrix is reorganized based on matrix F
  • precoding the reference signal in the frequency domain is only a possible implementation manner, and should not constitute any limitation in this application.
  • the matrix It may not necessarily be generated.
  • Those skilled in the art can implement the above process through different algorithms based on the same concept. This application does not limit this.
  • the spatial weight vector used may also be determined based on the reference signal port and the RB number.
  • the spatial weight vector used by the nth RB corresponding to the pth reference signal port may be the (p-1)Q+(n-1)%Q+1th angle vector among the K angle vectors.
  • Fig. 6 shows an example where the pilot density D is 0.5.
  • the pilot density is 0.5, which means that there is one RE in every two RBs for carrying the reference signal of the same reference signal port.
  • the RBs carrying the precoding reference signal are shown in squares with filling patterns in the figure, and the RBs not carrying the precoding reference signal are shown as blank squares.
  • FIG. 6 only shows the RB carrying the precoding reference signal for one reference signal port. In the case where there are multiple reference signal ports, it is also possible that some of the precoding reference signals corresponding to the reference signal ports are carried on the RBs shown in blank squares in the figure.
  • each RB is not shown in the figure, it can be understood that every other RB in RB#1 to RB#18 in the figure contains an RE for carrying the reference signal of the same reference signal port.
  • RB#1, RB#3, RB#5, RB#7, RB#9, RB#11, RB#13, RB#15, RB#17 are used to carry the same reference signal port Reference signal, other RBs are not used to carry the reference signal of the reference signal port.
  • the figure shown in the figure is only for illustration, and 9 RBs such as RB#2, RB#4, RB#6, RB#8, RB#10, RB#12, RB#14, RB#16, and RB#18 To carry the reference signal of the same reference signal port. There is no limitation here.
  • each reference signal port can correspond to Q angle delay pairs
  • consecutive Q/D RBs corresponding to the same reference signal port can correspond to Q different angle delay pairs. Therefore, in FIG. 6, consecutive 8 RBs corresponding to the same reference signal port can correspond to 4 different angle delay pairs.
  • the four angular delay pairs corresponding to the same reference signal port shown in the figure include (a 1 , b 1 ), (a 2 , b 2 ), (a 3 , b 3 ), (a 4 , b 4 ).
  • RB#1, RB#9, RB#17 can correspond to the same angle delay pair (a 1 ,b 1 )
  • RB#3, RB#11 can correspond to the same angle delay pair (a 2 ,b 2 )
  • RB#5, RB#13 can correspond to the same angle delay pair (a 3 ,b 3 )
  • RB#7, RB#15 can correspond to the same angle delay pair (a 4 ,b 4 ) .
  • Figure 6 shows that the angle vectors are loaded on different RBs. It can be found that on the 18 RBs arranged in sequence from RB#1 to RB#18, the angle vectors a 1 to a 4 are alternately loaded on 9 of the RBs used to carry the reference signal, forming multiple cycles.
  • the delay vector may be a vector of length 9.
  • Weight vectors for the frequency domain in the frequency domain may be weighted, for example from a delay vector. 1 b to b 4, it can be reconstructed from the portion by weight of 4 vectors extracted delay. 1 b to b vector.
  • the following shows an example of the frequency domain weight vectors b 1 ′ to b 4 ′ reconstructed from the time delay vectors b 1 to b 4. According to the interval between the loaded RBs, the corresponding weights are extracted from the delay vectors b 1 to b 4 , and the frequency domain weight vectors b 1 ′ to b 4 ′ are obtained as follows:
  • the pilot density D is 0.5
  • the length of the delay vector is N/2.
  • the weights in the four delay vectors are loaded onto each RB in turn. In other words, every 4 RBs among the 18 RBs form a cycle.
  • the 4 RBs, RB#1, RB#3, RB#5, and RB#7 are loaded in turn and are respectively taken from the 4 weights in the frequency domain weight vector b 1 'to b 4'; RB # 9, RB # 11, RB # 13, RB # 15 and RB four turns are loaded from 'to 4 b' 4 weightings frequency domain values b 1 weight vectors, respectively; RB # 17 is the last One RB corresponding to the same reference signal port, RB#17 is loaded with 1 weight taken from the frequency domain weight vector b 1 ′. Thus, among the 18 RBs, every RB has 1 RB loaded into a frequency domain weight.
  • the 18 RBs are loaded with 4 angle vectors and 4 delay vectors, that is, 4 angle delay pairs are loaded. It can be seen that when the pilot density D is 0.5, there are at least 7 RBs between every two RBs loaded with the same angular delay pair, that is, Q/D-1 RBs.
  • the network device can load the Q angle delay pairs corresponding to the reference signal port onto the N RBs based on the method described above.
  • the network device can still reorganize the frequency domain weight matrix F based on the method described above to obtain the frequency domain weight matrix Then based on the frequency domain weight matrix obtained by recombination Perform frequency domain precoding on the reference signal.
  • the specific process is the same as that described above, for the sake of brevity, it will not be repeated here.
  • the spatial weight vector used when the network device performs spatial precoding on the reference signal may also be determined based on the method described above.
  • the spatial weight vector used by the nth RB corresponding to the pth reference signal port may be the (p-1)Q+(n-1)%Q+1th angle vector among the K angle vectors. The specific process is the same as that described above, for the sake of brevity, it will not be repeated here.
  • the network device can perform spatial and frequency precoding on the reference signal based on the method described above.
  • the RBs corresponding to the same angular delay pair are arranged at intervals of Q/D-1 RBs.
  • the network device can configure the value of Q and/or D so that the value of Q/D is an integer.
  • the same RB may correspond to multiple reference signal ports, and is used to carry reference signals of multiple reference signal ports.
  • the multiple reference signal ports can be multiplexed by means of frequency division multiplexing (FDM), time division multiplexing (TDM), code division multiplexing (CDM), etc., for example.
  • FDM frequency division multiplexing
  • TDM time division multiplexing
  • CDM code division multiplexing
  • Step 420 The network device sends a precoding reference signal.
  • the terminal device receives the precoding reference signal.
  • the network device may transmit the precoding reference signal to the terminal device through the pre-configured reference signal resource.
  • the process of the network device sending the precoding reference signal to the terminal device may be the same as the prior art, and for brevity, it will not be described in detail here.
  • the network device sends the reference signals of the P reference signal ports, and the terminal device can receive the reference signals of the P reference signal ports.
  • step 430 the terminal device generates first indication information, which is used to indicate K weighting coefficients corresponding to K angle delay pairs.
  • the terminal device may perform channel estimation based on the precoding reference signal received in step 420 to obtain a channel estimation value corresponding to each reference signal port on each RB.
  • each reference signal port corresponds to Q angle delay pairs, and the terminal device can determine Q weighting coefficients based on the precoding reference signal of each reference signal port.
  • a total of P ⁇ Q weighting coefficients can be determined, that is, K weighting coefficients.
  • the terminal device When determining the K weighting coefficients, the terminal device needs to predetermine the number P of reference signal ports, the number Q of angle delay pairs corresponding to each reference signal port, and which RBs each angle delay pair is loaded on. That is, the D value, Q value, and P value need to be known in advance.
  • pilot density D and the number of reference signal ports P can be indicated by existing signaling, for example, by configuration signaling of reference signal resources.
  • Q can be a fixed value.
  • Q is a predefined value, for example, the protocol defines the Q value in advance.
  • the network device only needs to indicate the D value and P value through existing signaling, and the terminal device can determine the D value, P value, and Q value.
  • the method further includes: the network device sends third indication information, where the third indication information is used to indicate the value of Q.
  • the terminal device receives the third indication information.
  • the third indication information is used for the terminal device to determine the value of Q.
  • the indication of Q may be an explicit indication or an implicit indication.
  • the network device and the terminal device pre-appoint the correspondence between multiple possible values of Q and multiple indexes, and the network device may indicate the index corresponding to the current Q value through the third indication information to indicate the Q value.
  • the network device and the terminal device pre-agreed on the correspondence between multiple possible values of K/P and multiple indexes, and the network device may indirectly indicate Q through the third indication information indicating the ratio of the currently used K to P Value.
  • the network device may indicate the bandwidth currently allocated to the terminal device through the third indication information to implicitly indicate the Q value currently allocated to the terminal device.
  • the third indication information may be, for example, existing configuration signaling about the transmission bandwidth of the reference signal.
  • the signaling may be CSI-Frequency Occupation.
  • the network device may directly indicate the value of Q or indicate the value of Q-1 through the third indication information.
  • the network device may indicate the value of K through the third indication information to indirectly indicate the value of Q.
  • the third indication information may be, for example, existing signaling, or carried in existing signaling, or may also be newly-added signaling. This application does not limit this.
  • the network device may also indicate the value of one or more of D, K, P, and Q through an additional signaling. This application is not limited to this.
  • each of the K weighting coefficients may be determined by the precoding reference signal received on the RBs corresponding to the same angle delay pair among the N RBs, which may be specifically determined by the above corresponding to the same angle delay pair.
  • the channel estimation value on the RB of an angle delay pair is accumulated and summed.
  • the RB corresponding to each angular delay pair is a part of the RBs in the N RBs, that is, the weighting coefficient corresponding to each angular delay pair is determined by the channel estimation value on the part of the RBs in the N RBs. It is obtained by accumulation and summation, without the need to accumulate and sum the channel estimation values on the N RBs.
  • the terminal device can receive the precoding reference signal corresponding to the angle delay pair (a 1 , b 1 ) on RB#1, RB#5, RB#9, RB#13, and RB#17, and on RB#2,
  • the precoding reference signal corresponding to the angle delay pair (a 2 , b 2 ) is received on RB#6, RB#10, RB#14, and RB#18.
  • the precoding reference signal corresponding to the angle delay pair (a 3 , b 3 ) is received on RB#15, and the corresponding angle delay pair is received on RB#4, RB#8, RB#12, and RB#16.
  • (a 4 , b 4 ) precoding reference signal is received.
  • the terminal device can receive the precoding reference signal corresponding to the same reference signal port on RB#1 to RB#18.
  • the weighting coefficient corresponding to each angle delay pair may be determined by the channel estimation value of the precoding reference signal corresponding to the angle delay pair, and specifically may be the channel estimation value of each RB loaded with the angle delay pair. Cumulative summation.
  • Each reference signal port in FIG. 5 corresponds to 4 angle delay pairs, so the terminal device performs channel estimation for the precoding reference signal of each reference signal port, and can obtain weighting coefficients corresponding to the 4 angle delay pairs.
  • the weighting coefficient corresponding to the angle delay pair (a 1 , b 1 ) can be determined based on the precoding reference signals received on RB#1, RB#5, RB#9, RB#13, and RB#17. .
  • the terminal equipment performs channel estimation based on the precoding reference signal corresponding to the angle delay pair (a 1 , b 1 ) received on RB#1, RB#5, RB#9, RB#13, and RB#17, which can be Get 5 channel estimates.
  • the cumulative sum of the five channel estimation values is the weighting coefficient corresponding to the angle delay pair (a 1 , b 1 ).
  • the weight coefficient corresponding to the angle delay pair (a 2 , b 2 ) may be determined based on the precoding reference signals received on RB#2, RB#6, RB#10, RB#14, and RB#18.
  • the terminal device performs channel estimation based on the precoding reference signal corresponding to the angle delay pair (a 2 , b 2 ) received on RB#2, RB#6, RB#10, RB#14, and RB#18, and can Get 5 channel estimates.
  • the cumulative sum of the five channel estimation values is the weighting coefficient corresponding to the angle delay pair (a 2 , b 2 ).
  • the weighting coefficients corresponding to the angle delay pair (a 3 , b 3 ) can be four determined based on the precoding reference signals received on RB#3, RB#7, RB#11, and RB#15.
  • the cumulative sum of the channel estimation value; the weighting coefficient corresponding to the angle delay pair (a 4 , b 4 ) may be determined based on the precoding reference signal received on RB#4, RB#8, RB#12, and RB#16 The cumulative sum of the 4 channel estimates.
  • FIG. 7 shows the corresponding relationship between each RB in FIG. 5 and the weighting coefficient of each angle delay pair.
  • the channel estimation values determined based on the precoding reference signals received on RB#1, RB#5, RB#9, RB#13, and RB#17 are:
  • the 5 channel estimation values are accumulated and summed, and the weighting coefficient corresponding to the angle delay pair (a 1 , b 1) can be obtained.
  • the weighting coefficient c p,1 corresponding to the angle delay pair (a 1 ,b 1 ) can satisfy: Among them, the subscript p,1 indicates the first angle delay pair corresponding to the p-th reference signal port; the superscript n indicates the nth RB, and ⁇ 1 indicates that the first corresponding to the p-th reference signal port is loaded.
  • the channel estimation values determined based on the precoding reference signals received on RB#2, RB#6, RB#10, RB#14, and RB#18 are:
  • the 5 channel estimation values are accumulated and summed, and the weighting coefficient corresponding to the angle delay pair (a 2 , b 2) can be obtained.
  • the weighting coefficient c p,2 corresponding to the angle delay pair (a 2 ,b 2 ) can satisfy: Among them, the subscript p,2 represents the first angle delay pair corresponding to the p-th reference signal port; ⁇ 2 represents the RB loaded with the second angle delay pair corresponding to the p-th reference signal port, for example, ⁇ 2 includes RB#2, RB#6, RB#10, RB#14, and RB#18.
  • the terminal device can determine that the weighting coefficient c p,4 corresponding to the angle delay pair (a 3 , b 3 ) can satisfy:
  • the weighting coefficient c p,4 corresponding to the angle delay pair (a 4 ,b 4 ) can satisfy:
  • the subscript p,3 represents the third angle delay pair corresponding to the p-th reference signal port;
  • ⁇ 3 represents the RB loaded with the third angle delay pair corresponding to the p-th reference signal port, for example, ⁇ 3 includes RB#3, RB#7, RB#11, RB#15;
  • the subscript p, 4 indicates the fourth angle delay pair corresponding to the p-th reference signal port;
  • ⁇ 4 indicates that the p-th above is loaded
  • the RB of the fourth angle delay pair corresponding to the reference signal port for example, ⁇ 4 includes RB#4, RB#8, RB#12, and RB#16.
  • the terminal device can determine 4 weighting coefficients corresponding to the p-th reference signal port.
  • the terminal device can traverse the value of p from 1 to P to obtain Q weighting coefficients corresponding to each reference signal port. Therefore, the terminal equipment can determine a total of P ⁇ Q weighting coefficients, that is, K weighting coefficients. If the K weighting coefficients are expressed by a matrix, they can be expressed as a coefficient matrix C as follows:
  • c p,q in the coefficient matrix C can represent the q-th angle time corresponding to the p-th reference signal port among the P reference signal ports and the Q-th angle delay pair corresponding to the p-th reference signal port.
  • the weighting factor of the extension is the weighting factor of the extension.
  • each row of the matrix corresponds to a reference signal port, and each row includes the weighting coefficients of Q angle delay pairs corresponding to the reference signal port.
  • each column of the matrix corresponds to a reference signal port, and each column includes the weighting coefficients of Q angle delay pairs corresponding to the reference signal port.
  • the feedback of the K weighting coefficients by the terminal device may be reported in sequence according to the reporting rule indicated by the network device.
  • the method further includes: the network device sends second indication information, where the second indication information is used to indicate a reporting rule.
  • the terminal device receives the second indication information.
  • the terminal device can generate the first instruction information based on the reporting rule, and then in step 440, send the first instruction information to the network device.
  • a possible reporting rule is to sequentially report Q weighting coefficients corresponding to each reference signal port in a sequence from the first reference signal port to the P-th reference signal port. That is, the values of p are sequentially taken from 1 to P, and for each value of p, the corresponding Q weighting coefficients are reported,
  • the terminal device may preferentially report by row, from the first row to the P-th row, sequentially reporting the Q weighting coefficients in each row. For example, according to c 1,1 , c 1,2 , ..., c 1,Q , c 2,1 , c 2,2 , ..., c 2,Q , ..., c P,1 , c P,2 ,..., c P, Q are reported in the order of K weighting coefficients.
  • Another possible reporting rule is to first report the weighting coefficient of the first angle delay pair corresponding to P reference signal ports, and then report the weighting coefficient of the second angle delay pair corresponding to P reference signal ports , And so on, until finally, report the weighting coefficient of the Q-th angle delay pair corresponding to the P reference signal ports. That is, the values of q are sequentially taken from 1 to Q, and for each value of q, the corresponding P weighting coefficients are reported.
  • the terminal device may preferentially report by column, from the first column to the Q-th column, sequentially reporting the P weighting coefficients in each column. For example, according to c 1,1 , c 2,1 , ..., c P,1 , c 1,2 , c 2,2 , ..., c P,2 , ..., c 1,Q , c 2,Q ,..., c P, Q are reported in the order of K weighting coefficients.
  • the report of the above K weighting coefficients by the terminal device may, for example, use the quantized value, the index of the quantized value, or other forms to report. This application does not limit this.
  • the terminal device may perform normalization processing on the K weighting coefficients, and quantize and report the result of the normalization processing.
  • the so-called normalization process is the process of controlling the amplitude value of all weighting coefficients within the range of not exceeding 1 within the range of the normalization unit.
  • the terminal device may use the weighting coefficient with the largest magnitude among the K weighting coefficients as a reference to perform normalization processing.
  • the terminal device may divide the amplitudes of the remaining weighting coefficients except the weighting coefficient with the largest amplitude by the amplitude of the weighting coefficient with the largest amplitude to obtain the ratio corresponding to each weighting coefficient.
  • the amplitude of the weighting coefficient with the largest amplitude is normalized to 1, and the remaining weighting coefficients are their respective ratios to the maximum amplitude.
  • the terminal device may generate the first indication information according to the above-mentioned reporting rule based on the quantized value of each normalized result.
  • the terminal device can use the first indication information to indicate the position of the weighting coefficient of the maximum amplitude, for example, the row and column in the coefficient matrix with the largest amplitude, and can use the first indication information to indicate the quantization of the remaining weighting coefficients. value.
  • the terminal device may use the first weighting coefficient among the K weighting coefficients, for example, c 1,1 in the aforementioned coefficient matrix C as a reference to perform normalization processing.
  • the specific processing method is similar to that described above, for the sake of brevity, it will not be repeated here. Since it is pre-defined that the first weighting coefficient of the K weighting coefficients is used as a reference for normalization processing, when the terminal device indicates the K weighting coefficients through the first indication information, it may not indicate the weighting as the reference. The position of the coefficient directly indicates the quantized value corresponding to the remaining weighting coefficients.
  • the terminal device can use any one of the K weighting coefficients as a reference to normalize the K weighting coefficients.
  • the K weighting coefficients can be used as a reference to normalize the K weighting coefficients.
  • the terminal device indicates the aforementioned K weighting coefficients through the quantized value after the normalization process, it does not necessarily indicate all the quantized values of the K weighting coefficients to the network device.
  • the quantized value of the weighting coefficient used as the reference may not be indicated, but the network device can still recover the above K weighting coefficients according to the information indicated by the terminal device. Therefore, it can be considered that the first indication information is used to indicate K weighting coefficients.
  • each angle delay pair can be loaded on each of the N RBs, and the terminal device is determined to be with each RB.
  • the angle delay is used for the corresponding weighting coefficient
  • the channel estimation values obtained on the N RBs are accumulated in the full band, that is, the N channel estimation values are accumulated and summed.
  • This method can coexist with the method provided in this embodiment. For example, the network device may select one of them to perform downlink channel measurement according to factors such as current resource usage and the number of terminal devices.
  • the precoding reference signal sent by the network device may be the reference signal of the K reference signal ports corresponding to the K angle delay pairs, and each angle delay pair is loaded on the N RBs; it is also possible that each reference signal is loaded on the N RBs.
  • the signal port corresponds to Q angle delay pairs, and each angle delay pair is loaded on part of the N RBs.
  • the terminal device since the terminal device is not aware of the specific implementation of the precoding reference signal generated by the network device, the terminal device does not know whether a reference signal port corresponds to one angle delay pair or multiple angle delay pairs, in other words, the terminal device It is not known whether the angle delay pair loaded by the network device at the same position on the N RBs is the same angle delay pair or different delay pairs, that is, the terminal device does not know whether the received precoding reference signal is according to What is generated in the manner shown in FIG. 2 is still generated in the manner shown in FIG. 5 or FIG. 6.
  • the terminal device does not know whether to perform full-band accumulation on the channel estimation values on N RBs or to perform full-band accumulation on the channel estimation values of part of the N RBs when determining the corresponding weighting coefficient of an angle delay pair. Cumulative summation.
  • the network device may pre-configure the behavior of the terminal device through signaling. For example, the network device can notify the terminal device through signaling to perform full-band accumulation on the channel estimation values on N RBs when determining the corresponding weighting coefficient of an angle delay pair, or how many every N RBs The RB performs accumulation and summation of channel estimation values.
  • the network device can be implicitly indicated by the Q value. For example, if the network device indicates that the Q value is 1, it means that the minimum interval between two RBs corresponding to the same angular delay pair is 0, that is, the RBs corresponding to the same angular delay pair are consecutive in N RBs
  • the weighting coefficient corresponding to the angle delay pair can be determined by performing full-band accumulation on the channel estimation values on the N RBs. If the network device indicates that the Q value is greater than 1, it means that the minimum interval between two RBs corresponding to the same angular delay pair is 1 RB, that is, the RBs corresponding to the same angular delay pair are not among the N RBs. Continuous distribution, the channel estimation value can be accumulated and summed every Q/D-1 RB among the N RBs.
  • the network device may indicate whether the Q value is greater than 1. For example, it is indicated by 1 indicator bit, such as "1" means greater than 1, and "0" means equal to 1; for example, it is indicated by indicating the specific value of Q.
  • 1 indicator bit such as "1" means greater than 1
  • 0 means equal to 1
  • the specific value of Q for example, it is indicated by indicating the specific value of Q.
  • the indication of the specific value of Q has been described in detail above. Concise, I won't repeat it here.
  • the Q value may also be a fixed value.
  • the system can agree to perform precoding and channel measurement on the reference signal according to the method described above.
  • step 440 the terminal device sends first indication information.
  • the network device receives the first indication information.
  • the first indication information may be, for example, channel state information (channel state information, CSI), may also be part of information elements in the CSI, or may also be other information.
  • the first indication information is a precoding matrix indicator (precoding matrix indicator, PMI). This application does not limit this.
  • the first indication information may be carried in one or more messages in the prior art and sent by the terminal device to the network device, or carried in one or more newly designed messages and sent by the terminal device to the network device.
  • the terminal device may send the first indication information to the network device through physical uplink resources, such as physical uplink share channel (PUSCH) or physical uplink control channel (PUCCH), to facilitate the network device
  • the precoding matrix is determined based on the first indication information.
  • the specific method for the terminal device to send the first indication information to the network device through the physical uplink resource may be the same as the prior art. For brevity, a detailed description of the specific process is omitted here.
  • step 450 the network device determines the precoding matrix corresponding to each frequency domain unit according to the first indication information.
  • the network device can recover K weighting coefficients corresponding to K angle delay pairs, and then can combine the frequency domain weighting matrix F and the spatial domain weighting matrix S used in the previous precoding, Determine the precoding matrix.
  • the network device may obtain Q weighting coefficients corresponding to each of the P reference signal ports based on the rule of reporting K weighting coefficients by the terminal device.
  • the network device may generate a K ⁇ K-dimensional diagonal matrix based on the K weighting coefficients, and the K elements on the diagonal of the K ⁇ K-dimensional diagonal matrix are the above K weighting coefficients.
  • the K weighting coefficients have a one-to-one correspondence with the K delay vectors in the frequency domain weighting matrix F and the K angle vectors in the spatial weighting matrix S. Therefore, the network equipment can determine the space-frequency matrix H as shown in the following formula:
  • the diagonal matrix It can be K weighting coefficients recovered by the above network equipment to Constructed K ⁇ K dimensional diagonal matrix.
  • I will not list them all here.
  • the network device can determine the precoding suitable for each RB according to the downlink channel corresponding to each RB.
  • the precoding matrix corresponding to the RB may refer to the precoding matrix determined based on the channel matrix corresponding to the RB with the granularity of the RB, or in other words, the precoding matrix determined based on the precoding reference signal received on the RB , Can be used to pre-code the data transmitted through the RB.
  • the downlink channel corresponding to the RB may refer to a downlink channel determined based on the precoding reference signal received on the RB, and may be used to determine the precoding matrix corresponding to the RB.
  • the network device can load K angle delay pairs on part of the N RBs, so that the number of RBs loaded on one angle delay pair can be reduced. If each angle delay pair is loaded on N RBs, N RBs are needed to carry the precoding reference signal corresponding to one angle delay pair; but if each angle delay pair is loaded into N RBs On the part of RBs, the N RBs originally used to carry one angular delay pair can be used to carry the precoding reference signals corresponding to more angular delay pairs.
  • the pilot overhead can be reduced. In the case of a sharp increase in the number of terminal devices, the pilot overhead can be reduced by adjusting the angle delay logarithm Q corresponding to each reference signal port, so as to ensure that effective spectrum resources are fully utilized.
  • the terminal device can also determine the weighting coefficient corresponding to the angle delay pair according to the channel estimation value on the RB loaded with the same angle delay pair, which reduces the calculation of the terminal device. quantity.
  • the configuration of the reference signal port in the prior art can still be used in the embodiments of the present application. That is, the time-frequency resources configured as the same reference signal port are used to carry the precoding reference signals corresponding to Q angle delay pairs.
  • the terminal device does not need to perceive the specific process of the network device generating the precoding reference signal, and only needs to determine how to calculate the weighting coefficient corresponding to each angle delay pair according to the Q value. Therefore, the compatibility is strong, and the realization is flexible and convenient.
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic flowchart of a channel measurement method 800 provided by another embodiment of the present application.
  • the reference signal port in the channel measurement method shown in FIG. 8 corresponds to the angle delay on a one-to-one basis.
  • the number P of reference signal ports is equal to the logarithm K of the angle delay.
  • the precoding reference signals corresponding to the same reference signal port are discretely distributed on N RBs.
  • the method 800 may include steps 810 to 850.
  • the method shown in FIG. 8 will be described in detail below with reference to the accompanying drawings.
  • step 810 the network device generates a precoding reference signal.
  • the network device may pre-encode the reference signal based on the K angle delay pairs to obtain the pre-encoded reference signal.
  • the K angle delay pairs include one or more angle vectors and one or more delay vectors. The relationship between the angle delay pair, the angle vector and the delay vector, and the method for determining the K angle delay pairs have been explained above, and for the sake of brevity, it will not be repeated here.
  • the network device may reduce the number of RBs loaded for each angular delay pair, so that the RBs corresponding to each angular delay pair are part of the N RBs.
  • the RBs corresponding to each angular delay pair may be distributed at intervals of Q-1.
  • the RBs corresponding to each angular delay pair can be distributed at intervals of Q/D-1. That is to say, among the N RBs, one RB in each Q/D RB corresponds to the same angle delay pair.
  • the minimum distance between any two RBs corresponding to the same angular delay pair is Q/D-1 RBs.
  • the network device may configure K reference signal ports for each terminal device, and each reference signal port corresponds to an angle delay pair. That is, the reference signal configured by the network device for each terminal device may be a precoding reference signal loaded with K angle delay pairs. In other words, the precoding reference signal received by each terminal device corresponds to K reference signal ports. Since the network equipment loads each angle delay pair on part of the N RBs, and each reference signal port corresponds to an angle delay pair, each reference signal port is also discrete on the N RBs. distributed. That is, the RBs corresponding to each reference signal port may be distributed at intervals of Q/D-1. The minimum distance between any two RBs corresponding to the same reference signal port is Q/D-1 RBs.
  • FIG. 9 shows an example of the distribution of multiple reference signal ports on N RBs.
  • the 18 RBs may include RB#1 to RB#18.
  • pilot density D is 1, each RB in the figure has an RE for carrying the precoding reference signal of the same reference signal port. .
  • FIG. 9 shows the precoding reference signal of 4 reference signal ports, and the 4 reference signal ports can be denoted as port #1 to port #4.
  • the different filling patterns in the figure represent different reference signal ports.
  • port #1 may correspond to the angle delay pair (a 1 , b 1 ), which is carried on RB#1, RB#5, RB#9, RB#13, and RB#17 of the 18 RBs in the figure.
  • Port #2 can correspond to the angle delay pair (a 2 , b 2 ), and is carried on RB#2, RB#6, RB#10, RB#14, and RB#18 of the 18 RBs in the figure.
  • Port #3 can correspond to the angle delay pair (a 3 , b 3 ), and is carried on RB#3, RB#7, RB#11, and RB#15 among the 18 RBs in the figure.
  • Port #4 can correspond to the angle delay pair (a 4 , b 4 ), and is carried on RB#4, RB#8, RB#12, and RB#16 of the 18 RBs in the figure. It can be seen that the minimum interval between RBs corresponding to each reference signal port in FIG. 9 is 3 RBs.
  • each reference signal port corresponds to an angle delay pair
  • the precoding of the precoding reference signal corresponding to each reference signal port may be determined by an angle delay pair.
  • the precoding of the precoding reference signal corresponding to each reference signal port may include a spatial weight vector and a frequency domain weight vector.
  • each spatial domain weight vector is an angle vector in K angle delay pairs
  • each frequency domain weight vector is determined by a delay vector in K angle delay pairs.
  • the spatial weight vector in the precoding corresponding to the k-th reference signal port among the K reference signal ports is the first of the K angle delay pairs.
  • the frequency domain weight vector in the precoding corresponding to the k-th reference signal port among the K reference signal ports is determined by the k-th delay vector in the K angle delay pairs.
  • each delay vector is a vector of length N.
  • Each delay vector includes N weights.
  • the frequency domain weight of the precoding of the k-th reference signal port on the n-th RB among the N RBs is the n-th weight in the k-th delay vector.
  • FIG. 9 shows an example of loading angle vectors a 1 to a 4 on each RB
  • FIG. 9 shows loading delay vectors b 1 to b 4 To the examples on each RB.
  • each angle vector is evenly distributed in 18 RBs at intervals of 3 RBs.
  • Each angle vector is used as a spatial weight vector and loaded onto the corresponding RB of the pair.
  • each delay vector can be used to determine a frequency domain weight vector.
  • the first, fifth, ninth, thirteenth, and seventeenth weights in the delay vector b 1 can be used to form a frequency domain weight vector, of which 5 weights It is loaded on RB#1, RB#5, RB#9, RB#13, and RB#17 respectively.
  • the second, sixth, tenth, fourteenth, and eighteenth weights in the delay vector b 2 can be used to form a frequency domain weight vector, and the five weights are loaded in RB#. 2.
  • the third, seventh, eleventh, and fifteenth weights in the delay vector b 3 can be used to form a frequency domain weight vector, and the four weights are loaded on RB#3 and RB# respectively. 7.
  • the 4th, 8th, 12th, and 16th weights in b 4 in the delay vector can be used to form a frequency domain weight vector, and the 4 weights are loaded on RB#4 and RB respectively.
  • #8, RB#12, RB#16 It can be seen that the frequency domain weight loaded on each reference signal port is reduced, that is, the length of the frequency domain weight vector is smaller than the length of the delay vector.
  • the network device may reorganize based on the frequency domain weight matrix F constructed by the above K delay vectors to obtain a new frequency domain weight matrix Then based on the frequency domain weight matrix obtained by recombination Perform frequency domain precoding on the reference signal.
  • Network equipment based on matrix F recombination matrix please refer to the related description in the above method 400, for the sake of brevity, it will not be repeated here.
  • the new frequency domain weight matrix Compared with each frequency domain weight vector in the frequency domain weight matrix F, the length of each frequency domain weight vector in F is reduced.
  • the matrix is reorganized based on matrix F
  • precoding the reference signal in the frequency domain is only a possible implementation manner, and should not constitute any limitation in this application.
  • the matrix It may not necessarily be generated.
  • Those skilled in the art can implement the above process through different algorithms based on the same concept. This application does not limit this.
  • the RB may also include more REs for carrying reference signals to carry precoding reference signals of more reference signal ports.
  • This embodiment is also applicable to the case where the pilot density is not 1.
  • the pilot density is 0.5 and so on. Because its specific implementation process is similar to that shown in Figure 9 above. Based on the above description in conjunction with FIG. 6 and FIG. 9, those skilled in the art can easily think of each spatial weight vector, each frequency domain weight, each reference signal port, and each RB when the pilot density is 0.5. For the sake of brevity, the corresponding relationship between is not described in detail with the accompanying drawings.
  • the RBs corresponding to the same angular delay pair are arranged at intervals of Q/D-1 RBs.
  • the network device can configure the value of Q and/or D so that the value of Q/D is an integer.
  • the process of precoding the reference signals of the multiple reference signal ports by the network device may refer to the specific description above, and for the sake of brevity, it will not be repeated here.
  • the same RB may correspond to multiple reference signal ports, and is used to carry reference signals of multiple reference signal ports.
  • the multiple reference signal ports may multiplex the resources of the N RBs by means of FDD, TDD, CDD, etc., for example. This application does not limit this.
  • step 820 the network device transmits a precoding reference signal.
  • the terminal device receives the precoding reference signal.
  • the network device may transmit the precoding reference signal to the terminal device through the pre-configured reference signal resource.
  • the process of the network device sending the precoding reference signal to the terminal device may be the same as the prior art, and for brevity, it will not be described in detail here.
  • the network device sends the reference signals of K reference signal ports, and the terminal device can receive the reference signals of K reference signal ports.
  • step 830 the terminal device generates first indication information, where the first indication information is used to indicate K weighting coefficients corresponding to K angle delay pairs.
  • the terminal device may perform channel estimation based on the precoding reference signal received in step 420 to obtain a channel estimation value corresponding to each reference signal port on each RB.
  • each reference signal port corresponds to an angle delay pair, and the terminal device can determine a weighting coefficient based on the precoding reference signal of each reference signal port.
  • a total of K weighting coefficients can be determined.
  • the terminal device When determining the K weighting coefficients, the terminal device needs to determine in advance which RBs are loaded on the angle delay pair corresponding to each reference signal port, that is, it needs to know the interval between the RBs loaded by each angle delay pair . Therefore, the terminal device needs to know the D value, Q value and K value in advance.
  • pilot density D and the number of reference signal ports K can be indicated through existing signaling, for example, through configuration signaling of reference signal resources.
  • Q can be a fixed value.
  • Q is a predefined value, for example, the protocol defines the Q value in advance.
  • the network device only needs to indicate the D value and P value through existing signaling, and the terminal device can determine the D value, P value, and Q value.
  • the method further includes: the network device sends third indication information, where the third indication information is used to indicate the value of Q.
  • the terminal device receives the third indication information.
  • the third indication information is used for the terminal device to determine the value of Q.
  • the network device may also indicate the value of one or more of D, K, and Q through an additional signaling. This application is not limited to this.
  • each of the K weighting coefficients may be determined by the precoding reference signal received on the RBs corresponding to the same angle delay pair among the N RBs, which may be specifically determined by the above corresponding to the same angle delay pair.
  • the channel estimation value on the RB of an angle delay pair is accumulated and summed.
  • the RB corresponding to each angular delay pair is a part of the RBs in the N RBs, that is, the weighting coefficient corresponding to each angular delay pair is determined by the channel estimation value on the part of the RBs in the N RBs. It is obtained by accumulation and summation, without the need to accumulate and sum the channel estimation values on the N RBs.
  • the specific method for the terminal device to determine the weighting coefficient corresponding to each angle delay pair is similar to the method in method 400. Taking the example shown in Figure 9 as an example, the terminal equipment is based on the angle delay pair (a 1 , b 1 ) received on RB#1, RB#5, RB#9, RB#13, and RB#17.
  • the precoding reference signal is used for channel estimation, and 5 channel estimation values can be obtained, for example:
  • the cumulative sum of the five channel estimation values is the weighting coefficient corresponding to the angle delay pair (a 1 , b 1 ).
  • the weighting coefficient c 1 corresponding to the angle delay pair (a 1 , b 1 ) can satisfy: Among them, the subscript 1 represents the first angle delay pair of K angle delay pairs; the superscript n represents the nth RB, and ⁇ 1 represents the RB loaded with the first angle delay pair, for example, ⁇ 1 includes RB#1, RB#5, RB#9, RB#13, and RB#17. It can be understood that the weighting coefficient corresponding to the above-mentioned angle delay pair (a 1 , b 1 ) is also the weighting coefficient corresponding to the first reference signal port.
  • the terminal equipment performs processing based on the precoding reference signal corresponding to the angle delay pair (a 2 , b 2 ) received on RB#2, RB#6, RB#10, RB#14, and RB#18.
  • 5 channel estimation values can be obtained, for example: The cumulative sum of the five channel estimation values is the weighting coefficient corresponding to the angle delay pair (a 2 , b 2 ).
  • the weighting coefficient c 2 corresponding to the angle delay pair (a 2 , b 2 ) can satisfy: Among them, the subscript 2 represents the second angle delay pair among the K angle delay pairs; the superscript n represents the nth RB, and ⁇ 2 represents the loading of the above second angle delay pair (a 2 ,b 2 ) RB, for example, ⁇ 2 includes RB#2, RB#6, RB#10, RB#14, and RB#18.
  • the terminal equipment performs channel estimation on the precoding reference signal corresponding to the angle delay pair (a 3 , b 3 ) received on RB#3, RB#7, RB#12, RB#15, and can obtain 4 channels Estimated values, for example:
  • the cumulative sum of the four channel estimation values is the weighting coefficient corresponding to the angle delay pair (a 3 , b 3 ).
  • the weighting coefficient c 3 corresponding to the angle delay pair (a 3 , b 3 ) can satisfy: Among them, the subscript 3 represents the third angle delay pair among the K angle delay pairs; the superscript n represents the nth RB, and ⁇ 3 represents the third angle delay pair (a 3 ,b 3 ) RB, for example, ⁇ 3 includes RB#3, RB#7, RB#12, and RB#15.
  • the terminal equipment performs channel estimation on the precoding reference signal corresponding to the angle delay pair (a 4 , b 4 ) received on RB#4, RB#8, RB#12, RB#16, and can obtain 4 channels Estimated values, for example:
  • the cumulative sum of the four channel estimation values is the weighting coefficient corresponding to the angle delay pair (a 4 , b 4 ).
  • the weighting coefficient c 4 corresponding to the angle delay pair (a 4 , b 4 ) can satisfy: Among them, the subscript 4 represents the fourth angle delay pair among the K angle delay pairs; the superscript n represents the nth RB, and ⁇ 4 represents the fourth angle delay pair (a 4 ,b 4 ) RB, for example, ⁇ 4 includes RB#4, RB#8, RB#12, and RB#16.
  • the terminal device can determine the 4 weighting coefficients corresponding to the above-mentioned 4 angle delay pairs, that is, the weighting coefficients corresponding to the 4 reference signal ports are determined.
  • the terminal device can traverse the value of k from 1 to K to obtain the weighting coefficient corresponding to each angle delay pair. Therefore, the terminal equipment can determine a total of K weighting coefficients. If the K weighting coefficients are expressed by a K ⁇ K-dimensional diagonal matrix, they can be expressed as a coefficient matrix C as follows:
  • C k in the coefficient matrix C may represent the weighting coefficient corresponding to the k-th angle-delay pair in the K angle-delay pairs, or the weighting coefficient corresponding to the k-th reference signal port among the K reference signal ports coefficient.
  • the terminal device may sequentially report the K weighting coefficients corresponding to the K angle delay pairs in the order of the K angle delay pairs pre-arranged with the network device. Therefore, the terminal device may generate the first indication information in the order of the K angle delay pairs in step 830 to indicate the K weighting coefficients, and in step 840, send the first indication information.
  • the terminal device may perform normalization processing on the K weighting coefficients, and quantize and report the result of the normalization processing. Since the normalization process is described in detail in step 430 of the method 400 above, for the sake of brevity, it will not be repeated here.
  • step 840 the terminal device sends the first indication information.
  • the network device receives the first indication information.
  • step 850 the network device determines the precoding matrix corresponding to each frequency domain unit according to the first indication information.
  • step 840 and step 850 can be referred to the related description of step 440 and step 450 in the method 400 above, and for the sake of brevity, it will not be repeated here.
  • the network device can load K angle delay pairs on part of the N RBs, so that the number of RBs loaded on one angle delay pair can be reduced. If each angle delay pair is loaded on N RBs, N RBs are needed to carry the precoding reference signal corresponding to one angle delay pair; but if each angle delay pair is loaded into N RBs On the part of RBs, the N RBs originally used to carry one angular delay pair can be used to carry the precoding reference signals corresponding to more angular delay pairs.
  • the pilot overhead can be reduced. In the case of a sharp increase in the number of terminal devices, the pilot overhead can be reduced by adjusting the angle delay logarithm Q corresponding to each reference signal port, so as to ensure that effective spectrum resources are fully utilized.
  • the terminal device can also determine the weighting coefficient corresponding to the angle delay pair according to the channel estimation value on the RB loaded with the same angle delay pair, which reduces the calculation of the terminal device. quantity.
  • the precoding matrix determined by the channel measurement method provided in the foregoing embodiment of the application may be a precoding matrix directly used for downlink data transmission; it may also undergo some beamforming methods, such as zero forcing (zero forcing, ZF), minimum mean-squared error (MMSE), maximum signal-to-leakage-and-noise (SLNR), etc., to obtain the final precoding matrix for downlink data transmission.
  • ZF zero forcing
  • MMSE minimum mean-squared error
  • SLNR maximum signal-to-leakage-and-noise
  • the precoding matrices involved in the embodiments of this application may all refer to a precoding matrix determined based on the channel measurement method provided in this application.
  • the terminal device and/or the network device may perform part or all of the steps in the embodiments. These steps or operations are only examples, and the embodiments of the present application may also perform other operations or variations of various operations.
  • each step may be performed in a different order presented in each embodiment, and it may not be necessary to perform all operations in the embodiments of the present application.
  • the size of the sequence number of each step does not mean the order of execution.
  • the execution sequence of each process should be determined by its function and internal logic, and should not constitute any limitation to the implementation process of the embodiments of the present application.
  • FIG. 10 is a schematic block diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication device 1000 may include a processing unit 1100 and a transceiving unit 1200.
  • the communication device 1000 may correspond to the terminal device in the above method embodiment, for example, it may be a terminal device, or a component (such as a circuit, a chip, or a chip system, etc.) configured in the terminal device.
  • a component such as a circuit, a chip, or a chip system, etc.
  • the communication device 1000 may correspond to the terminal device in the method 400 or the method 800 according to an embodiment of the present application, and the communication device 1000 may include a terminal device for executing the method 400 in FIG. 4 or the method 800 in FIG. The unit of the method performed by the device.
  • each unit in the communication device 1000 and other operations and/or functions described above are used to implement the corresponding process of the method 400 in FIG. 4 or the method 800 in FIG. 8, respectively.
  • the processing unit 1100 can be used to execute step 430 in the method 400
  • the transceiver unit 1200 can be used to execute step 420 and step 440 in the method 400. It should be understood that the specific process for each unit to execute the foregoing corresponding steps has been described in detail in the foregoing method embodiment, and is not repeated here for brevity.
  • the processing unit 1100 may be used to perform step 830 in the method 800, and the transceiver unit 1200 may be used to perform step 820 and step 840 in the method 800. It should be understood that the specific process for each unit to execute the foregoing corresponding steps has been described in detail in the foregoing method embodiment, and is not repeated here for brevity.
  • the transceiver unit 1200 in the communication device 1000 may be implemented by a transceiver, for example, it may correspond to the transceiver 2020 in the communication device 2000 shown in FIG. 11 or the transceiver 2020 in FIG.
  • the transceiver 3020 in the terminal device 3000 shown the processing unit 1100 in the communication device 1000 may be implemented by at least one processor, for example, may correspond to the processor 2010 in the communication device 2000 shown in FIG. 11 or FIG. 12
  • the transceiver unit 1200 in the communication device 1000 can be implemented through input/output interfaces, circuits, etc., and the processing unit 1100 in the communication device 1000 It can be implemented by a processor, microprocessor, or integrated circuit integrated on the chip or chip system.
  • the communication device 1000 may correspond to the network device in the above method embodiment, for example, it may be a network device, or a component (such as a circuit, a chip, or a chip system, etc.) configured in the network device.
  • a component such as a circuit, a chip, or a chip system, etc.
  • the communication device 1000 may correspond to the network device in the method 400 or the method 800 according to the embodiment of the present application, and the communication device 1000 may include a network device for executing the method 400 in FIG. 4 or the method 800 in FIG. The unit of the method performed by the device.
  • each unit in the communication device 1000 and other operations and/or functions described above are used to implement the corresponding process of the method 400 in FIG. 4 or the method 800 in FIG. 8, respectively.
  • the processing unit 1100 can be used to execute steps 410 and 450 in the method 400
  • the transceiver unit 1200 can be used to execute steps 420 and 440 in the method 400. It should be understood that the specific process for each unit to execute the foregoing corresponding steps has been described in detail in the foregoing method embodiment, and is not repeated here for brevity.
  • the processing unit 1100 can be used to execute step 810 and step 850 in the method 800, and the transceiver unit 1200 can be used to execute step 820 and step 840 in the method 800. It should be understood that the specific process for each unit to execute the foregoing corresponding steps has been described in detail in the foregoing method embodiment, and is not repeated here for brevity.
  • the transceiver unit 1200 in the communication device 1000 may be implemented by a transceiver, for example, it may correspond to the transceiver 2020 in the communication device 2000 shown in FIG. 11 or the transceiver 2020 in FIG. 13
  • the processing unit 1100 in the communication device 1000 may be implemented by at least one processor, for example, may correspond to the processor 2010 in the communication device 2000 shown in FIG. 11 or in FIG. 13
  • the processing unit 4200 or the processor 4202 in the network device 4000 is shown.
  • the transceiver unit 1200 in the communication device 1000 can be implemented through input/output interfaces, circuits, etc., and the processing unit 1100 in the communication device 1000 It can be implemented by a processor, microprocessor, or integrated circuit integrated on the chip or chip system.
  • FIG. 11 is another schematic block diagram of a communication device 2000 provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication device 2000 includes a processor 2010, a transceiver 2020, and a memory 2030.
  • the processor 2010, the transceiver 2020, and the memory 2030 communicate with each other through an internal connection path.
  • the memory 2030 is used to store instructions, and the processor 2010 is used to execute the instructions stored in the memory 2030 to control the transceiver 2020 to send signals and / Or receive the signal.
  • the communication apparatus 2000 may correspond to the terminal device in the foregoing method embodiment, and may be used to execute various steps and/or processes performed by the network device or terminal device in the foregoing method embodiment.
  • the memory 2030 may include a read-only memory and a random access memory, and provide instructions and data to the processor. A part of the memory may also include a non-volatile random access memory.
  • the memory 2030 may be a separate device or integrated in the processor 2010.
  • the processor 2010 may be used to execute instructions stored in the memory 2030, and when the processor 2010 executes the instructions stored in the memory, the processor 2010 is used to execute each of the above method embodiments corresponding to the network device or the terminal device. Steps and/or processes.
  • the communication device 2000 is the terminal device in the foregoing embodiment.
  • the communication device 2000 is the network device in the foregoing embodiment.
  • the transceiver 2020 may include a transmitter and a receiver.
  • the transceiver 2020 may further include an antenna, and the number of antennas may be one or more.
  • the processor 2010, the memory 2030, and the transceiver 2020 may be devices integrated on different chips.
  • the processor 2010 and the memory 2030 may be integrated in a baseband chip, and the transceiver 2020 may be integrated in a radio frequency chip.
  • the processor 2010, the memory 2030, and the transceiver 2020 may also be devices integrated on the same chip. This application does not limit this.
  • the communication device 2000 is a component configured in a terminal device, such as a circuit, a chip, a chip system, and so on.
  • the communication device 2000 is a component configured in a network device, such as a circuit, a chip, a chip system, and the like.
  • the transceiver 2020 may also be a communication interface, such as an input/output interface, a circuit, and so on.
  • the transceiver 2020, the processor 2010 and the memory 2020 may be integrated in the same chip, such as integrated in a baseband chip.
  • FIG. 12 is a schematic structural diagram of a terminal device 3000 provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the terminal device 3000 can be applied to the system shown in FIG. 1 to perform the functions of the terminal device in the foregoing method embodiment.
  • the terminal device 3000 includes a processor 3010 and a transceiver 3020.
  • the terminal device 3000 further includes a memory 3030.
  • the processor 3010, the transceiver 3020, and the memory 3030 can communicate with each other through an internal connection path to transfer control and/or data signals.
  • the memory 3030 is used to store computer programs, and the processor 3010 is used to download from the memory 3030. Call and run the computer program to control the transceiver 3020 to send and receive signals.
  • the terminal device 3000 may further include an antenna 3040 for transmitting the uplink data or uplink control signaling output by the transceiver 3020 through a wireless signal.
  • the aforementioned processor 3010 and the memory 3030 can be combined into a processing device, and the processor 3010 is configured to execute the program code stored in the memory 3030 to realize the aforementioned functions.
  • the memory 3030 may also be integrated in the processor 3010 or independent of the processor 3010.
  • the processor 3010 may correspond to the processing unit 1100 in FIG. 10 or the processor 2010 in FIG. 11.
  • the aforementioned transceiver 3020 may correspond to the transceiver unit 1200 in FIG. 10 or the transceiver 2020 in FIG. 11.
  • the transceiver 3020 may include a receiver (or receiver, receiving circuit) and a transmitter (or transmitter, transmitting circuit). Among them, the receiver is used to receive signals, and the transmitter is used to transmit signals.
  • the terminal device 3000 shown in FIG. 12 can implement various processes involving the terminal device in the method embodiment shown in FIG. 4 or FIG. 8.
  • the operations and/or functions of each module in the terminal device 3000 are respectively for implementing the corresponding processes in the foregoing method embodiments.
  • the above-mentioned processor 3010 can be used to execute the actions described in the previous method embodiments implemented by the terminal device, and the transceiver 3020 can be used to execute the terminal device described in the previous method embodiments to send to or receive from the network device. action.
  • the transceiver 3020 can be used to execute the terminal device described in the previous method embodiments to send to or receive from the network device. action.
  • the aforementioned terminal device 3000 may further include a power supply 3050 for providing power to various devices or circuits in the terminal device.
  • the terminal device 3000 may also include one or more of the input unit 3060, the display unit 3070, the audio circuit 3080, the camera 3090, and the sensor 3100.
  • the audio circuit may also include a speaker 3082, a microphone 3084, and so on.
  • FIG. 13 is a schematic structural diagram of a network device provided by an embodiment of the present application, for example, it may be a schematic structural diagram of a base station.
  • the base station 4000 can be applied to the system shown in FIG. 1 to perform the functions of the network device in the foregoing method embodiment.
  • the base station 4000 may include one or more radio frequency units, such as a remote radio unit (RRU) 4100 and one or more baseband units (BBU) (also known as distributed unit (DU) )) 4200.
  • RRU 4100 may be called a transceiver unit, and may correspond to the transceiver unit 1200 in FIG. 10 or the transceiver 2020 in FIG. 11.
  • the RRU 4100 may also be called a transceiver, a transceiver circuit, or a transceiver, etc., and it may include at least one antenna 4101 and a radio frequency unit 4102.
  • the RRU 4100 may include a receiving unit and a sending unit.
  • the receiving unit may correspond to a receiver (or receiver or receiving circuit), and the sending unit may correspond to a transmitter (or transmitter or transmitting circuit).
  • the RRU 4100 part is mainly used for receiving and sending radio frequency signals and conversion between radio frequency signals and baseband signals, for example, for sending instruction information to terminal equipment.
  • the 4200 part of the BBU is mainly used for baseband processing, base station control, and so on.
  • the RRU 4100 and the BBU 4200 may be physically set together, or may be physically separated, that is, a distributed base station.
  • the BBU 4200 is the control center of the base station, and can also be called a processing unit, which can correspond to the processing unit 1100 in FIG. 10 or the processor 2010 in FIG. 11, and is mainly used to complete baseband processing functions such as channel coding and multiplexing. , Modulation, spread spectrum and so on.
  • the BBU processing unit
  • the BBU may be used to control the base station to execute the operation procedure of the network device in the foregoing method embodiment, for example, to generate the foregoing indication information.
  • the BBU 4200 may be composed of one or more single boards, and multiple single boards may jointly support a radio access network with a single access standard (such as an LTE network), or support different access standards. Wireless access network (such as LTE network, 5G network or other networks).
  • the BBU 4200 further includes a memory 4201 and a processor 4202.
  • the memory 4201 is used to store necessary instructions and data.
  • the processor 4202 is configured to control the base station to perform necessary actions, for example, to control the base station to execute the operation procedure of the network device in the foregoing method embodiment.
  • the memory 4201 and the processor 4202 may serve one or more single boards. In other words, the memory and the processor can be set separately on each board. It can also be that multiple boards share the same memory and processor. In addition, necessary circuits can be provided on each board.
  • the base station 4000 shown in FIG. 13 can implement various processes involving network devices in the method embodiment shown in FIG. 4 or FIG. 8.
  • the operations and/or functions of the various modules in the base station 4000 are to implement the corresponding procedures in the foregoing method embodiments.
  • the above-mentioned BBU 4200 can be used to perform the actions described in the previous method embodiments implemented by the network device, and the RRU 4100 can be used to perform the actions described in the previous method embodiments that the network device sends to or receives from the terminal device.
  • the RRU 4100 can be used to perform the actions described in the previous method embodiments that the network device sends to or receives from the terminal device.
  • the base station 4000 shown in FIG. 13 is only a possible form of network equipment, and should not constitute any limitation to this application.
  • the method provided in this application can be applied to other types of network equipment.
  • it may include AAU, it may also include CU and/or DU, or it may include BBU and adaptive radio unit (ARU), or BBU; it may also be customer premises equipment (CPE), or it may be
  • AAU AAU
  • CU CU
  • DU BBU
  • BBU adaptive radio unit
  • BBU customer premises equipment
  • CPE customer premises equipment
  • the CU and/or DU can be used to perform the actions described in the previous method embodiment implemented by the network device, and the AAU can be used to perform the network device described in the previous method embodiment to send to or receive from the terminal device Actions.
  • the AAU can be used to perform the network device described in the previous method embodiment to send to or receive from the terminal device Actions.
  • the present application also provides a processing device including at least one processor, and the at least one processor is configured to execute a computer program stored in a memory, so that the processing device executes the terminal device or the network device in any of the foregoing method embodiments The method performed.
  • the aforementioned processing device may be one or more chips.
  • the processing device may be a field programmable gate array (FPGA), an application specific integrated circuit (ASIC), a system on chip (SoC), or It is a central processor unit (CPU), it can also be a network processor (NP), it can also be a digital signal processing circuit (digital signal processor, DSP), or it can be a microcontroller (microcontroller unit). , MCU), it can also be a programmable logic device (PLD) or other integrated chips.
  • FPGA field programmable gate array
  • ASIC application specific integrated circuit
  • SoC system on chip
  • CPU central processor unit
  • NP network processor
  • DSP digital signal processing circuit
  • microcontroller unit microcontroller unit
  • MCU programmable logic device
  • PLD programmable logic device
  • the embodiment of the present application also provides a processing device, including a processor and a communication interface.
  • the communication interface is coupled with the processor.
  • the communication interface is used to input and/or output information.
  • the information includes at least one of instructions and data.
  • the processor is used to execute a computer program, so that the processing apparatus executes the method executed by the terminal device or the network device in any of the foregoing method embodiments.
  • An embodiment of the present application also provides a processing device, including a processor and a memory.
  • the memory is used to store a computer program
  • the processor is used to call and run the computer program from the memory, so that the processing device executes the method executed by the terminal device or the network device in any of the foregoing method embodiments.
  • each step of the above method can be completed by an integrated logic circuit of hardware in the processor or instructions in the form of software.
  • the steps of the method disclosed in combination with the embodiments of the present application may be directly embodied as being executed and completed by a hardware processor, or executed and completed by a combination of hardware and software modules in the processor.
  • the software module can be located in a mature storage medium in the field, such as random access memory, flash memory, read-only memory, programmable read-only memory, or electrically erasable programmable memory, registers.
  • the storage medium is located in the memory, and the processor reads the information in the memory and completes the steps of the above method in combination with its hardware. To avoid repetition, it will not be described in detail here.
  • the processor in the embodiment of the present application may be an integrated circuit chip with signal processing capability.
  • the steps of the foregoing method embodiments can be completed by hardware integrated logic circuits in the processor or instructions in the form of software.
  • the above-mentioned processor may be a general-purpose processor, a digital signal processor (DSP), an application specific integrated circuit (ASIC), a field programmable gate array (FPGA) or other programmable logic devices, discrete gates or transistor logic devices, discrete hardware components .
  • DSP digital signal processor
  • ASIC application specific integrated circuit
  • FPGA field programmable gate array
  • the methods, steps, and logical block diagrams disclosed in the embodiments of the present application can be implemented or executed.
  • the general-purpose processor may be a microprocessor or the processor may also be any conventional processor or the like.
  • the steps of the method disclosed in the embodiments of the present application may be directly embodied as being executed and completed by a hardware decoding processor, or executed and completed by a combination of hardware and software modules in the decoding processor.
  • the software module can be located in a mature storage medium in the field, such as random access memory, flash memory, read-only memory, programmable read-only memory, or electrically erasable programmable memory, registers.
  • the storage medium is located in the memory, and the processor reads the information in the memory and completes the steps of the above method in combination with its hardware.
  • the memory in the embodiments of the present application may be a volatile memory or a non-volatile memory, or may include both volatile and non-volatile memory.
  • the non-volatile memory can be read-only memory (ROM), programmable read-only memory (programmable ROM, PROM), erasable programmable read-only memory (erasable PROM, EPROM), and electrically available Erase programmable read-only memory (electrically EPROM, EEPROM) or flash memory.
  • the volatile memory may be random access memory (RAM), which is used as an external cache.
  • RAM random access memory
  • static random access memory static random access memory
  • dynamic RAM dynamic RAM
  • DRAM dynamic random access memory
  • synchronous dynamic random access memory synchronous DRAM, SDRAM
  • double data rate synchronous dynamic random access memory double data rate SDRAM, DDR SDRAM
  • enhanced synchronous dynamic random access memory enhanced SDRAM, ESDRAM
  • synchronous connection dynamic random access memory serial DRAM, SLDRAM
  • direct rambus RAM direct rambus RAM
  • the present application also provides a computer program product, the computer program product includes: computer program code, when the computer program code runs on a computer, the computer executes the steps shown in FIG. 4 or FIG. 8 The method executed by the terminal device or the method executed by the network device in the embodiment is shown.
  • the present application also provides a computer-readable storage medium that stores program code, and when the program code runs on a computer, the computer executes FIG. 4 or FIG.
  • the present application also provides a system, which includes the aforementioned one or more terminal devices and one or more network devices.
  • the network equipment in each of the above-mentioned device embodiments corresponds completely to the network equipment or terminal equipment in the terminal equipment and method embodiments, and the corresponding modules or units execute the corresponding steps.
  • the communication unit executes the receiving or the terminal equipment in the method embodiments.
  • the processing unit executes the functions of specific units, refer to the corresponding method embodiments. Among them, there may be one or more processors.
  • the terminal device may be used as an example of the receiving device, and the network device may be used as an example of the sending device. But this should not constitute any limitation to this application.
  • the sending device and the receiving device may both be terminal devices and the like. This application does not limit the specific types of sending equipment and receiving equipment.
  • component used in this specification are used to denote computer-related entities, hardware, firmware, a combination of hardware and software, software, or software in execution.
  • the component may be, but is not limited to, a process, a processor, an object, an executable file, an execution thread, a program, and/or a computer running on a processor.
  • the application running on the computing device and the computing device can be components.
  • One or more components may reside in processes and/or threads of execution, and components may be located on one computer and/or distributed among two or more computers.
  • these components can be executed from various computer readable media having various data structures stored thereon.
  • the component can be based on, for example, a signal having one or more data packets (e.g. data from two components interacting with another component in a local system, a distributed system, and/or a network, such as the Internet that interacts with other systems through a signal) Communicate through local and/or remote processes.
  • a signal having one or more data packets (e.g. data from two components interacting with another component in a local system, a distributed system, and/or a network, such as the Internet that interacts with other systems through a signal) Communicate through local and/or remote processes.
  • the disclosed system, device, and method can be implemented in other ways.
  • the device embodiments described above are merely illustrative, for example, the division of the units is only a logical function division, and there may be other divisions in actual implementation, for example, multiple units or components may be combined or It can be integrated into another system, or some features can be ignored or not implemented.
  • the displayed or discussed mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection may be indirect coupling or communication connection through some interfaces, devices or units, and may be in electrical, mechanical or other forms.
  • the units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and the components displayed as units may or may not be physical units, that is, they may be located in one place, or they may be distributed on multiple network units. Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the objectives of the solutions of the embodiments.
  • the functional units in the various embodiments of the present application may be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit may exist alone physically, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit.
  • the function is implemented in the form of a software functional unit and sold or used as an independent product, it can be stored in a computer readable storage medium.
  • the technical solution of the present application essentially or the part that contributes to the existing technology or the part of the technical solution can be embodied in the form of a software product, and the computer software product is stored in a storage medium, including Several instructions are used to make a computer device (which may be a personal computer, a server, or a network device, etc.) execute all or part of the steps of the methods described in the various embodiments of the present application.
  • the aforementioned storage media include: U disk, mobile hard disk, read-only memory (Read-Only Memory, ROM), random access memory (Random Access Memory, RAM), magnetic disk or optical disk and other media that can store program code .

Abstract

The present application provides a channel measurement method and a communication apparatus, capable of reducing pilot overhead. The method comprises: a terminal device generates first indication information based on a received precoded reference signal, the first indication information indicating K weighting coefficients corresponding to K angular delay pairs, wherein precoding of the precoded reference signal is determined by the K angular delay pairs, and the K angular delay pairs and the corresponding K weighting coefficients thereof are used for constructing a precoding matrix, and each of the K weighting coefficients is determined based on precoded reference signals carried on some of N frequency-domain units, rather than based on precoded reference signals carried on all frequency-domain units, so that precoded reference signals corresponding to more angular delay pairs are carried on the same time-frequency resource; the terminal device sends the first indication information to a network device, so that the network device determines a precoding matrix corresponding to each frequency-domain unit, wherein K and N are integers greater than 1.

Description

一种信道测量方法和通信装置Channel measurement method and communication device 技术领域Technical field
本申请涉及无线通信领域,并且更具体地,涉及一种信道测量方法和通信装置。This application relates to the field of wireless communication, and more specifically, to a channel measurement method and communication device.
背景技术Background technique
在大规模多输入多输出(massive multiple-input multiple-output,Massive MIMO)技术中,网络设备可通过预编码减小多用户之间的干扰以及同一用户的多个信号流之间的干扰,有利于提高信号质量,实现空分复用,提高频谱利用率。In the massive multiple-input multiple-output (Massive MIMO) technology, network equipment can reduce the interference between multiple users and the interference between multiple signal streams of the same user through precoding. Conducive to improving signal quality, realizing space division multiplexing, and improving spectrum utilization.
终端设备例如可以基于下行信道测量来确定预编码矩阵,并希望通过反馈,使得网络设备获得与终端设备确定的预编码矩阵相同或相近的预编码矩阵。具体地,终端设备例如可以通过反馈一个或多个空域向量、一个或多个频域向量以及一个或多个加权系数的方式来指示构建预编码矩阵。然而,这种反馈方式带来了较大的反馈开销。The terminal device may determine the precoding matrix based on downlink channel measurement, and hopes to make the network device obtain the same or similar precoding matrix as the precoding matrix determined by the terminal device through feedback. Specifically, the terminal device may, for example, instruct to construct the precoding matrix by feeding back one or more spatial vectors, one or more frequency domain vectors, and one or more weighting coefficients. However, this feedback method brings a large feedback overhead.
在一些通信技术中,如频分双工(frequency division duplexing,FDD)技术,上、下行信道之间具有部分的互易性。网络设备可以利用对上行信道的估计获得下行信道的互易信息,例如时延、角度等。网络设备可以基于时延和角度对下行参考信号进行预编码后再发送,以减小终端设备的反馈开销。然而,由于网络设备对每个终端设备都单独进行下行参考信号的预编码和传输,导频开销会随着终端设备数量的增长而增长。In some communication technologies, such as frequency division duplexing (FDD) technology, there is partial reciprocity between uplink and downlink channels. The network equipment can use the estimation of the uplink channel to obtain the reciprocity information of the downlink channel, such as delay and angle. The network device can pre-code the downlink reference signal based on the delay and angle before sending it, so as to reduce the feedback overhead of the terminal device. However, since the network equipment separately performs the precoding and transmission of the downlink reference signal for each terminal device, the pilot overhead will increase with the increase in the number of terminal devices.
发明内容Summary of the invention
本申请提供一种信道测量方法和通信装置,以期减小导频开销。This application provides a channel measurement method and communication device in order to reduce pilot overhead.
第一方面,提供了一种信道测量方法,该方法可以由终端设备执行,或者,也可以由配置在终端设备中的部件(如电路、芯片或芯片系统等)执行。本申请对此不作限定。In the first aspect, a channel measurement method is provided, which may be executed by a terminal device, or may also be executed by a component (such as a circuit, a chip, or a chip system, etc.) configured in the terminal device. This application does not limit this.
具体地,该方法包括:生成第一指示信息,该第一指示信息基于接收到的预编码参考信号确定,该预编码参考信号的预编码由K个角度时延对确定,该K个角度时延对中的每个角度时延对包括一个角度向量和一个时延向量;该第一指示信息用于指示与该K个角度时延对对应的K个加权系数,该K个角度时延对及其对应的该K个加权系数用于构建预编码矩阵;该K个加权系数中的每个加权系数基于N个频域单元中的部分频域单元上承载的预编码参考信号确定;其中,N为参考信号的传输带宽中包含的频域单元数,K和N均为大于1的整数;发送该第一指示信息。Specifically, the method includes: generating first indication information, the first indication information being determined based on the received precoding reference signal, the precoding of the precoding reference signal is determined by K angle delay pairs, and the K angle time delay Each angle delay pair in the delay pair includes an angle vector and a delay vector; the first indication information is used to indicate K weighting coefficients corresponding to the K angle delay pairs, and the K angle delay pairs And the corresponding K weighting coefficients are used to construct a precoding matrix; each of the K weighting coefficients is determined based on the precoding reference signal carried on part of the N frequency domain units; wherein, N is the number of frequency domain units included in the transmission bandwidth of the reference signal, K and N are both integers greater than 1, and the first indication information is sent.
第二方面,提供了一种信道测量方法。该方法可以由网络设备执行,或者,也可以由配置在网络设备中的部件(如电路、芯片或芯片系统等)执行。本申请对此不作限定。In the second aspect, a channel measurement method is provided. The method may be executed by a network device, or may also be executed by a component (such as a circuit, a chip, or a chip system, etc.) configured in the network device. This application does not limit this.
具体地,该方法包括:接收第一指示信息,该第一指示信息基于预编码参考信号确定,该预编码参考信号的预编码由K个角度时延对确定,该K个角度时延对中的每个角度时延对包括一个角度向量和一个时延向量;该第一指示信息用于指示与该K个角度时延对对应的K个加权系数,该K个角度时延对及其对应的该K个加权系数用于构建预编码矩阵; 该K个加权系数中的每个加权系数基于N个频域单元中的部分频域单元上承载的预编码参考信号确定;其中,N为参考信号的传输带宽中包含的频域单元数,K和N均为大于1的整数;基于该第一指示信息确定各频域单元对应的预编码矩阵。Specifically, the method includes: receiving first indication information, the first indication information being determined based on a precoding reference signal, the precoding of the precoding reference signal is determined by K angle delay pairs, and the K angle delay pairs are centered Each angle delay pair includes an angle vector and a delay vector; the first indication information is used to indicate the K weighting coefficients corresponding to the K angle delay pairs, the K angle delay pairs and their corresponding The K weighting coefficients are used to construct the precoding matrix; each weighting coefficient of the K weighting coefficients is determined based on the precoding reference signal carried on part of the N frequency domain units; where N is the reference The number of frequency domain units included in the transmission bandwidth of the signal, K and N are both integers greater than 1, and the precoding matrix corresponding to each frequency domain unit is determined based on the first indication information.
基于上述技术方案,网络设备可以将K个角度时延对加载到N个频域单元中的部分频域单元上,使得被加载到一个角度时延对的频域单元数量得以减少。若将每个角度时延对加载到N个频域单元上,则需要N个频域单元来承载对应于一个角度时延对的预编码参考信号;但若将每个角度时延对加载到N个频域单元中的部分频域单元上,原本用来承载一个角度时延对的N个频域单元可以用于承载更多个角度时延对对应的预编码参考信号。因此,在角度时延对的数量K一定的情况下,可以减少导频开销,从而有利于对有效的频谱资源进行充分利用。终端设备也可以根据被加载了同一个角度时延对的频域单元上的信道估计值来确定与角度时延对对应的加权系数,在一定程度上也减少了终端设备的计算量。Based on the above technical solution, the network device can load K angle delay pairs onto some of the N frequency domain units, so that the number of frequency domain units loaded into one angle delay pair can be reduced. If each angle delay pair is loaded on N frequency domain units, N frequency domain units are needed to carry the precoding reference signal corresponding to one angle delay pair; but if each angle delay pair is loaded on On some of the N frequency domain units, the N frequency domain units originally used to carry one angle delay pair can be used to carry precoding reference signals corresponding to more angle delay pairs. Therefore, when the number of angle delay pairs K is constant, the pilot overhead can be reduced, thereby facilitating full utilization of effective spectrum resources. The terminal device can also determine the weighting coefficient corresponding to the angle delay pair according to the channel estimation value on the frequency domain unit loaded with the same angle delay pair, which also reduces the calculation amount of the terminal device to a certain extent.
结合第一方面或第二方面,在某些可能的实现方式中,该K个加权系数中的每个加权系数由在该N个频域单元中的至少一个频域单元上接收到的预编码参考信号确定,该至少一个频域单元为该N个频域单元中的部分频域单元,且该至少一个频域单元中的任意两个频域单元之间至少间隔Q/D-1个频域单元;Q为大于1的整数,Q<K;D为导频密度,0<D≤1;Q/D为整数。With reference to the first aspect or the second aspect, in some possible implementation manners, each weighting coefficient of the K weighting coefficients is precoded by received on at least one of the N frequency domain units. The reference signal determines that the at least one frequency domain unit is part of the N frequency domain units, and any two frequency domain units in the at least one frequency domain unit are separated by at least Q/D-1 frequency. Domain unit; Q is an integer greater than 1, Q<K; D is the pilot density, 0<D≤1; Q/D is an integer.
也就是说,每个角度时延对对应的预编码参考信号可以以Q/D-1个频域单元为间隔在频域上均匀分布,这就好比将每个角度时延对均匀地加载到N个频域单元上。因此,终端设备可以获得各个频域位置的信道状态信息,有利于获得较为精确的测量结果。That is to say, the precoding reference signal corresponding to each angle delay pair can be evenly distributed in the frequency domain at intervals of Q/D-1 frequency domain units, which is like loading each angle delay pair evenly on N frequency domain units. Therefore, the terminal device can obtain the channel state information of each frequency domain position, which is beneficial to obtain more accurate measurement results.
并且,在终端设备数量剧增的情况下,网络设备可以通过调整每个参考信号端口对应的角度时延对数Q来减小导频开销,非常灵活、方便。Moreover, when the number of terminal devices increases sharply, the network device can reduce the pilot overhead by adjusting the angle delay logarithm Q corresponding to each reference signal port, which is very flexible and convenient.
进一步地,该K个加权系数中的每个加权系数是基于在该至少一个频域单元上接收到的预编码参考信号所确定的至少一个估计值的和,该至少一个估计值的中的每个估计值是基于在该至少一个频域单元中的一个频域单元上接收到的预编码参考信号进行信道估计得到的。Further, each of the K weighting coefficients is a sum of at least one estimated value determined based on the precoding reference signal received on the at least one frequency domain unit, and each of the at least one estimated value The estimated value is obtained by performing channel estimation based on the precoding reference signal received on one of the at least one frequency domain unit.
作为一个实施例,该预编码参考信号与P个参考信号端口对应,每个参考信号端口对应的预编码参考信号的预编码包括空域权值和频域权值,每个参考信号端口对应的预编码参考信号的预编码由该K个角度时延对中的Q个角度时延对确定;P<K,P为正整数。As an embodiment, the precoding reference signal corresponds to P reference signal ports, the precoding of the precoding reference signal corresponding to each reference signal port includes spatial weights and frequency domain weights, and the precoding corresponding to each reference signal port The precoding of the coded reference signal is determined by the Q angle delay pairs in the K angle delay pairs; P<K, and P is a positive integer.
这种方式可以继续沿用现有技术中对参考信号端口的配置。即,被配置为同一个参考信号端口的时频资源仍用于承载该参考信号端口的参考信号,但不同的是,该参考信号端口的参考信号是加载了Q个角度时延对的预编码参考信号。终端设备并不需要感知网络设备生成预编码参考信号的具体过程,只需根据Q值来确定对应于每个角度时延对的加权系数如何计算即可。因此,兼容性强。In this way, the configuration of the reference signal port in the prior art can be continued. That is, the time-frequency resource configured as the same reference signal port is still used to carry the reference signal of the reference signal port, but the difference is that the reference signal of the reference signal port is precoding loaded with Q angle delay pairs Reference signal. The terminal device does not need to perceive the specific process of the network device generating the precoding reference signal, and only needs to determine how to calculate the weighting coefficient corresponding to each angle delay pair according to the Q value. Therefore, the compatibility is strong.
可选地,该Q个角度时延对包含的Q个角度向量为Q个空域权值向量,该Q个空域权值向量中的每个空域权值向量包括多个空域权值;该Q个空域权值向量用于交替地对承载于该N个频域单元上的参考信号做预编码;该Q个角度时延对包含的Q个时延向量用于确定N个频域权值,该N个频域权值与该N个频域单元对应,以用于对承载于该N个频域单元上的参考信号做预编码。Optionally, the Q angle vectors included in the Q angle delay pairs are Q airspace weight vectors, and each airspace weight vector in the Q airspace weight vectors includes multiple airspace weights; the Q The spatial weight vector is used to alternately pre-encode the reference signals carried on the N frequency domain units; the Q delay vectors contained in the Q angle delay pair are used to determine the N frequency domain weights. The N frequency domain weights correspond to the N frequency domain units, and are used for precoding the reference signals carried on the N frequency domain units.
即,Q个角度向量中的每个角度向量可以用作预编码的空域权值向量。对应于同一个参考信号端口的Q个角度向量可以在N个频域单元上轮询。Q个时延向量中的部分频域权值可以被加载到N个频域单元上。由Q个时延向量可以重组得到Q个频域权值向量,每个频域权值向量较时延向量的长度得以减小,从而可以减少加载的频域单元的数量。That is, each of the Q angle vectors can be used as a precoding spatial weight vector. The Q angle vectors corresponding to the same reference signal port can be polled on N frequency domain units. Part of the frequency domain weights in the Q delay vectors can be loaded on the N frequency domain units. Q time delay vectors can be recombined to obtain Q frequency domain weight vectors, and each frequency domain weight vector is smaller than the length of the time delay vector, thereby reducing the number of frequency domain units loaded.
进一步地,该N个频域单元中的第n个频域单元上接收到的该P个参考信号端口中的第p个参考信号端口对应的预编码包括一个空域权值向量和至少一个频域权值;该空域权值向量为该K个角度时延对中包含的K个角度向量中的第(p-1)Q+(n-1)%Q+1个角度向量;该至少一个频域权值为矩阵
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000001
中第n行第p列的值;矩阵
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000002
由矩阵F确定,该矩阵F是由该P个角度时延对中包含的P个时延向量构建的矩阵,矩阵
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000003
和矩阵F之间满足:
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000004
其中,%表示取余运算,q:Q:end表示从第q个值至最后一个值,以Q为增量来取值;1≤n≤N,1≤p≤P,n、p均为正整数。
Further, the precoding corresponding to the p-th reference signal port among the P reference signal ports received on the n-th frequency domain unit among the N frequency domain units includes a spatial weight vector and at least one frequency domain Weight; the spatial weight vector is the (p-1)Q+(n-1)%Q+1th angle vector among the K angle vectors included in the K angle delay pairs; the at least one frequency domain Weight matrix
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000001
The value of the nth row and pth column in the matrix;
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000002
Determined by the matrix F, the matrix F is a matrix constructed by the P delay vectors contained in the P angle delay pairs, the matrix
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000003
And matrix F are satisfied:
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000004
Among them,% means the remainder operation, q:Q:end means from the qth value to the last value, the value is taken with the increment of Q; 1≤n≤N, 1≤p≤P, n and p are both Positive integer.
上文提供了一种具体的实现方式。通过上文的公式,可以确定每个参考信号端口在每个频域单元上所加载的空域权值向量和频域权值。但应理解,上文所示的公式仅为一种可能的实现方式,不应对本申请构成任何限定。A specific implementation method is provided above. Through the above formula, the spatial weight vector and frequency domain weight loaded on each frequency domain unit of each reference signal port can be determined. However, it should be understood that the formula shown above is only a possible implementation manner, and should not constitute any limitation to this application.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些可能的实现方式中,该方法还包括:接收第二指示信息,该第二指示信息用于指示对该K个加权系数的上报规则。With reference to the first aspect, in some possible implementations of the first aspect, the method further includes: receiving second indication information, where the second indication information is used to indicate a reporting rule for the K weighting coefficients.
相应地,结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些可能的实现方式中,该方法还包括:发送第二指示信息,该第二指示信息用于指示对该K个加权系数的上报规则。Correspondingly, with reference to the second aspect, in some possible implementations of the second aspect, the method further includes: sending second indication information, where the second indication information is used to indicate a reporting rule for the K weighting coefficients.
由于针对每个参考信号端口可以确定Q个加权系数,网络设备还可以进一步指示对该P个参考信号端口所对应的P×Q个(即,K个)加权系数的上报规则,以便于终端设备和网络设备按照相同的上报规则生成第一指示信息和解析第一指示信息。Since Q weighting coefficients can be determined for each reference signal port, the network device can further indicate the reporting rules of P×Q (ie, K) weighting coefficients corresponding to the P reference signal ports, so as to facilitate the terminal device Generate the first indication information and parse the first indication information according to the same reporting rule as the network device.
可选地,该K个加权系数中的系数c p,q对应于该P个参考信号端口中的第p个参考信号端口、与该第p个参考信号端口对应的Q个角度时延对中的第q个角度时延对,1≤p≤P,1≤q≤Q,均为整数。 Optionally, the coefficients c p, q in the K weighting coefficients correspond to the p-th reference signal port among the P reference signal ports, and the Q-th angle delay centering corresponding to the p-th reference signal port The q-th angle delay pair, 1≤p≤P, 1≤q≤Q, are all integers.
一种可能的上报规则是:从1至P对p依次取值,对于每一个p的取值,上报所对应的Q个系数。A possible reporting rule is: sequentially take values from 1 to P to p, and for each value of p, report the corresponding Q coefficients.
若将上述K个加权系数表示为一个P×Q维矩阵,则该上报规则即优先按行上报。If the above K weighting coefficients are expressed as a P×Q-dimensional matrix, then the reporting rule is to give priority to reporting by row.
另一种可能的上报规则是:从1至Q对q依次取值,对于每一个q的取值,上报所对应的P个系数。Another possible reporting rule is: sequentially take values from 1 to Q to q, and for each value of q, report the corresponding P coefficients.
若将上述K个加权系数表示为一个P×Q维矩阵,则该上报规则即优先按列上报。If the above K weighting coefficients are expressed as a P×Q-dimensional matrix, the reporting rule is to report by column first.
作为另一个实施例,该预编码参考信号与K个参考信号端口对应,每个参考信号端口对应的预编码参考信号的预编码由该K个角度时延对中的一个确定。As another embodiment, the precoding reference signal corresponds to K reference signal ports, and the precoding of the precoding reference signal corresponding to each reference signal port is determined by one of the K angle delay pairs.
即,将每个参考信号端口与一个角度时延对对应,参考信号端口数P等于角度时延对的数量K。基于这样的设计,终端设备由此而确定的K个加权系数是与K个参考信号端口对应的加权系数,也是与K个角度时延对对应的加权系数。终端设备可以沿用现有的方式上报该K个加权系数。That is, each reference signal port corresponds to an angle delay pair, and the number of reference signal ports P is equal to the number K of angle delay pairs. Based on such a design, the K weighting coefficients determined by the terminal device are weighting coefficients corresponding to K reference signal ports, and also weighting coefficients corresponding to K angle delay pairs. The terminal device can report the K weighting coefficients in the existing manner.
基于上述设计,每个参考信号端口的预编码参考信号所对应的频域单元在频域上离散分布。同一个参考信号端口对应的频域单元之间以Q/D-1个频域单元为间隔均匀分布。Based on the above design, the frequency domain units corresponding to the precoding reference signal of each reference signal port are discretely distributed in the frequency domain. The frequency domain units corresponding to the same reference signal port are evenly distributed at intervals of Q/D-1 frequency domain units.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些可能的实现方式中,该K个参考信号端口中的每个参考信号端口对应的预编码参考信号的预编码包括一个空域权值向量和一个频域权值向量;该K个参考信号端口中的第k个参考信号端口对应的预编码中的空域权值向量为该K个角度时延对中的第k个角度时延对的角度向量,该第k个参考信号端口对应的频域权值向量由该第k个角度时延对的时延向量确定。With reference to the first aspect, in some possible implementations of the first aspect, the precoding of the precoding reference signal corresponding to each of the K reference signal ports includes a spatial weight vector and a frequency domain. Weight vector; the spatial weight vector in the precoding corresponding to the k-th reference signal port among the K reference signal ports is the angle vector of the k-th angle-delay pair in the K angle-delay pairs, the The frequency domain weight vector corresponding to the k-th reference signal port is determined by the delay vector of the k-th angle delay pair.
即,K个角度向量中的每个角度向量可以用作预编码的空域权值向量。由于同一个参考信号端口对应的频域单元之间以Q/D-1个频域单元为间隔均匀分布,因此对应于N个频域单元上的相同时频位置,Q个角度向量交替使用。每个角度向量对应于一个参考信号端口。That is, each of the K angle vectors can be used as a precoding spatial weight vector. Since frequency domain units corresponding to the same reference signal port are evenly distributed at intervals of Q/D-1 frequency domain units, corresponding to the same time-frequency position on the N frequency domain units, Q angle vectors are used alternately. Each angle vector corresponds to a reference signal port.
由K个时延向量可以重组得到K个频域权值向量。由于同一个参考信号端口对应的频域单元之间以Q/D-1个频域单元为间隔均匀分布,因此对应于N个频域单元上的相同时频位置,Q个时延向量中的频域权值被交替使用。由Q个时延向量中的部分频域权值可重组得到Q个频域权值向量。每个频域权值向量较时延向量的长度得以减小,从而可以减少加载的频域单元的数量。K time delay vectors can be reorganized to obtain K frequency domain weight vectors. Since the frequency domain units corresponding to the same reference signal port are evenly distributed at intervals of Q/D-1 frequency domain units, it corresponds to the same time-frequency position on the N frequency domain units. The frequency domain weights are used alternately. Part of the frequency domain weights in the Q delay vectors can be reorganized to obtain Q frequency domain weight vectors. The length of each frequency domain weight vector is reduced compared to the length of the delay vector, so that the number of loaded frequency domain units can be reduced.
进一步地,该N个频域单元中的第n个频域单元上接收到的该第k个参考信号端口的预编码参考信号的预编码的频域权值为该第k个角度时延对的时延向量中的第n个元素;1≤n≤N,1≤k≤K,n、k均为整数。Further, the precoding frequency domain weight of the precoding reference signal of the kth reference signal port received on the nth frequency domain unit of the N frequency domain units is the kth angle delay pair The nth element in the delay vector of; 1≤n≤N, 1≤k≤K, n and k are integers.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些可能的实现方式中,该方法还包括:接收第三指示信息,该第三指示信息用于指示Q的值。With reference to the first aspect, in some possible implementation manners of the first aspect, the method further includes: receiving third indication information, where the third indication information is used to indicate the value of Q.
相应地,结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些可能的实现方式中,该方法还包括:发送第三指示信息,该第三指示信息用于指示Q的值。Correspondingly, with reference to the second aspect, in some possible implementation manners of the second aspect, the method further includes: sending third indication information, where the third indication information is used to indicate the value of Q.
即,Q值可以灵活配置。That is, the Q value can be flexibly configured.
网络设备向终端设备发送第三指示信息来指示Q的值,以便于终端设备根据Q值来确定每个角度时延对所对应的频域单元,进而确定每个角度时延对对应的加权系数。The network device sends third indication information to the terminal device to indicate the value of Q, so that the terminal device can determine the frequency domain unit corresponding to each angle delay pair according to the Q value, and then determine the weighting coefficient corresponding to each angle delay pair .
网络设备对Q值的指示方式有很多种,可以通过已有信令或新增信令来指示,可以显式指示,也可以隐式指示。本申请对此不作限定。There are many ways for network equipment to indicate the Q value, which can be indicated through existing signaling or newly-added signaling, and can be indicated explicitly or implicitly. This application does not limit this.
结合第一方面或第二方面,在某些可能的实现方式中,Q的值为预定义值。In combination with the first aspect or the second aspect, in some possible implementation manners, the value of Q is a predefined value.
即,Q值可以固定不变。That is, the Q value can be fixed.
第三方面,提供了一种通信装置,该通信装置可以是终端设备,或终端设备中的部件。该通信装置可以包括用于执行第一方面以及第一方面中任一种可能实现方式中的方法的各个模块或单元。In a third aspect, a communication device is provided. The communication device may be a terminal device or a component in the terminal device. The communication device may include various modules or units for executing the first aspect and the method in any one of the possible implementation manners of the first aspect.
第四方面,提供了一种通信装置,包括处理器。该处理器与存储器耦合,可用于执行存储器中的指令,以实现上述第一方面中任一种可能实现方式中的方法。可选地,该通信装置还包括存储器。可选地,该通信装置还包括通信接口,处理器与通信接口耦合,所述通信接口用于输入和/或输出信息,所述信息包括指令和数据中的至少一项。In a fourth aspect, a communication device is provided, including a processor. The processor is coupled to the memory and can be used to execute instructions in the memory to implement the method in any one of the possible implementation manners of the first aspect. Optionally, the communication device further includes a memory. Optionally, the communication device further includes a communication interface, the processor is coupled with the communication interface, and the communication interface is used to input and/or output information, and the information includes at least one of instructions and data.
在一种实现方式中,该通信装置为终端设备。当该通信装置为终端设备时,所述通信接口可以是收发器,或,输入/输出接口。In an implementation manner, the communication device is a terminal device. When the communication device is a terminal device, the communication interface may be a transceiver, or an input/output interface.
可选地,所述收发器可以为收发电路。可选地,所述输入/输出接口可以为输入/输出电路。Optionally, the transceiver may be a transceiver circuit. Optionally, the input/output interface may be an input/output circuit.
在另一种实现方式中,该通信装置为配置于终端设备中的芯片或芯片系统。当该通信装置为配置于终端设备中的芯片或芯片系统时,所述通信接口可以是输入/输出接口、接口电路、输出电路、输入电路、管脚或相关电路等。所述处理器也可以体现为处理电路或逻辑电路。In another implementation manner, the communication device is a chip or a chip system configured in a terminal device. When the communication device is a chip or a chip system configured in a terminal device, the communication interface may be an input/output interface, an interface circuit, an output circuit, an input circuit, a pin or a related circuit, etc. The processor may also be embodied as a processing circuit or a logic circuit.
第五方面,提供了一种通信装置,该通信装置可以是终端设备,或终端设备中的部件。该通信装置可以包括用于执行第二方面以及第二方面中任一种可能实现方式中的方法的各个模块或单元。In a fifth aspect, a communication device is provided. The communication device may be a terminal device or a component in the terminal device. The communication device may include various modules or units for executing the second aspect and the method in any one of the possible implementation manners of the second aspect.
第六方面,提供了一种通信装置,包括处理器。该处理器与存储器耦合,可用于执行存储器中的指令,以实现上述第二方面中任一种可能实现方式中的方法。可选地,该通信装置还包括存储器。可选地,该通信装置还包括通信接口,处理器与通信接口耦合,所述通信接口用于输入和/或输出信息,所述信息包括指令和数据中的至少一项。In a sixth aspect, a communication device is provided, including a processor. The processor is coupled to the memory and can be used to execute instructions in the memory to implement the method in any one of the possible implementation manners of the second aspect. Optionally, the communication device further includes a memory. Optionally, the communication device further includes a communication interface, the processor is coupled with the communication interface, and the communication interface is used to input and/or output information, and the information includes at least one of instructions and data.
在一种实现方式中,该通信装置为网络设备。当该通信装置为网络设备时,所述通信接口可以是收发器,或,输入/输出接口。In an implementation manner, the communication device is a network device. When the communication device is a network device, the communication interface may be a transceiver, or an input/output interface.
可选地,所述收发器可以为收发电路。可选地,所述输入/输出接口可以为输入/输出电路。Optionally, the transceiver may be a transceiver circuit. Optionally, the input/output interface may be an input/output circuit.
在另一种实现方式中,该通信装置为配置于网络设备中的芯片或芯片系统。当该通信装置为配置于网络设备中的芯片或芯片系统时,所述通信接口可以是输入/输出接口、接口电路、输出电路、输入电路、管脚或相关电路等。所述处理器也可以体现为处理电路或逻辑电路。In another implementation manner, the communication device is a chip or a chip system configured in a network device. When the communication device is a chip or a chip system configured in a network device, the communication interface may be an input/output interface, an interface circuit, an output circuit, an input circuit, a pin, or a related circuit. The processor may also be embodied as a processing circuit or a logic circuit.
第七方面,提供了一种处理器,包括:输入电路、输出电路和处理电路。所述处理电路用于通过所述输入电路接收信号,并通过所述输出电路发射信号,使得所述处理器执行上述第一方面和第二方面中任一种可能实现方式中的方法。In a seventh aspect, a processor is provided, including: an input circuit, an output circuit, and a processing circuit. The processing circuit is configured to receive a signal through the input circuit and transmit a signal through the output circuit, so that the processor executes the method in any one of the foregoing first aspect and the second aspect.
在具体实现过程中,上述处理器可以为芯片,输入电路可以为输入管脚,输出电路可以为输出管脚,处理电路可以为晶体管、门电路、触发器和各种逻辑电路等。输入电路所接收的输入的信号可以是由例如但不限于接收器接收并输入的,输出电路所输出的信号可以是例如但不限于输出给发射器并由发射器发射的,且输入电路和输出电路可以是同一电路,该电路在不同的时刻分别用作输入电路和输出电路。本申请实施例对处理器及各种电路的具体实现方式不做限定。In the specific implementation process, the above-mentioned processor may be a chip, the input circuit may be an input pin, the output circuit may be an output pin, and the processing circuit may be a transistor, a gate circuit, a flip-flop, and various logic circuits. The input signal received by the input circuit may be received and input by, for example, but not limited to, a receiver, and the signal output by the output circuit may be, for example, but not limited to, output to the transmitter and transmitted by the transmitter, and the input circuit and output The circuit can be the same circuit, which is used as an input circuit and an output circuit at different times. The embodiments of the present application do not limit the specific implementation manners of the processor and various circuits.
第八方面,提供了一种处理装置,包括通信接口和处理器。所述通信接口与所述处理器耦合。所述通信接口用于输入和/或输出信息。所述信息包括指令和数据中的至少一项。所述处理器用于执行计算机程序,以使得所述处理装置执行第一方面和第二方面中任一种可能实现方式中的方法。In an eighth aspect, a processing device is provided, including a communication interface and a processor. The communication interface is coupled with the processor. The communication interface is used to input and/or output information. The information includes at least one of instructions and data. The processor is configured to execute a computer program, so that the processing device executes the method in any one of the possible implementation manners of the first aspect and the second aspect.
可选地,所述处理器为一个或多个,所述存储器为一个或多个。Optionally, there are one or more processors, and one or more memories.
第九方面,提供了一种处理装置,包括处理器和存储器。该处理器用于读取存储器中存储的指令,并可通过接收器接收信号,通过发射器发射信号,以使得所述处理装置执行第一方面和第二方面中任一种可能实现方式中的方法。In a ninth aspect, a processing device is provided, including a processor and a memory. The processor is used to read instructions stored in the memory, and can receive signals through a receiver, and transmit signals through a transmitter, so that the processing device executes the method in any one of the possible implementation manners of the first aspect and the second aspect .
可选地,所述处理器为一个或多个,所述存储器为一个或多个。Optionally, there are one or more processors, and one or more memories.
可选地,所述存储器可以与所述处理器集成在一起,或者所述存储器与处理器分离设置。Optionally, the memory may be integrated with the processor, or the memory and the processor may be provided separately.
在具体实现过程中,存储器可以为非瞬时性(non-transitory)存储器,例如只读存储器(read only memory,ROM),其可以与处理器集成在同一块芯片上,也可以分别设置在不同的芯片上,本申请实施例对存储器的类型以及存储器与处理器的设置方式不做限定。In the specific implementation process, the memory can be a non-transitory (non-transitory) memory, such as a read only memory (ROM), which can be integrated with the processor on the same chip, or can be set in different On the chip, the embodiment of the present application does not limit the type of the memory and the setting mode of the memory and the processor.
应理解,相关的信息交互过程,例如发送指示信息可以为从处理器输出指示信息的过程,接收指示信息可以为向处理器输入接收到的指示信息的过程。具体地,处理输出的信息可以输出给发射器,处理器接收的输入信息可以来自接收器。其中,发射器和接收器可以统称为收发器。It should be understood that the related information interaction process, for example, sending instruction information may be a process of outputting instruction information from the processor, and receiving instruction information may be a process of inputting received instruction information to the processor. Specifically, the information output by the processing may be output to the transmitter, and the input information received by the processor may come from the receiver. Among them, the transmitter and receiver can be collectively referred to as a transceiver.
上述第八方面和第九方面中的装置可以是芯片,该处理器可以通过硬件来实现也可以通过软件来实现,当通过硬件实现时,该处理器可以是逻辑电路、集成电路等;当通过软件来实现时,该处理器可以是一个通用处理器,通过读取存储器中存储的软件代码来实现,该存储器可以集成在处理器中,可以位于该处理器之外,独立存在。The devices in the eighth and ninth aspects described above may be chips, and the processor may be implemented by hardware or software. When implemented by hardware, the processor may be a logic circuit, an integrated circuit, etc.; When implemented by software, the processor may be a general-purpose processor, which is implemented by reading software codes stored in the memory. The memory may be integrated in the processor, may be located outside the processor, and exist independently.
第十方面,提供了一种计算机程序产品,所述计算机程序产品包括:计算机程序(也可以称为代码,或指令),当所述计算机程序被运行时,使得计算机执行上述第一方面和第二方面中任一种可能实现方式中的方法。In a tenth aspect, a computer program product is provided. The computer program product includes: a computer program (also called code, or instruction), which when the computer program is run, causes a computer to execute the first aspect and the first aspect described above. The method in any one of the two possible implementation modes.
第十一方面,提供了一种计算机可读介质,所述计算机可读介质存储有计算机程序(也可以称为代码,或指令)当其在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行上述第一方面和第二方面中任一种可能实现方式中的方法。In an eleventh aspect, a computer-readable medium is provided, and the computer-readable medium stores a computer program (also referred to as code, or instruction) when it runs on a computer, so that the computer executes the above-mentioned first aspect and The method in any possible implementation of the second aspect.
第十二方面,提供了一种通信系统,包括前述的终端设备和网络设备。In a twelfth aspect, a communication system is provided, including the aforementioned terminal device and network device.
附图说明Description of the drawings
图1是适用于本申请实施例提供的信道测量方法的通信系统的示意图;FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of a communication system applicable to the channel measurement method provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图2是基于时延向量对参考信号进行预编码的示意图;Figure 2 is a schematic diagram of precoding a reference signal based on a delay vector;
图3是将一个角度时延对加载到参考信号以及确定加权系数的示意图;Fig. 3 is a schematic diagram of loading an angle delay pair to a reference signal and determining a weighting coefficient;
图4是本申请实施例提供的信道测量方法的示意性流程图;FIG. 4 is a schematic flowchart of a channel measurement method provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图5和图6示出了与一个参考信号端口对应的Q个角度时延对;Figures 5 and 6 show Q angle delay pairs corresponding to one reference signal port;
图7示出了各RB与各角度时延对的加权系数的对应关系;FIG. 7 shows the corresponding relationship between the weighting coefficients of each RB and each angle delay pair;
图8是本申请另一实施例提供的信道测量方法的示意性流程图;FIG. 8 is a schematic flowchart of a channel measurement method provided by another embodiment of the present application;
图9示出了多个参考信号端口在N个RB上分布的示意图;FIG. 9 shows a schematic diagram of the distribution of multiple reference signal ports on N RBs;
图10和图11是本申请实施例提供的通信装置的示意性框图;10 and 11 are schematic block diagrams of communication devices provided by embodiments of the present application;
图12是本申请实施例提供的终端设备的结构示意图;FIG. 12 is a schematic structural diagram of a terminal device provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图13是本申请实施例提供的网络设备的结构示意图。Fig. 13 is a schematic structural diagram of a network device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
具体实施方式Detailed ways
下面将结合附图,对本申请中的技术方案进行描述。The technical solution in this application will be described below in conjunction with the accompanying drawings.
本申请提供的技术方案可以应用于各种通信系统,例如:长期演进(Long Term Evolution,LTE)系统、LTE频分双工(frequency division duplex,FDD)系统、LTE时分双工(time division duplex,TDD)、通用移动通信系统(universal mobile telecommunication system,UMTS)、全球互联微波接入(worldwide interoperability for microwave access, WiMAX)通信系统、未来的第五代(5th Generation,5G)移动通信系统或新无线接入技术(new radio access technology,NR)。其中,5G移动通信系统可以包括非独立组网(non-standalone,NSA)和/或独立组网(standalone,SA)。The technical solutions provided in this application can be applied to various communication systems, such as: Long Term Evolution (LTE) system, LTE frequency division duplex (FDD) system, LTE time division duplex (time division duplex, TDD), universal mobile telecommunication system (UMTS), worldwide interoperability for microwave access (WiMAX) communication system, the future 5th Generation (5G) mobile communication system or new wireless Access technology (new radio access technology, NR). Among them, the 5G mobile communication system may include non-standalone (NSA) and/or standalone (SA).
本申请提供的技术方案还可以应用于机器类通信(machine type communication,MTC)、机器间通信长期演进技术(Long Term Evolution-machine,LTE-M)、设备到设备(device-to device,D2D)网络、机器到机器(machine to machine,M2M)网络、物联网(internet of things,IoT)网络或者其他网络。其中,IoT网络例如可以包括车联网。其中,车联网系统中的通信方式统称为车到其他设备(vehicle to X,V2X,X可以代表任何事物),例如,该V2X可以包括:车辆到车辆(vehicle to vehicle,V2V)通信,车辆与基础设施(vehicle to infrastructure,V2I)通信、车辆与行人之间的通信(vehicle to pedestrian,V2P)或车辆与网络(vehicle to network,V2N)通信等。The technical solution provided in this application can also be applied to machine type communication (MTC), inter-machine communication long-term evolution technology (Long Term Evolution-machine, LTE-M), and device-to-device (D2D) Network, machine to machine (M2M) network, Internet of things (IoT) network or other networks. Among them, the IoT network may include, for example, the Internet of Vehicles. Among them, the communication methods in the Internet of Vehicles system are collectively referred to as vehicle to other devices (vehicle to X, V2X, X can represent anything), for example, the V2X may include: vehicle to vehicle (V2V) communication, and the vehicle communicates with Infrastructure (vehicle to infrastructure, V2I) communication, vehicle to pedestrian communication (V2P) or vehicle to network (V2N) communication, etc.
本申请提供的技术方案还可以应用于未来的通信系统,如第六代移动通信系统等。本申请对此不作限定。The technical solution provided in this application can also be applied to future communication systems, such as the sixth-generation mobile communication system. This application does not limit this.
本申请实施例中,网络设备可以是任意一种具有无线收发功能的设备。该设备包括但不限于:演进型节点B(evolved Node B,eNB)、无线网络控制器(radio network controller,RNC)、节点B(Node B,NB)、基站控制器(base station controller,BSC)、基站收发台(base transceiver station,BTS)、家庭基站(例如,home evolved NodeB,或home Node B,HNB)、基带单元(baseband unit,BBU),无线保真(wireless fidelity,WiFi)系统中的接入点(access point,AP)、无线中继节点、无线回传节点、传输点(transmission point,TP)或者发送接收点(transmission and reception point,TRP)等,还可以为5G,如,NR,系统中的gNB,或,传输点(TRP或TP),5G系统中的基站的一个或一组(包括多个天线面板)天线面板,或者,还可以为构成gNB或传输点的网络节点,如基带单元(BBU),或,分布式单元(distributed unit,DU)等。In the embodiment of the present application, the network device may be any device that has a wireless transceiver function. This equipment includes but is not limited to: evolved Node B (eNB), radio network controller (RNC), Node B (NB), base station controller (BSC) , Base transceiver station (BTS), home base station (for example, home evolved NodeB, or home Node B, HNB), baseband unit (BBU), wireless fidelity (wireless fidelity, WiFi) system Access point (AP), wireless relay node, wireless backhaul node, transmission point (TP), or transmission and reception point (TRP), etc., can also be 5G, such as NR , The gNB in the system, or the transmission point (TRP or TP), one or a group of antenna panels (including multiple antenna panels) of the base station in the 5G system, or it can also be a network node that constitutes a gNB or transmission point, Such as baseband unit (BBU), or distributed unit (DU), etc.
在一些部署中,gNB可以包括集中式单元(centralized unit,CU)和DU。gNB还可以包括有源天线单元(active antenna unit,AAU)。CU实现gNB的部分功能,DU实现gNB的部分功能,比如,CU负责处理非实时协议和服务,实现无线资源控制(radio resource control,RRC),分组数据汇聚层协议(packet data convergence protocol,PDCP)层的功能。DU负责处理物理层协议和实时服务,实现无线链路控制(radio link control,RLC)层、介质接入控制(medium access control,MAC)层和物理(physical,PHY)层的功能。AAU实现部分物理层处理功能、射频处理及有源天线的相关功能。由于RRC层的信息最终会变成PHY层的信息,或者,由PHY层的信息转变而来,因而,在这种架构下,高层信令,如RRC层信令,也可以认为是由DU发送的,或者,由DU+AAU发送的。可以理解的是,网络设备可以为包括CU节点、DU节点、AAU节点中一项或多项的设备。此外,可以将CU划分为接入网(radio access network,RAN)中的网络设备,也可以将CU划分为核心网(core network,CN)中的网络设备,本申请对此不做限定。In some deployments, the gNB may include a centralized unit (CU) and a DU. The gNB may also include an active antenna unit (AAU). CU implements some functions of gNB, and DU implements some functions of gNB. For example, CU is responsible for processing non-real-time protocols and services, implementing radio resource control (RRC), and packet data convergence protocol (PDCP) The function of the layer. The DU is responsible for processing physical layer protocols and real-time services, and implements the functions of the radio link control (RLC) layer, medium access control (MAC) layer, and physical (physical, PHY) layer. AAU realizes some physical layer processing functions, radio frequency processing and related functions of active antennas. Since the information of the RRC layer will eventually become the information of the PHY layer, or be transformed from the information of the PHY layer, under this architecture, high-level signaling, such as RRC layer signaling, can also be considered to be sent by the DU , Or, sent by DU+AAU. It can be understood that the network device may be a device that includes one or more of a CU node, a DU node, and an AAU node. In addition, the CU can be divided into network equipment in an access network (radio access network, RAN), and the CU can also be divided into network equipment in a core network (core network, CN), which is not limited in this application.
网络设备为小区提供服务,终端设备通过网络设备分配的传输资源(例如,频域资源,或者说,频谱资源)与小区进行通信,该小区可以属于宏基站(例如,宏eNB或宏gNB等),也可以属于小小区(small cell)对应的基站,这里的小小区可以包括:城市小区(metro cell)、微小区(micro cell)、微微小区(pico cell)、毫微微小区(femto cell)等,这些 小小区具有覆盖范围小、发射功率低的特点,适用于提供高速率的数据传输服务。The network equipment provides services for the cell, and the terminal equipment communicates with the cell through the transmission resources (for example, frequency domain resources, or spectrum resources) allocated by the network equipment, and the cell may belong to a macro base station (for example, a macro eNB or a macro gNB, etc.) , It may also belong to the base station corresponding to the small cell, where the small cell may include: metro cell, micro cell, pico cell, femto cell, etc. These small cells have the characteristics of small coverage area and low transmit power, and are suitable for providing high-speed data transmission services.
在本申请实施例中,终端设备也可以称为用户设备(user equipment,UE)、接入终端、用户单元、用户站、移动站、移动台、远方站、远程终端、移动设备、用户终端、终端、无线通信设备、用户代理或用户装置。In the embodiments of the present application, terminal equipment may also be referred to as user equipment (UE), access terminal, user unit, user station, mobile station, mobile station, remote station, remote terminal, mobile equipment, user terminal, Terminal, wireless communication equipment, user agent or user device.
终端设备可以是一种向用户提供语音/数据连通性的设备,例如,具有无线连接功能的手持式设备、车载设备等。目前,一些终端的举例可以为:手机(mobile phone)、平板电脑(pad)、带无线收发功能的电脑(如笔记本电脑、掌上电脑等)、移动互联网设备(mobile internet device,MID)、虚拟现实(virtual reality,VR)设备、增强现实(augmented reality,AR)设备、工业控制(industrial control)中的无线终端、无人驾驶(self driving)中的无线终端、远程医疗(remote medical)中的无线终端、智能电网(smart grid)中的无线终端、运输安全(transportation safety)中的无线终端、智慧城市(smart city)中的无线终端、智慧家庭(smart home)中的无线终端、蜂窝电话、无绳电话、会话启动协议(session initiation protocol,SIP)电话、无线本地环路(wireless local loop,WLL)站、个人数字助理(personal digital assistant,PDA)、具有无线通信功能的手持设备、计算设备或连接到无线调制解调器的其它处理设备、车载设备、可穿戴设备,5G网络中的终端设备或者未来演进的公用陆地移动通信网络(public land mobile network,PLMN)中的终端设备等。The terminal device may be a device that provides voice/data connectivity to the user, for example, a handheld device with a wireless connection function, a vehicle-mounted device, and so on. At present, some examples of terminals can be: mobile phones (mobile phones), tablets (pads), computers with wireless transceiver functions (such as laptops, palmtop computers, etc.), mobile Internet devices (mobile internet devices, MID), virtual reality Virtual reality (VR) equipment, augmented reality (AR) equipment, wireless terminals in industrial control, wireless terminals in self-driving (self-driving), and wireless in remote medical (remote medical) Terminals, wireless terminals in smart grids, wireless terminals in transportation safety, wireless terminals in smart cities, wireless terminals in smart homes, cellular phones, cordless Telephone, session initiation protocol (SIP) telephone, wireless local loop (WLL) station, personal digital assistant (PDA), handheld device with wireless communication function, computing device or connection Other processing equipment to wireless modems, in-vehicle equipment, wearable equipment, terminal equipment in the 5G network, or terminal equipment in the public land mobile network (PLMN) that will evolve in the future.
其中,可穿戴设备也可以称为穿戴式智能设备,是应用穿戴式技术对日常穿戴进行智能化设计、开发出可以穿戴的设备的总称,如眼镜、手套、手表、服饰及鞋等。可穿戴设备即直接穿在身上,或是整合到用户的衣服或配件的一种便携式设备。可穿戴设备不仅仅是一种硬件设备,更是通过软件支持以及数据交互、云端交互来实现强大的功能。广义穿戴式智能设备包括功能全、尺寸大、可不依赖智能手机实现完整或者部分的功能,例如:智能手表或智能眼镜等,以及只专注于某一类应用功能,需要和其它设备如智能手机配合使用,如各类进行体征监测的智能手环、智能首饰等。Among them, wearable devices can also be called wearable smart devices, which are the general term for using wearable technology to intelligently design daily wear and develop wearable devices, such as glasses, gloves, watches, clothing and shoes. A wearable device is a portable device that is directly worn on the body or integrated into the user's clothes or accessories. Wearable devices are not only a kind of hardware device, but also realize powerful functions through software support, data interaction, and cloud interaction. In a broad sense, wearable smart devices include full-featured, large-sized, complete or partial functions that can be achieved without relying on smart phones, such as smart watches or smart glasses, and only focus on a certain type of application function, and need to cooperate with other devices such as smart phones. Use, such as all kinds of smart bracelets and smart jewelry for physical sign monitoring.
此外,终端设备还可以是物联网(internet of things,IoT)系统中的终端设备。IoT是未来信息技术发展的重要组成部分,其主要技术特点是将物品通过通信技术与网络连接,从而实现人机互连,物物互连的智能化网络。IoT技术可以通过例如窄带(narrow band,NB)技术,做到海量连接,深度覆盖,终端省电。In addition, the terminal device may also be a terminal device in an Internet of Things (IoT) system. IoT is an important part of the development of information technology in the future. Its main technical feature is to connect objects to the network through communication technology, so as to realize the intelligent network of human-machine interconnection and interconnection of things. IoT technology can achieve massive connections, deep coverage, and power-saving terminals through, for example, narrowband (NB) technology.
此外,终端设备还可以包括智能打印机、火车探测器、加油站等传感器,主要功能包括收集数据(部分终端设备)、接收网络设备的控制信息与下行数据,并发送电磁波,向网络设备传输上行数据。In addition, terminal devices can also include sensors such as smart printers, train detectors, gas stations, etc. The main functions include collecting data (some terminal devices), receiving control information and downlink data from network devices, and sending electromagnetic waves to transmit uplink data to network devices. .
为便于理解本申请实施例,首先结合图1详细说明适用于本申请实施例提供的信道测量方法的通信系统。图1示出了适用于本申请实施例提供的方法的通信系统100的示意图。如图所示,该通信系统100可以包括至少一个网络设备,如图1中所示的网络设备101;该通信系统100还可以包括至少一个终端设备,如图1中所示的终端设备102至107。其中,该终端设备102至107可以是移动的或固定的。网络设备101和终端设备102至107中的一个或多个均可以通过无线链路通信。每个网络设备可以为特定的地理区域提供通信覆盖,并且可以与位于该覆盖区域内的终端设备通信。例如,网络设备可以向终端设备发送配置信息,终端设备可以基于该配置信息向网络设备发送上行数据;又例如,网络设备可以向终端设备发送下行数据。因此,图1中的网络设备101和终端设备102至107构成 一个通信系统。In order to facilitate the understanding of the embodiments of the present application, a communication system suitable for the channel measurement method provided in the embodiments of the present application will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 1. FIG. 1 shows a schematic diagram of a communication system 100 applicable to the method provided in the embodiment of the present application. As shown in the figure, the communication system 100 may include at least one network device, such as the network device 101 shown in FIG. 1; the communication system 100 may also include at least one terminal device, such as the terminal devices 102 to 102 shown in FIG. 107. Wherein, the terminal devices 102 to 107 may be mobile or fixed. The network device 101 and one or more of the terminal devices 102 to 107 can communicate through a wireless link. Each network device can provide communication coverage for a specific geographic area, and can communicate with terminal devices located in the coverage area. For example, the network device may send configuration information to the terminal device, and the terminal device may send uplink data to the network device based on the configuration information; for another example, the network device may send downlink data to the terminal device. Therefore, the network device 101 and the terminal devices 102 to 107 in Fig. 1 constitute a communication system.
可选地,终端设备之间可以直接通信。例如可以利用D2D技术等实现终端设备之间的直接通信。如图中所示,终端设备105与106之间、终端设备105与107之间,可以利用D2D技术直接通信。终端设备106和终端设备107可以单独或同时与终端设备105通信。Optionally, the terminal devices can communicate directly. For example, D2D technology can be used to realize direct communication between terminal devices. As shown in the figure, between terminal devices 105 and 106, and between terminal devices 105 and 107, D2D technology can be used for direct communication. The terminal device 106 and the terminal device 107 may communicate with the terminal device 105 individually or at the same time.
终端设备105至107也可以分别与网络设备101通信。例如可以直接与网络设备101通信,如图中的终端设备105和106可以直接与网络设备101通信;也可以间接地与网络设备101通信,如图中的终端设备107经由终端设备105与网络设备101通信。The terminal devices 105 to 107 may also communicate with the network device 101, respectively. For example, it can directly communicate with the network device 101, as shown in the figure, the terminal devices 105 and 106 can directly communicate with the network device 101; it can also communicate with the network device 101 indirectly, as the terminal device 107 in the figure communicates with the network device via the terminal device 105 101 communication.
应理解,图1示例性地示出了一个网络设备和多个终端设备,以及各通信设备之间的通信链路。可选地,该通信系统100可以包括多个网络设备,并且每个网络设备的覆盖范围内可以包括其它数量的终端设备,例如更多或更少的终端设备。本申请对此不做限定。It should be understood that FIG. 1 exemplarily shows a network device, multiple terminal devices, and communication links between each communication device. Optionally, the communication system 100 may include multiple network devices, and the coverage of each network device may include other numbers of terminal devices, for example, more or fewer terminal devices. This application does not limit this.
上述各个通信设备,如图1中的网络设备101和终端设备102至107,可以配置多个天线。该多个天线可以包括至少一个用于发送信号的发射天线和至少一个用于接收信号的接收天线。另外,各通信设备还附加地包括发射机链和接收机链,本领域普通技术人员可以理解,它们均可包括与信号发送和接收相关的多个部件(例如处理器、调制器、复用器、解调器、解复用器或天线等)。因此,网络设备与终端设备之间可通过多天线技术通信。Each of the aforementioned communication devices, such as the network device 101 and the terminal devices 102 to 107 in FIG. 1, may be configured with multiple antennas. The plurality of antennas may include at least one transmitting antenna for transmitting signals and at least one receiving antenna for receiving signals. In addition, each communication device additionally includes a transmitter chain and a receiver chain. Those of ordinary skill in the art can understand that they can all include multiple components related to signal transmission and reception (such as processors, modulators, multiplexers, etc.). , Demodulator, demultiplexer or antenna, etc.). Therefore, multiple antenna technology can be used to communicate between network devices and terminal devices.
可选地,该无线通信系统100还可以包括网络控制器、移动管理实体等其他网络实体,本申请实施例不限于此。Optionally, the wireless communication system 100 may also include other network entities such as a network controller and a mobility management entity, and the embodiment of the present application is not limited thereto.
为了更好地理解本申请实施例,在介绍本申请实施例之前,做出如下几点说明。In order to better understand the embodiments of the present application, before introducing the embodiments of the present application, the following descriptions are made.
第一,为方便理解,先对本申请实施例中涉及到的几个字母所表示的物理意义做如下说明:First, in order to facilitate understanding, the physical meanings of the letters involved in the embodiments of this application are described as follows:
K:角度时延对的数量,K>1且为整数;K: the number of angle delay pairs, K>1 and an integer;
P:参考信号端口数,也即,对参考信号进行了空域预编码和频域预编码之后的端口数,P≥1且为整数;P: the number of reference signal ports, that is, the number of ports after spatial domain precoding and frequency domain precoding are performed on the reference signal, P≥1 and an integer;
Q-1:对应于同一个角度时延对的两个相邻的频域单元之间的频域单元数,用于描述对应于同一个角度时延对的两个频域单元之间的最小间隔,Q>1且为整数;Q-1: The number of frequency domain units between two adjacent frequency domain units corresponding to the same angular delay pair, used to describe the minimum between two frequency domain units corresponding to the same angular delay pair Interval, Q>1 and an integer;
D:导频密度,D>0;D: Pilot frequency density, D>0;
N:参考信号的传输带宽中包含的频域单元的数量,N>1且为整数;N: the number of frequency domain units included in the transmission bandwidth of the reference signal, N>1 and an integer;
T:发射天线端口数,T>1且为整数;T: the number of transmitting antenna ports, T>1 and an integer;
F:频域权值矩阵,在本申请实施例中可以表示为维度为N×K的矩阵;F: a frequency domain weight matrix, which can be expressed as a matrix with a dimension of N×K in the embodiment of this application;
S:空域权值矩阵,在本申请实施例中可以表示为维度为T×K的矩阵;S: Spatial weight matrix, which can be expressed as a matrix with a dimension of T×K in the embodiment of this application;
C:系数矩阵,在本申请实施例中可以表示为维度为K×K的对角阵。C: A coefficient matrix, which can be expressed as a diagonal matrix with a dimension of K×K in the embodiment of the present application.
第二,在本申请实施例中,为便于描述,在涉及编号时,可以从1开始连续编号。例如,N个频域单元可以包括第1个频域单元至第N个频域单元,K个角度时延对可以包括第1个角度时延对至第K个角度时延对,P个参考信号端口可以包括第1个参考信号端口至第P个参考信号端口等。当然,具体实现时不限于此。比如也可以从0始连续编号。例如,N个频域单元可以包括第0个频域单元至第N-1个频域单元,K个角度时延对可以包括第0个角度时延对至第K-1角度时延对,P个参考信号端口可以包括第0个参考信号端口至第P-1参考信号端口等,为了简洁,这里不一一列举。Second, in the embodiments of the present application, for ease of description, when serial numbers are involved, serial numbers can be started from 1. For example, N frequency domain units may include the first frequency domain unit to the Nth frequency domain unit, the K angle delay pairs may include the first angle delay pair to the Kth angle delay pair, and P references The signal port may include the first reference signal port to the P-th reference signal port, and so on. Of course, the specific implementation is not limited to this. For example, it can also be numbered consecutively from 0. For example, the N frequency domain units may include the 0th frequency domain unit to the N-1th frequency domain unit, and the K angle delay pairs may include the 0th angle delay pair to the K-1th angle delay pair, The P reference signal ports may include the 0th reference signal port to the P-1th reference signal port, etc., which are not listed here for brevity.
应理解,上文所述均为便于描述本申请实施例提供的技术方案而进行的设置,而并非用于限制本申请的范围。It should be understood that the above descriptions are all settings to facilitate the description of the technical solutions provided by the embodiments of the present application, and are not used to limit the scope of the present application.
第三,在本申请中,多处涉及矩阵和向量的变换和以及函数的运算。为便于理解,这里做统一说明。下文所示的矩阵A、参数p、q、Q、a、b、N等均为示例。Third, in this application, many places involve the transformation and sum of matrices and vectors, as well as the operation of functions. For ease of understanding, here is a unified description. The matrix A, parameters p, q, Q, a, b, N, etc. shown below are all examples.
对于矩阵A,上角标T表示转置,如A T表示矩阵(或向量)A的转置。上角标H表示共轭转置,如,A H表示矩阵(或向量)A的共轭转置。 For matrix A, the superscript T represents transpose, for example, AT represents the transpose of matrix (or vector) A. The superscript H represents the conjugate transpose, for example, A H represents the conjugate transpose of the matrix (or vector) A.
对于矩阵A,函数A(:,p)表示取矩阵A中的第p列的第一行至最后一行,也即,取矩阵A中的第p列。A(q,:)表示取矩阵A中的第q行的第一列至最后一列,也即取矩阵A中的第q行。For matrix A, the function A(:, p) means to take the first row to the last row of the p-th column in the matrix A, that is, take the p-th column in the matrix A. A(q,:) represents taking the first column to the last column of the qth row in matrix A, that is, taking the qth row in matrix A.
进一步地,函数A(a,Q,b:,p)表示对矩阵中的第p列中,起始行为a,结束行为b,以Q为增量值来取值。也就是说,所取到的值在矩阵A中对应的行号的差值为Q或Q的整数倍。Further, the function A(a, Q, b:, p) indicates that in the p-th column in the matrix, the starting behavior a and the ending behavior b are taken with Q as the incremental value. That is to say, the difference of the corresponding row number in matrix A of the obtained value is Q or an integer multiple of Q.
举例来说,函数A(1,Q,end:,p)表示:对该矩阵A的第p列,从第一行至最后一行,以Q为增量来取值。假设Q=2,若总行数为奇数,则表示从该矩阵A的第p列的第1行开始,取第1行、第3行、第5行、第7行直至最后一行的值;若总行数为偶数,则表示从该矩阵A的第p列的第1行开始,取第1行、第3行、第5行、第7行、直至倒数第二行的值。For example, the function A(1, Q, end:, p) indicates that the value of the p-th column of the matrix A is taken from the first row to the last row with the increment of Q. Assuming Q=2, if the total number of rows is an odd number, it means that starting from the first row of the p-th column of the matrix A, take the values of the first row, the third row, the fifth row, the seventh row and the last row; if If the total number of rows is an even number, it means that starting from the first row of the p-th column of the matrix A, the values of the first row, the third row, the fifth row, the seventh row, and the penultimate row are taken.
函数diag()表示对角矩阵。The function diag() represents a diagonal matrix.
函数N%Q表示取N/Q的余数。The function N%Q means taking the remainder of N/Q.
函数
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000005
表示向上取整,也可以表示为floor()。
function
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000005
Represents rounding up, and can also be expressed as floor().
第四,下文中,当描述两个频域之间间隔了Q-1个频域单元时,可以是指不包含这两个频域单元在内所间隔的频域单元数为Q-1个。例如,RB#1和RB#5之间间隔了3个RB。可以理解,间隔数不同于上文所述的增量值。当增量值为Q时,间隔数为Q-1。其中,Q仅为示例。Fourth, in the following, when it is described that there are Q-1 frequency domain units between two frequency domains, it can mean that the number of frequency domain units separated by not including these two frequency domain units is Q-1. . For example, there are 3 RBs between RB#1 and RB#5. It can be understood that the number of intervals is different from the increment value described above. When the increment value is Q, the number of intervals is Q-1. Among them, Q is only an example.
第五,在下文示出的实施例中,以角度向量和时延向量均为列向量为例来说明本申请提供的实施例,但这不应对本申请构成任何限定。基于相同的构思,本领域的技术人员还可以想到其他更多可能的表现方式。Fifth, in the embodiments shown below, the angle vector and the delay vector are both column vectors as an example to illustrate the embodiments provided in this application, but this should not constitute any limitation to this application. Based on the same concept, those skilled in the art can also think of other more possible expressions.
第六,在本申请中,“用于指示”可以包括用于直接指示和用于间接指示。当描述某一指示信息用于指示A时,可以包括该指示信息直接指示A或间接指示A,而并不代表该指示信息中一定携带有A。Sixth, in this application, "used to indicate" can include both used for direct indication and used for indirect indication. When describing a certain indication information for indicating A, the indication information may directly indicate A or indirectly indicate A, but it does not mean that A must be carried in the indication information.
将指示信息所指示的信息称为待指示信息,则具体实现过程中,对待指示信息进行指示的方式有很多种,例如但不限于,可以直接指示待指示信息,如待指示信息本身或者该待指示信息的索引等。也可以通过指示其他信息来间接指示待指示信息,其中该其他信息与待指示信息之间存在关联关系。还可以仅仅指示待指示信息的一部分,而待指示信息的其他部分则是已知的或者提前约定的。例如,还可以借助预先约定(例如协议规定)的各个信息的排列顺序来实现对特定信息的指示,从而在一定程度上降低指示开销。同时,还可以识别各个信息的通用部分并统一指示,以降低单独指示同样的信息而带来的指示开销。例如,本领域的技术人员应当明白,预编码矩阵是由预编码向量组成的,预编码矩阵中的各个预编码向量,在组成或者其他属性方面,可能存在相同的部分。The information indicated by the instruction information is called the information to be indicated. In the specific implementation process, there are many ways to indicate the information to be indicated. For example but not limited to, the information to be indicated can be directly indicated, such as the information to be indicated or the information to be indicated. Indicates the index of the information, etc. The information to be indicated can also be indicated indirectly by indicating other information, where there is an association relationship between the other information and the information to be indicated. It is also possible to indicate only a part of the information to be indicated, while other parts of the information to be indicated are known or agreed in advance. For example, it is also possible to realize the indication of specific information by means of a pre-arranged order (for example, stipulated in an agreement) of various information, so as to reduce the indication overhead to a certain extent. At the same time, it can also identify the common parts of each information and give unified instructions, so as to reduce the instruction overhead caused by separately indicating the same information. For example, those skilled in the art should understand that the precoding matrix is composed of precoding vectors, and each precoding vector in the precoding matrix may have the same parts in terms of composition or other attributes.
此外,具体的指示方式还可以是现有各种指示方式,例如但不限于,上述指示方式及其各种组合等。各种指示方式的具体细节可以参考现有技术,本文不再赘述。由上文所述可知,举例来说,当需要指示相同类型的多个信息时,可能会出现不同信息的指示方式不相同的情形。具体实现过程中,可以根据具体的需要选择所需的指示方式,本申请实施例对选择的指示方式不做限定,如此一来,本申请实施例涉及的指示方式应理解为涵盖可以使得待指示方获知待指示信息的各种方法。In addition, the specific instruction manner may also be various existing instruction manners, such as but not limited to the foregoing instruction manners and various combinations thereof. For the specific details of the various indication modes, reference may be made to the prior art, which will not be repeated here. It can be seen from the above that, for example, when multiple pieces of information of the same type need to be indicated, a situation where different information is indicated in different ways may occur. In the specific implementation process, the required instruction method can be selected according to specific needs. The embodiment of the application does not limit the selected instruction method. As a result, the instruction method involved in the embodiment of the application should be understood as covering that can make the instruction to be instructed Various methods for obtaining information to be indicated.
待指示信息可以作为一个整体一起发送,也可以分成多个子信息分开发送,而且这些子信息的发送周期和/或发送时机可以相同,也可以不同。具体发送方法本申请不进行限定。其中,这些子信息的发送周期和/或发送时机可以是预先定义的,例如根据协议预先定义的,也可以是发射端设备通过向接收端设备发送配置信息来配置的。其中,该配置信息可以例如但不限于包括无线资源控制信令、介质接入控制(medium access control,MAC)层信令和物理层信令中的一种或者至少两种的组合。其中,无线资源控制信令例如包无线资源控制(radio resource control,RRC)信令;MAC层信令例如包括MAC控制元素(control element,CE);物理层信令例如包括下行控制信息(downlink control information,DCI)。The information to be instructed can be sent together as a whole, or divided into multiple sub-information to be sent separately, and the sending period and/or sending timing of these sub-information can be the same or different. The specific sending method is not limited in this application. The sending period and/or sending timing of these sub-information may be pre-defined, for example, pre-defined according to a protocol, or configured by the transmitting end device by sending configuration information to the receiving end device. The configuration information may include, for example, but not limited to, one or a combination of at least two of radio resource control signaling, medium access control (medium access control, MAC) layer signaling, and physical layer signaling. Among them, radio resource control signaling, such as packet radio resource control (RRC) signaling; MAC layer signaling, for example, includes MAC control element (CE); physical layer signaling, for example, includes downlink control information (downlink control). information, DCI).
第七,本申请对很多特性(例如预编码矩阵指示(precoding matrix indicator,PMI)、信道、RB、RBG、子带、PRG、RE、角度以及时延等)所列出的定义仅用于以举例方式来解释该特性的功能,其详细内容可以参考现有技术。Seventh, the definitions listed in this application for many characteristics (such as precoding matrix indicator (PMI), channel, RB, RBG, subband, PRG, RE, angle, and delay, etc.) are only used to The function of this feature is explained by way of example, and the detailed content can refer to the prior art.
第八,在下文示出的实施例中第一、第二以及各种数字编号仅为描述方便进行的区分,并不用来限制本申请实施例的范围。例如,区分不同的指示信息等。Eighth, in the embodiments shown below, the first, second, and various numerical numbers are only for easy distinction for description, and are not used to limit the scope of the embodiments of the present application. For example, distinguish different instructions.
第九,“预定义”或“预配置”可以通过在设备(例如,包括终端设备和网络设备)中预先保存相应的代码、表格或其他可用于指示相关信息的方式来实现,本申请对于其具体的实现方式不做限定。其中,“保存”可以是指,保存在一个或者多个存储器中。所述一个或者多个存储器可以是单独的设置,也可以是集成在编码器或者译码器,处理器、或通信装置中。所述一个或者多个存储器也可以是一部分单独设置,一部分集成在译码器、处理器、或通信装置中。存储器的类型可以是任意形式的存储介质,本申请并不对此限定。Ninth, "pre-defined" or "pre-configured" can be realized by pre-saving corresponding codes, tables or other methods that can be used to indicate relevant information in the device (for example, including terminal devices and network devices). The specific implementation method is not limited. Wherein, "saving" may refer to storing in one or more memories. The one or more memories may be provided separately, or integrated in an encoder or decoder, a processor, or a communication device. The one or more memories may also be partly provided separately, and partly integrated in a decoder, a processor, or a communication device. The type of the memory can be any form of storage medium, which is not limited in this application.
第十,本申请实施例中涉及的“协议”可以是指通信领域的标准协议,例如可以包括LTE协议、NR协议以及应用于未来的通信系统中的相关协议,本申请对此不做限定。Tenth, the “protocols” involved in the embodiments of the present application may refer to standard protocols in the communication field, for example, may include LTE protocol, NR protocol, and related protocols applied to future communication systems, which are not limited in this application.
第十一,“至少一个”是指一个或者多个,“多个”是指两个或两个以上。“和/或”,描述关联对象的关联关系,表示可以存在三种关系,例如,A和/或B,可以表示:单独存在A,同时存在A和B,单独存在B的情况,其中A,B可以是单数或者复数。字符“/”一般表示前后关联对象是一种“或”的关系。“以下至少一项(个)”或其类似表达,是指的这些项中的任意组合,包括单项(个)或复数项(个)的任意组合。例如,a、b和c中的至少一项(个),可以表示:a,或,b,或,c,或,a和b,或,a和c,或,b和c,或,a、b和c。其中a、b和c分别可以是单个,也可以是多个。Eleventh, "at least one" refers to one or more, and "multiple" refers to two or more. "And/or" describes the association relationship of the associated objects, indicating that there can be three relationships, for example, A and/or B, which can mean: A alone exists, A and B exist at the same time, and B exists alone, where A, B can be singular or plural. The character "/" generally indicates that the associated objects before and after are in an "or" relationship. "The following at least one item (a)" or similar expressions refers to any combination of these items, including any combination of a single item (a) or a plurality of items (a). For example, at least one of a, b, and c can mean: a, or, b, or, c, or, a and b, or, a and c, or, b and c, or, a , B, and c. Among them, a, b, and c can be single or multiple.
第十二,在本申请实施例中,“当……时”、“在……的情况下”、“若”以及“如果”等描述均指在某种客观情况下设备(如,终端设备或者网络设备)会做出相应的处理,并非是限定时间,且也不要求设备(如,终端设备或者网络设备)在实现时一定要有判断的动作,也不意味着存在其它限定。Twelfth, in the embodiments of this application, the descriptions such as "when...", "under the condition of...", "if" and "if" all refer to the equipment under certain objective circumstances (such as terminal equipment). Or the network device) will make the corresponding processing, which is not a time limit, and the device (such as a terminal device or a network device) is not required to have a judging action when it is implemented, nor does it mean that there are other restrictions.
为便于理解本申请实施例,下面对本申请实施例中涉及到的术语做简单介绍。To facilitate the understanding of the embodiments of the present application, the following briefly introduces the terms involved in the embodiments of the present application.
1、信道互易性:在某些通信模式中,如TDD中,上下行信道在相同的频域资源上不同的时域资源上传输信号。在相对较短的时间(如,信道传播的相干时间)之内,可以认为上、下行信道上的信号所经历的信道衰落是相同的。这就是上下行信道的互易性。基于上下行信道的互易性,网络设备可以根据上行参考信号,如探测参考信号(sounding reference signal,SRS),测量上行信道。并可以根据上行信道来估计下行信道,从而可以确定用于下行传输的预编码矩阵。1. Channel reciprocity: In some communication modes, such as TDD, the uplink and downlink channels transmit signals on the same frequency domain resources and different time domain resources. In a relatively short time (for example, the coherence time of channel propagation), it can be considered that the channel fading experienced by the signals on the uplink and downlink channels is the same. This is the reciprocity of the uplink and downlink channels. Based on the reciprocity of the uplink and downlink channels, the network equipment can measure the uplink channel based on the uplink reference signal, such as a sounding reference signal (SRS). The downlink channel can be estimated according to the uplink channel, so that the precoding matrix for downlink transmission can be determined.
然而,在另一些通信模式中,如FDD中,由于上下行信道的频带间隔远大于相干带宽,上下行信道不具有完整的互易性,利用上行信道来确定用于下行传输的预编码矩阵可能并不能够与下行信道相适配。但是,FDD模式下的上下行信道仍然具有部分的互易性,例如,角度的互易性和时延的互易性。因此,角度和时延也可以称为互易性参数。However, in other communication modes, such as FDD, because the frequency band spacing between the uplink and downlink channels is much larger than the coherent bandwidth, the uplink and downlink channels do not have complete reciprocity, and the uplink channel is used to determine the precoding matrix for downlink transmission. It cannot be adapted to the downlink channel. However, the uplink and downlink channels in the FDD mode still have partial reciprocity, for example, the reciprocity of angle and the reciprocity of delay. Therefore, angle and delay can also be called reciprocity parameters.
信号在经过无线信道传输时,从发射天线可以经过多个路径到达接收天线。多径时延导致频率选择性衰落,就是频域信道的变化。时延是无线信号在不同传输路径上的传输时间,由距离和速度决定,与无线信号的频域没有关系。信号在不同的传输路径上传输时,由于距离不同,存在不同的传输时延。由于网络设备与终端设备之间的物理位置是固定的,因而上下行信道的多径分布在时延上是相同的。因此,时延在FDD模式下的上下行信道可以认为是相同的,或者说,互易的。When the signal is transmitted through the wireless channel, it can reach the receiving antenna through multiple paths from the transmitting antenna. Multipath time delay causes frequency selective fading, which is the change of frequency domain channel. The time delay is the transmission time of the wireless signal on different transmission paths, which is determined by the distance and speed, and has nothing to do with the frequency domain of the wireless signal. When signals are transmitted on different transmission paths, there are different transmission delays due to different distances. Since the physical location between the network equipment and the terminal equipment is fixed, the multipath distribution of the uplink and downlink channels is the same in terms of delay. Therefore, the uplink and downlink channels in the FDD mode with delay can be considered the same, or in other words, reciprocal.
此外,角度可以是指信号经由无线信道到达接收天线的到达角(angle of arrival,AOA),也可以是指通过发射天线发射信号的离开角(angle of departure,AOD)。在本申请实施例中,该角度可以是指上行信号到达网络设备的到达角,也可以是指网络设备发射下行信号的离开角。由于上下行信道在不同频率上的传输路径的互易,该上行参考信号的到达角和下行参考信号的离开角可以认为是互易的。In addition, the angle may refer to the angle of arrival (AOA) at which the signal reaches the receiving antenna via the wireless channel, or may refer to the angle of departure (AOD) at which the signal is transmitted through the transmitting antenna. In the embodiment of the present application, the angle may refer to the angle of arrival at which the uplink signal reaches the network device, and may also refer to the angle of departure at which the network device transmits the downlink signal. Due to the reciprocity of the transmission paths of the uplink and downlink channels on different frequencies, the arrival angle of the uplink reference signal and the departure angle of the downlink reference signal can be considered to be reciprocal.
在本申请实施例中,每个角度可以通过一个角度向量来表征。每个时延可通过一个时延向量来表征。因此,在本申请实施例中,一个角度向量可以表示一个角度,一个时延向量可以表示一个时延。In the embodiment of the present application, each angle can be characterized by an angle vector. Each delay can be characterized by a delay vector. Therefore, in the embodiment of the present application, an angle vector may represent an angle, and a delay vector may represent a time delay.
每个角度向量可以与下文所述的一个时延向量组合得到一个角度时延对。换言之,一个角度时延对可以包括一个角度向量和一个时延向量。Each angle vector can be combined with a delay vector described below to obtain an angle delay pair. In other words, an angle delay pair may include an angle vector and a delay vector.
2、角度向量:也可以称为空域向量、波束(beam)向量等。角度向量可以理解为用于对参考信号进行波束赋形(beamforming)的预编码向量。基于角度向量对参考信号进行预编码的过程也可以视为是空间域(或简称,空域)预编码的过程。2. Angle vector: It can also be called a space vector, beam vector, etc. The angle vector can be understood as a precoding vector used for beamforming the reference signal. The process of precoding the reference signal based on the angle vector can also be regarded as a process of spatial domain (or simply, spatial domain) precoding.
角度向量可以是长度为T的向量。其中,T可以表示发射天线端口数,T>1且为整数。对于一个长度为T的角度向量来说,它包含了T个空域权值(或简称,权值),该T个权值可用于对T个发射天线端口进行加权,以使得该T个发射天线端口所发射出来的参考信号具有一定的空间指向性,从而实现波束赋形。The angle vector can be a vector of length T. Among them, T can represent the number of transmitting antenna ports, T>1 and an integer. For an angle vector of length T, it contains T spatial weights (or weights for short), and the T weights can be used to weight the T transmit antenna ports so that the T transmit antennas The reference signal emitted by the port has a certain spatial directivity, so as to realize beamforming.
基于不同的角度向量对参考信号进行预编码,就相当于基于不同的角度向量对发射天线端口进行波束赋形,以使得所发射出来的参考信号具有不同的空间指向性。Precoding the reference signal based on different angle vectors is equivalent to beamforming the transmitting antenna port based on different angle vectors, so that the transmitted reference signals have different spatial directivities.
可选地,角度向量是离散傅里叶变换(Discrete Fourier Transform,DFT)向量。DFT向量可以是指DFT矩阵中的向量。Optionally, the angle vector is a Discrete Fourier Transform (DFT) vector. The DFT vector may refer to the vector in the DFT matrix.
可选地,角度向量是DFT向量的共轭转置向量。DFT共轭转置向量可以是指DFT矩阵的共轭转置矩阵中的列向量。Optionally, the angle vector is the conjugate transpose vector of the DFT vector. The DFT conjugate transpose vector may refer to the column vector in the conjugate transpose matrix of the DFT matrix.
可选地,角度向量是过采样DFT向量。过采样DFT向量可以是指过采样DFT矩阵中的向量。Optionally, the angle vector is an oversampled DFT vector. The oversampled DFT vector may refer to the vector in the oversampled DFT matrix.
在一种可能的设计中,该角度向量例如可以是第三代合作伙伴(3rd Generation Partnership Project,3GPP)技术规范(technical specification,TS)38.214版本15(release15,R15)或R16中类型II(type II)码本中定义的二维(2dimensions,2D)-DFT向量v l,m。换句话说,角度向量可以是2D-DFT向量或过采样2D-DFT向量。 In a possible design, the angle vector may be, for example, the 3rd Generation Partnership Project (3GPP) technical specification (TS) 38.214 version 15 (release 15, R15) or type II (type II) in R16. II) Two-dimensional (2dimensions, 2D)-DFT vector v l,m defined in the codebook. In other words, the angle vector can be a 2D-DFT vector or an oversampled 2D-DFT vector.
应理解,上文对角度向量的具体形式的举例仅为示例,不应对本申请构成任何限定。例如,时延向量也可以取自DFT矩阵。本申请对于时延向量的具体形式不作限定。It should be understood that the above examples of the specific form of the angle vector are only examples, and should not constitute any limitation to the application. For example, the delay vector can also be taken from the DFT matrix. This application does not limit the specific form of the delay vector.
还应理解,角度向量是本申请提出的用于表示角度的一种形式。角度向量仅为便于与时延向量区分而命名,而不应对本申请构成任何限定。本申请并不排除在未来的协议中定义其他名称来表示相同或相似含义的可能。It should also be understood that the angle vector is a form for expressing an angle proposed in this application. The angle vector is only named for the convenience of distinguishing from the delay vector, and should not constitute any limitation in this application. This application does not exclude the possibility of defining other names in future agreements to represent the same or similar meanings.
若将真实的下行信道记作V,则V可以表示为维度为R×T的矩阵。其中R为接收天线端口数,T为发射天线端口数;R、T均为正整数。在下行传输中,基于角度向量对参考信号进行预编码后得到的预编码后的参考信号可以通过下行信道传输至终端设备,因此,终端设备根据接收到的预编码参考信号测量的信道等效于加载了角度向量的信道。例如,将角度向量a k加载到下行信道V,可以表示为Va k。换言之,将角度向量加载到参考信号上,也即,将角度向量加载到信道上。 If the real downlink channel is denoted as V, then V can be expressed as a matrix with a dimension of R×T. Among them, R is the number of receiving antenna ports, and T is the number of transmitting antenna ports; R and T are both positive integers. In downlink transmission, the precoded reference signal obtained by precoding the reference signal based on the angle vector can be transmitted to the terminal device through the downlink channel. Therefore, the channel measured by the terminal device according to the received precoding reference signal is equivalent to The channel with the angle vector loaded. For example, loading the angle vector ak to the downlink channel V can be expressed as Va k . In other words, the angle vector is loaded on the reference signal, that is, the angle vector is loaded on the channel.
3、时延向量:也可以称为频域向量。时延向量是用于表示信道在频域的变化规律的向量。如前所述,多径时延导致频率选择性衰落。由傅里叶变换可知,信号在时域上的时间延迟,可以等效到频域的相位渐变。3. Time delay vector: It can also be called a frequency domain vector. The delay vector is a vector used to represent the changing law of the channel in the frequency domain. As mentioned earlier, multipath delay causes frequency selective fading. According to the Fourier transform, the time delay of the signal in the time domain can be equivalent to the phase gradual change in the frequency domain.
由于信道在各频域单元的相位变化与时延相关,故可将信道在各频域单元的相位的变化规律通过时延向量来表示。换句话说,该时延向量可用于表示信道的时延特性。Since the phase change of the channel in each frequency domain unit is related to the time delay, the change law of the phase of the channel in each frequency domain unit can be represented by a time delay vector. In other words, the delay vector can be used to represent the delay characteristics of the channel.
时延向量可以是长度为N的向量。其中,N可以表示用于承载参考信号的频域单元数,N>1且为整数。对于一个长度为N的时延向量来说,它包含了N个频域权值(或简称,权值),该N个权值可分别用于对N个频域单元进行相位旋转。通过对该N个频域单元上承载的参考信号进行预编码,可以对多径时延造成的频选特性进行预补偿。因此,基于时延向量对参考信号进行预编码的过程可以视为频域预编码的过程。The delay vector can be a vector of length N. Wherein, N may represent the number of frequency domain units used to carry the reference signal, and N>1 and is an integer. For a delay vector of length N, it includes N frequency domain weights (or simply, weights), and the N weights can be used to perform phase rotation on N frequency domain units, respectively. By precoding the reference signals carried on the N frequency domain units, the frequency selection characteristics caused by the multipath delay can be precompensated. Therefore, the process of precoding the reference signal based on the delay vector can be regarded as the process of frequency domain precoding.
基于不同的时延向量对参考信号进行预编码,就相当于基于不同的时延向量对信道各个频域单元进行相位旋转。且,同一个频域单元相位旋转的角度可以不同。Precoding the reference signal based on different delay vectors is equivalent to performing phase rotation on each frequency domain unit of the channel based on different delay vectors. Moreover, the angle of phase rotation of the same frequency domain unit can be different.
可选地,时延向量是DFT向量。DFT向量可以是DFT矩阵中的向量。Optionally, the delay vector is a DFT vector. The DFT vector may be a vector in the DFT matrix.
例如,时延向量可以表示为b k
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000006
其中,k=1,2,……,K;K可以表示时延向量的个数;f 1,f 2,……,f N分别表示第1个、第2个至第N个频域单元的载波频率。
For example, the delay vector can be expressed as b k ,
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000006
Among them, k = 1, 2, ..., K; K can represent the number of delay vectors; f 1 , f 2 , ..., f N respectively represent the first, second to Nth frequency domain unit The carrier frequency.
可选地,时延向量是DFT向量的共轭转置向量。DFT共轭转置向量可以是指DFT矩阵的共轭转置矩阵中的列向量。Optionally, the delay vector is a conjugate transpose vector of the DFT vector. The DFT conjugate transpose vector may refer to the column vector in the conjugate transpose matrix of the DFT matrix.
可选地,时延向量是过采样DFT向量。过采样DFT向量可以是指过采样DFT矩阵中 的向量。Optionally, the delay vector is an oversampled DFT vector. The oversampled DFT vector may refer to the vector in the oversampled DFT matrix.
应理解,上文对时延向量的具体形式的举例仅为示例,不应对本申请构成任何限定。例如,时延向量也可以取自DFT矩阵。本申请对于时延向量的具体形式不作限定。It should be understood that the above examples of the specific form of the delay vector are only examples, and should not constitute any limitation to the application. For example, the delay vector can also be taken from the DFT matrix. This application does not limit the specific form of the delay vector.
还应理解,时延向量是本申请提出的用于表示时延的一种形式。时延向量仅为便于与角度向量区分而命名,而不应对本申请构成任何限定。本申请并不排除在未来的协议中定义其他名称来表示相同或相似含义的可能。It should also be understood that the delay vector is a form of time delay proposed in this application. The delay vector is only named for the convenience of distinguishing from the angle vector, and should not constitute any limitation in this application. This application does not exclude the possibility of defining other names in future agreements to represent the same or similar meanings.
在下行传输中,基于时延向量对参考信号进行预编码后,预编码后的参考信号可以通过下行信道传输至终端设备,因此,终端设备根据接收到的预编码参考信号测量的信道等效于加载了时延向量的信道。换言之,将时延向量加载到参考信号上,也即,将时延向量加载到信道上。具体来说,该时延向量中的多个权值分别加载到信道的多个频域单元上,每个权值加载到一个频域单元。In downlink transmission, after the reference signal is precoded based on the delay vector, the precoded reference signal can be transmitted to the terminal device through the downlink channel. Therefore, the channel measured by the terminal device according to the received precoding reference signal is equivalent to The channel with the delay vector loaded. In other words, the delay vector is loaded on the reference signal, that is, the delay vector is loaded on the channel. Specifically, multiple weights in the delay vector are respectively loaded on multiple frequency domain units of the channel, and each weight is loaded on a frequency domain unit.
以频域单元为资源块(resource block,RB)为例,若基于长度为N的时延向量对参考信号进行预编码,则可以将该时延向量中的N个权值分别加载到承载于N个RB的参考信号上,也就是将时延向量中的N个元素分别加载到N个RB上。将时延向量b k中的第n个元素加载到第n个RB上的信道V n上,例如可以表示为
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000007
Taking the frequency domain unit as a resource block (resource block, RB) as an example, if the reference signal is pre-coded based on a delay vector of length N, the N weights in the delay vector can be loaded into the load on the On the reference signal of the N RBs, that is, the N elements in the delay vector are respectively loaded on the N RBs. Load the nth element in the delay vector b k onto the channel V n on the nth RB, for example, it can be expressed as
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000007
应理解,基于时延向量对参考信号进行预编码,与空域预编码的处理方式相似,只是将空域向量(或者说,角度向量)换成了时延向量。It should be understood that precoding the reference signal based on the delay vector is similar to the processing method of spatial precoding, except that the spatial vector (or angle vector) is replaced with a delay vector.
需要说明的是,基于时延向量对参考信号进行频域预编码可以是在资源映射之前执行,也可以是在资源映射之后执行,本申请对此不作限定。It should be noted that the frequency domain precoding of the reference signal based on the delay vector may be performed before or after the resource mapping, which is not limited in this application.
为便于理解,下面结合图2详细说明基于时延向量b k对参考信号进行预编码的过程。 For ease of understanding, the process of precoding the reference signal based on the delay vector b k will be described in detail below in conjunction with FIG. 2.
图2示出了基于时延向量b k对N个RB上承载的参考信号进行预编码的示意图。该N个RB例如可以包括RB#1、RB#2至RB#N。图中每个方格表示一个RB。图中虽未示出,但可以理解,图中的每个RB可以包括一个或多个用于承载参考信号的资源粒子(resource element,RE)。 Fig. 2 shows a schematic diagram of precoding the reference signals carried on N RBs based on the delay vector bk. The N RBs may include RB#1, RB#2 to RB#N, for example. Each square in the figure represents an RB. Although not shown in the figure, it can be understood that each RB in the figure may include one or more resource elements (RE) for carrying reference signals.
若将该时延向量b k加载到N个RB上,可以对N个RB分别进行相应的相位旋转。该时延向量中的N个权值可以与该N个RB一一对应。例如,该频域向量b k中的元素
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000008
可以加载在RB#1上,该时延向量b k中的元素
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000009
可以加载在RB#2上,时延向量b k中的元素
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000010
可以加载在RB#N上。以此类推,时延向量b k中的第n个元素
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000011
可以加载在RB#n上。为了简洁,这里不一一列举。
If the delay vector b k is loaded on N RBs, corresponding phase rotations can be performed on the N RBs respectively. The N weights in the delay vector may correspond to the N RBs in a one-to-one correspondence. For example, the elements in the frequency domain vector b k
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000008
Can be loaded on RB#1, the elements in the delay vector b k
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000009
Can be loaded on RB#2, the elements in the delay vector b k
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000010
Can be loaded on RB#N. By analogy, the nth element in the delay vector b k
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000011
Can be loaded on RB#n. For the sake of brevity, I will not list them all here.
应理解,图2仅为示例,示出了将时延向量b k加载到N个RB的一例。但这不应对本申请构成任何限定。图2中的N个用于承载参考信号的RB可以是连续的N个RB,也可以是不连续的N个RB,本申请对此不作限定。 It should be understood that FIG. 2 is only an example, and shows an example of loading the delay vector b k to N RBs. But this should not constitute any limitation to this application. The N RBs used to carry the reference signal in FIG. 2 may be consecutive N RBs or discontinuous N RBs, which is not limited in this application.
还应理解,上文仅为便于理解,以一个时延向量为例来说明时延向量中的权值与频域单元的对应关系,但这不应对本申请构成任何限定。网络设备可以将更多个时延向量加载到上述N个RB上。It should also be understood that the foregoing is only for ease of understanding, and a delay vector is taken as an example to illustrate the correspondence between weights in the delay vector and frequency domain units, but this should not constitute any limitation to the application. The network device can load more delay vectors on the above N RBs.
上文结合图2示出了RB为频域单元的一例。但应理解,本申请对于频域单元的具体定义不作限定。An example in which the RB is a frequency domain unit is shown above in conjunction with FIG. 2. However, it should be understood that this application does not limit the specific definition of the frequency domain unit.
频域单元例如可以是子带,也可以是RB,还可以是RB组(resource block group,RBG)、预编码资源块组(precoding resource block group,PRG)等。本申请对此不作限定。The frequency domain unit may be, for example, a subband, or RB, or RB group (resource block group, RBG), precoding resource block group (precoding resource block group, PRG), and so on. This application does not limit this.
可选地,每个频域单元为一个RB。时延向量中的每个元素可以加载到一个RB上。此情况下,时延向量的长度N可以等于宽带中的RB数。对于一个时延向量来说,其中的每个权值与一个RB对应。Optionally, each frequency domain unit is an RB. Each element in the delay vector can be loaded on one RB. In this case, the length N of the delay vector can be equal to the number of RBs in the broadband. For a delay vector, each weight in it corresponds to one RB.
可选地,每个频域单元为一个子带。时延向量中的每个元素可以加载到一个子带上。此情况下,时延向量的长度N可以等于宽带中的子带数。对于一个时延向量来说,其中的每个权值与一个子带对应。Optionally, each frequency domain unit is a subband. Each element in the delay vector can be loaded on a subband. In this case, the length N of the delay vector can be equal to the number of subbands in the broadband. For a delay vector, each weight in it corresponds to a subband.
4、参考信号(reference signal,RS):也可以称为导频(pilot)、参考序列等。在本申请实施例中,参考信号可以是用于信道测量的参考信号。例如,该参考信号可以是用于下行信道测量的信道状态信息参考信号(channel state information reference signal,CSI-RS),也可以是用于上行信道测量的SRS。应理解,上文列举的参考信号仅为示例,不应对本申请构成任何限定。本申请并不排除在未来的协议中定义其他参考信号以实现相同或相似功能的可能。4. Reference signal (RS): It can also be called a pilot (pilot), reference sequence, etc. In the embodiment of the present application, the reference signal may be a reference signal used for channel measurement. For example, the reference signal may be a channel state information reference signal (CSI-RS) used for downlink channel measurement, or it may be an SRS used for uplink channel measurement. It should be understood that the reference signals listed above are only examples, and should not constitute any limitation to this application. This application does not exclude the possibility of defining other reference signals in future agreements to achieve the same or similar functions.
在本申请实施例中,网络设备可以基于角度向量和时延向量对参考信号进行预编码,生成预编码后的参考信号,或简称预编码参考信号。基于角度向量和时延向量对参考信号进行预编码的过程,在上文中已经做了说明,为了简洁,这里不再重复。In the embodiment of the present application, the network device may precode the reference signal based on the angle vector and the delay vector to generate a precoded reference signal, or simply a precoded reference signal. The process of precoding the reference signal based on the angle vector and the delay vector has been described above, and for brevity, it will not be repeated here.
由于本申请中涉及到的参考信号均为经过了预编码的参考信号,后文中为方便说明,将预编码后的参考信号简称为参考信号。Since the reference signals involved in this application are all pre-coded reference signals, in the following for convenience of description, the pre-coded reference signals are simply referred to as reference signals.
5、端口(port):也可以称为天线端口(antenna port)。在本申请实施例中,端口可以包括发射天线端口、参考信号端口和接收端口。5. Port: It can also be called an antenna port. In the embodiment of the present application, the port may include a transmitting antenna port, a reference signal port, and a receiving port.
其中,发射天线端口,可以是指实际的独立发送单元(transceiver unit,TxRU)。例如在下行传输中,发射天线端口可以是指网络设备的TxRU。在本申请实施例中,字母T可用于表示发射天线端口数,T>1且为整数。Among them, the transmitting antenna port may refer to an actual independent transmitting unit (transceiver unit, TxRU). For example, in downlink transmission, the transmitting antenna port may refer to the TxRU of the network device. In the embodiment of the present application, the letter T can be used to indicate the number of transmitting antenna ports, and T>1 and is an integer.
参考信号端口可以是指与参考信号对应的端口。由于基于角度向量和时延向量对参考信号进行了预编码,该参考信号端口可以是指经过预编码后的参考信号的端口。例如,每个参考信号端口对应于一个角度向量和一个时延向量。在本申请实施例中,字母P可用于表示参考信号端口数,P≥1且为整数。The reference signal port may refer to a port corresponding to the reference signal. Since the reference signal is pre-coded based on the angle vector and the delay vector, the reference signal port may refer to the port of the pre-coded reference signal. For example, each reference signal port corresponds to an angle vector and a delay vector. In the embodiment of the present application, the letter P can be used to indicate the number of reference signal ports, and P≥1 and is an integer.
接收端口可以理解为接收设备的接收天线。例如在下行传输中,接收端口可以是指终端设备的接收天线。在本申请实施例中,字母R可用于表示接收端口数,R≥1且为整数。The receiving port can be understood as the receiving antenna of the receiving device. For example, in downlink transmission, the receiving port may refer to the receiving antenna of the terminal device. In the embodiment of the present application, the letter R can be used to indicate the number of receiving ports, and R≥1 and is an integer.
与接收端口相对应,发射天线端口和参考信号端口都可以称为发送端口。Corresponding to the receiving port, both the transmitting antenna port and the reference signal port can be referred to as the transmitting port.
6、参考信号的传输带宽:可以是指用于传输参考信号的带宽,该参考信号是用作信道测量的参考信号,如CSI-RS等。参考信号的传输带宽例如可以是下文中所述的针对某一终端设备发送的参考信号的资源的总带宽,如,针对某一终端设备发送的P个参考信号端口的预编码参考信号资源所占用的资源的总带宽。6. The transmission bandwidth of the reference signal: it can refer to the bandwidth used to transmit the reference signal, which is a reference signal used for channel measurement, such as CSI-RS. The transmission bandwidth of the reference signal may be, for example, the total bandwidth of the resource of the reference signal sent by a certain terminal device as described below, for example, the precoding reference signal resource occupied by the P reference signal ports sent by a certain terminal device The total bandwidth of the resource.
在一种可能的设计中,参考信号的传输带宽可以是CSI测量资源的频域占用带宽。该CSI测量资源的频域占用带宽例如可以由高层信令来配置,如CSI占用带宽范围(CSI-Frequency Occupation)。In a possible design, the transmission bandwidth of the reference signal may be the frequency domain occupied bandwidth of the CSI measurement resource. The frequency-domain occupied bandwidth of the CSI measurement resource may be configured by high-level signaling, such as CSI-Frequency Occupation (CSI-Frequency Occupation).
应理解,参考信号的传输带宽仅为便于描述而命名,不应对本申请构成任何限定。本申请并不排除采用其他命名来表达相同或相似含义的可能。It should be understood that the transmission bandwidth of the reference signal is named only for ease of description, and should not constitute any limitation in this application. This application does not exclude the possibility of using other names to express the same or similar meanings.
7、导频密度:同一参考信号端口的参考信号占用的资源粒子(resource element,RE) 与参考信号的传输带宽中频域单元数N的比值。例如,某一参考信号端口的参考信号的导频密度为1,可以表示,在这个参考信号端口的参考信号所占的带宽中,每个RB中都有一个RE用于承载这个参考信号端口的参考信号;又例如,某一参考信号端口的参考信号的导频密度为0.5,可以表示,在这个参考信号端口的参考信号所占的带宽中,每两个RB中有一个RB中包括承载这个参考信号端口的参考信号的RE,或者说,用于承载这个端口的参考信号的两个RB之间至少间隔了一个RB。7. Pilot density: the ratio of resource elements (resource elements, RE) occupied by reference signals of the same reference signal port to the number of frequency domain units N in the transmission bandwidth of the reference signal. For example, the pilot density of the reference signal of a certain reference signal port is 1, which can indicate that in the bandwidth occupied by the reference signal of this reference signal port, each RB has an RE used to carry the reference signal port. Reference signal; for another example, the pilot density of the reference signal of a certain reference signal port is 0.5, which can indicate that in the bandwidth occupied by the reference signal of this reference signal port, one of every two RBs includes this The RE of the reference signal of the reference signal port, or in other words, there is at least one RB between two RBs used to carry the reference signal of this port.
在本申请实施例中,导频密度可以为小于或等于1的值。可选地,导频密度为1或0.5。In the embodiment of the present application, the pilot density may be a value less than or equal to 1. Optionally, the pilot density is 1 or 0.5.
8、空频矩阵:可以理解为是频域上的信道矩阵,可用于确定预编码矩阵。8. Space-frequency matrix: It can be understood as a channel matrix in the frequency domain, which can be used to determine the precoding matrix.
在本申请实施例中,空频矩阵可用于确定各频域单元的下行信道矩阵,进而可以确定与各频域单元对应的预编码矩阵。与某一频域单元对应的信道矩阵例如可以是由各个接收端口对应的空频矩阵中对应于同一频域单元的列向量构造而成的矩阵的共轭转置。如,将各接收端口对应的空频矩阵中的第n个列向量抽取出来,按照接收端口的顺序由左向右排布可得到维度为T×R的矩阵,R表示接收端口数,R≥1且为整数。该矩阵经过共轭转置后可以得到第n个频域单元的信道矩阵V nIn the embodiment of the present application, the space-frequency matrix can be used to determine the downlink channel matrix of each frequency domain unit, and then the precoding matrix corresponding to each frequency domain unit can be determined. The channel matrix corresponding to a certain frequency domain unit may be, for example, a conjugate transpose of a matrix constructed from column vectors corresponding to the same frequency domain unit in the space frequency matrix corresponding to each receiving port. For example, extracting the nth column vector in the space-frequency matrix corresponding to each receiving port, and arranging it from left to right according to the order of the receiving ports, a matrix of dimension T×R can be obtained. R represents the number of receiving ports, R≥ 1 and is an integer. After the matrix is conjugate transposed, the channel matrix V n of the nth frequency domain unit can be obtained.
第n个频域单元的信道矩阵V n可用于确定第n个频域单元的预编码矩阵,例如,对信道矩阵V n做奇异值分解(singular value decomposition,SVD),可以得到预编码矩阵的共轭转置。或者,将信道矩阵V n的共轭转置进行SVD,可以得到预编码矩阵。 The channel matrix V n of the nth frequency domain unit can be used to determine the precoding matrix of the nth frequency domain unit. For example, the channel matrix V n is subjected to singular value decomposition (SVD) to obtain the Conjugate transpose. Or, performing SVD on the conjugate transpose of the channel matrix V n to obtain the precoding matrix.
应理解,上文所描述的由空频矩阵确定信道矩阵,进而确定预编码矩阵的方法仅为本申请所提供的一种可能的实现方式,不应对本申请构成任何限定。It should be understood that the method of determining the channel matrix from the space-frequency matrix and then determining the precoding matrix described above is only a possible implementation provided by this application, and should not constitute any limitation to this application.
还应理解,空频矩阵是用于确定预编码矩阵的中间量。在上述确定预编码矩阵的过程中,为了方便理解和描述而引入空频矩阵的概念,但这并不代表该空频矩阵一定会生成。本领域的技术人员基于相同的构思,通过不同的算法可以得到例如向量或者有序数组等不同的形式来替代空频矩阵,从而确定预编码矩阵。本申请对此不做限定。It should also be understood that the space-frequency matrix is an intermediate quantity used to determine the precoding matrix. In the above process of determining the precoding matrix, the concept of the space-frequency matrix is introduced for the convenience of understanding and description, but this does not mean that the space-frequency matrix will be generated. Based on the same concept, those skilled in the art can obtain different forms such as vectors or ordered arrays through different algorithms to replace the space-frequency matrix, thereby determining the precoding matrix. This application does not limit this.
空频矩阵可以记为H,空频矩阵可以满足:H=FCS H。其中,F可以表示由一个或多个时延向量构建的矩阵,S可以表示由一个或多个角度向量构建的矩阵,C可以表示与每个角度向量和每个时延向量对应的加权系数构建的矩阵。 The space-frequency matrix can be denoted as H, and the space-frequency matrix can satisfy: H=FCS H. Among them, F can represent a matrix constructed from one or more delay vectors, S can represent a matrix constructed from one or more angle vectors, and C can represent a weighting coefficient construction corresponding to each angle vector and each delay vector Of the matrix.
在本申请实施例中,为方便理解和说明,将一个或多个时延向量构建的矩阵F记为频域权值矩阵,将一个或多个角度向量构建的矩阵S记为空域权值矩阵,将与每个角度向量和每个时延向量对应的加权系数构建的矩阵C记为系数矩阵。In the embodiments of the present application, for ease of understanding and explanation, the matrix F constructed by one or more delay vectors is recorded as a frequency domain weight matrix, and the matrix S constructed by one or more angle vectors is recorded as a spatial weight matrix , The matrix C constructed by the weighting coefficient corresponding to each angle vector and each delay vector is recorded as the coefficient matrix.
其中,系数矩阵C例如可以是K×K的对角阵,例如可以表示为
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000012
频域权值矩阵F例如可以是维度为N×K的矩阵,例如可以表示为[b 1 ... b K]。空域权值矩阵S例如可以是维度为T×K的矩阵,例如可以表示为[a 1 ... a K]。因此,空频矩阵可以满足:
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000013
Among them, the coefficient matrix C can be a K×K diagonal matrix, for example, it can be expressed as
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000012
The frequency domain weight matrix F may be, for example, a matrix with a dimension of N×K, for example, it may be expressed as [b 1 ... b K ]. The spatial weight matrix S may be, for example, a matrix with a dimension of T×K, for example, it may be expressed as [a 1 ... a K ]. Therefore, the space frequency matrix can satisfy:
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000013
可以看到,系数矩阵C中的每个加权系数对应于频域权值矩阵F中的一个时延向量和空域权值矩阵S中的一个角度向量。例如,对于1至K中的任意一个整数值k,系数矩阵C中的第k行第k列的元素c k,k是对应于频域权值矩阵F中的第k个时延向量和空域权值矩阵S中的第k个角度向量的加权系数。 It can be seen that each weighting coefficient in the coefficient matrix C corresponds to a delay vector in the frequency domain weight matrix F and an angle vector in the spatial domain weight matrix S. For example, for any integer value k from 1 to K, the element c k,k in the kth row and kth column of the coefficient matrix C corresponds to the kth delay vector and the spatial domain in the frequency domain weight matrix F The weighting coefficient of the k-th angle vector in the weight matrix S.
该频域权值矩阵F中的第k个时延向量和空域权值矩阵S中的第k个角度向量可以组合得到一个角度时延对,或者称,空频向量对,空频对,等。故,由频域权值矩阵中的K个时延向量和空域权值矩阵中的K个角度向量,可以组合得到K个角度时延对,每个角度时延对包含一个角度向量和一个时延向量。该K个角度时延对可以与系数矩阵C中的K个加权系数一一对应。如,该系数矩阵C中的加权系数c k,k可以对应于该第k个时延向量和第k个角度向量组合的角度时延对,即,第k个角度时延对。 The k-th delay vector in the frequency-domain weight matrix F and the k-th angle vector in the spatial weight matrix S can be combined to obtain an angle-delay pair, or space-frequency vector pair, space-frequency pair, etc. . Therefore, from the K delay vectors in the frequency domain weight matrix and the K angle vectors in the spatial weight matrix, K angle delay pairs can be combined, and each angle delay pair contains an angle vector and a time delay. Extension vector. The K angle delay pairs may correspond to the K weighting coefficients in the coefficient matrix C in a one-to-one correspondence. For example, the weighting coefficient c k, k in the coefficient matrix C may correspond to the angle delay pair of the k-th delay vector and the k-th angle vector, that is, the k-th angle delay pair.
上述K个角度时延对是互不相同的。任意两个角度时延对所包含的角度向量不同,和/或,任意两个角度时延对所包含的时延向量不同。或者说,任意两个角度时延对至少存在以下至少一项不同:角度向量和时延向量。因此,可以理解,频域权值矩阵F中的K个时延向量中可能存在一个或多个重复的时延向量,空域权值矩阵S中的K个角度向量中也可能存在一个或多个重复的角度向量,本申请对此不做限定,只要所组合得到的K个角度时延对之间互不相同即可。换言之,上述K个角度时延对可以是由一个或多个互不相同的角度向量和一个或多个互不相同时延向量组合得到的。上文中时延向量b 1至b 4以及角度向量a 1至a 4中的下角标1至K仅为便于区分对应于不同角度时延对的时延向量和角度向量,与向量中的时延或角度无关。 The above K angle delay pairs are different from each other. Any two angle delay pairs include different angle vectors, and/or any two angle delay pairs include different delay vectors. In other words, any two angle delay pairs are different at least in at least one of the following: the angle vector and the delay vector. Therefore, it can be understood that there may be one or more repeated delay vectors in the K delay vectors in the frequency domain weight matrix F, and there may also be one or more in the K angle vectors in the spatial weight matrix S. The repeated angle vectors are not limited in this application, as long as the K angle delay pairs obtained by the combination are different from each other. In other words, the above K angle delay pairs may be obtained by combining one or more mutually different angle vectors and one or more mutually different delay vectors. The subscripts 1 to K in the above delay vectors b 1 to b 4 and the angle vectors a 1 to a 4 are only convenient for distinguishing the delay vector and the angle vector corresponding to different angle delay pairs, and the delay vector in the vector Or the angle has nothing to do.
应理解,上文列举的频域权值矩阵F、空域权值矩阵S以及系数矩阵C仅为便于理解而示例。比如,系数矩阵C也可以不以对角阵的形式来表示。系数矩阵C例如可以表示为维度L×M的矩阵,L表示时延向量的个数,M表示角度向量的个数,L、M均为正整数;频域权值矩阵F则可以表示为N×L的矩阵;空域权值矩阵S则可以表示为T×M的矩阵。对于1至L中的任意一个整数值l和1至M中的任意一个整数值m,该系数矩阵C中的第l行第m列的元素c l,m可对应于L个时延向量中的第l个时延向量和M个角度向量中的第m个角度向量,也即与该第l个时延向量和第m个角度向量对应的加权系数。 It should be understood that the frequency domain weight matrix F, the spatial domain weight matrix S, and the coefficient matrix C listed above are only examples for ease of understanding. For example, the coefficient matrix C may not be expressed in the form of a diagonal matrix. The coefficient matrix C can be expressed as a matrix of dimension L×M, L represents the number of delay vectors, M represents the number of angle vectors, L and M are both positive integers; the frequency domain weight matrix F can be expressed as N ×L matrix; the spatial weight matrix S can be expressed as a T×M matrix. For any integer value l from 1 to L and any integer value m from 1 to M, the element c l,m in the lth row and mth column of the coefficient matrix C can correspond to the L delay vectors The m-th angle vector in the l-th delay vector and the M-th angle vector is the weighting coefficient corresponding to the l-th delay vector and the m-th angle vector.
若将系数矩阵C表示为
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000014
频域权值矩阵F表示为[b 1 ... b L],空域权值矩阵S表示为[a 1 ... a M],则上述空频矩阵H可以满足:
If the coefficient matrix C is expressed as
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000014
The frequency-domain weight matrix F is expressed as [b 1 ... b L ], and the spatial-domain weight matrix S is expressed as [a 1 ... a M ], then the above-mentioned space-frequency matrix H can satisfy:
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000015
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000015
可以理解,上述频域权值矩阵F中的L个时延向量是互不相同的,上述角度加权矩阵S中的M个角度向量也是互不相同的,由该L个时延向量和M个角度向量可以组合得到L×M个角度时延对。It can be understood that the L delay vectors in the frequency domain weight matrix F are different from each other, and the M angle vectors in the angle weight matrix S are also different from each other. The angle vectors can be combined to obtain L×M angle delay pairs.
应理解,上述频域权值矩阵、空域权值矩阵以及系数矩阵的具体形式仅为便于理解而示例,不应对本申请构成任何限定。本领域的技术人员基于相同的构思,可以对上文列举 的频域权值矩阵、空域权值矩阵以及系数矩阵做出数学变换或等价替换,例如将矩阵变换为向量,或,将矩阵变换为有序数组,等等。这些数学变换或等价替换对于本申请所提供的方法所适用的范围并不构成影响,因此均应落入本申请的保护范围内。It should be understood that the specific forms of the frequency domain weight matrix, the spatial domain weight matrix, and the coefficient matrix are only examples for ease of understanding, and should not constitute any limitation to the application. Based on the same concept, those skilled in the art can make mathematical transformations or equivalent replacements for the frequency domain weight matrix, spatial domain weight matrix and coefficient matrix listed above, such as transforming a matrix into a vector, or transforming a matrix As an ordered array, etc. These mathematical transformations or equivalent substitutions do not affect the scope of application of the method provided in this application, and therefore should fall within the scope of protection of this application.
还应理解,本领域的技术人员基于相同的构思,可以对上文列举的空频矩阵与频域权值矩阵、空域权值矩阵和系数矩阵的关系进行数学变换或等价替换。例如,在另一种定义方式中,空频矩阵可以满足:H=SCF H,等等。这些数学变换或等价替换对于本申请所提供的方法所适用的范围并不构成影响,因此均应落入本申请的保护范围内。 It should also be understood that based on the same concept, those skilled in the art can perform mathematical transformations or equivalent replacements on the relationships between the space-frequency matrix and the frequency-domain weight matrix, the space-domain weight matrix, and the coefficient matrix listed above. For example, in another definition method, the space-frequency matrix can satisfy: H=SCF H , and so on. These mathematical transformations or equivalent substitutions do not affect the scope of application of the method provided in this application, and therefore should fall within the scope of protection of this application.
由上文空频矩阵所满足的关系式可知,空频矩阵可以由一个或多个角度时延对的加权和确定。例如,若空频矩阵H满足H=FCS H,则该空频矩阵H的维度可以是N×T;若空频矩阵H满足H=SCF H,则该空频矩阵H的维度可以是T×N。 From the relational expression satisfied by the space-frequency matrix above, the space-frequency matrix can be determined by the weighted sum of one or more angle delay pairs. For example, if the space-frequency matrix H satisfies H=FCS H , the dimension of the space-frequency matrix H can be N×T; if the space-frequency matrix H satisfies H=SCF H , the dimension of the space-frequency matrix H can be T× N.
结合上文所述可知,网络设备可以预先将多个角度时延对加载到参考信号上,或者说,基于多个角度时延对对参考信号进行预编码。参考信号经由下行信道被传输至终端设备后,终端设备可以基于接收到的参考信号进行信道估计,并将基于同一个频域单元上接收到的对应于同一个角度时延对的参考信号所确定的信道估计值进行全带累加,以得到与该角度时延对对应的加权系数。终端设备可以将上述多个角度时延对分别对应的加权系数反馈给网络设备,以便于网络设备重构下行信道,进而确定出与下行信道相适配的预编码矩阵。In combination with the foregoing, it can be known that the network device may pre-load multiple angle delay pairs on the reference signal, or in other words, precode the reference signal based on the multiple angle delay pairs. After the reference signal is transmitted to the terminal device via the downlink channel, the terminal device can perform channel estimation based on the received reference signal, and determine it based on the reference signal received on the same frequency domain unit corresponding to the same angle delay pair Perform full-band accumulation of the channel estimation value to obtain the weighting coefficient corresponding to the angle delay pair. The terminal device may feed back the weighting coefficients corresponding to the multiple angle delay pairs to the network device, so that the network device can reconstruct the downlink channel, and then determine the precoding matrix adapted to the downlink channel.
图3示出了将一个角度时延对加载到N个RB上之后,确定与该角度时延对对应的加权系数的过程。如图所示,网络设备可以基于上述K个角度时延对中的第k个角度时延对对参考信号进行预编码,即,将第k个角度时延对中的角度向量a k和时延向量b k分别加载到图3中所示的N个RB上,则可以对该N个RB上接收到的参考信号分别进行信道估计得到N个估计值,第n个RB上的估计值记为
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000016
则可以得到与该第k个角度时延对对应的加权系数为
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000017
Fig. 3 shows the process of determining the weighting coefficient corresponding to the angle delay pair after loading the angle delay pair on N RBs. As shown in the figure, the network device can pre-encode the reference signal based on the k-th angle delay in the above K angle-delay pairs, that is, the angle vector a k in the k-th angle delay pair and the time The delay vector b k is respectively loaded on the N RBs shown in Fig. 3, and then channel estimation can be performed on the reference signals received on the N RBs to obtain N estimated values. The estimated value on the nth RB is recorded for
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000016
Then the weighting coefficient corresponding to the k-th angle delay pair can be obtained as
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000017
由于网络设备对每个终端设备单独进行参考信号的预编码和发送,导频开销将随终端设备数量的增长而线性增长。若小区中终端设备数量很多,导频开销将变得难以接受。Since the network equipment separately pre-encodes and transmits the reference signal for each terminal equipment, the pilot overhead will increase linearly with the increase in the number of terminal equipment. If the number of terminal devices in the cell is large, the pilot overhead will become unacceptable.
有鉴于此,本申请提供一种信道测量方法,以期减小导频开销。In view of this, this application provides a channel measurement method in order to reduce pilot overhead.
下面将结合附图详细说明本申请实施例提供的信道测量方法。In the following, the channel measurement method provided by the embodiment of the present application will be described in detail with reference to the accompanying drawings.
应理解,下文仅为便于理解和说明,以网络设备与终端设备之间的交互为例详细说明本申请实施例所提供的方法。但这不应对本申请提供的方法的执行主体构成任何限定。例如,下文实施例示出的终端设备可以替换为配置于终端设备中的部件(如电路、芯片、芯片系统或其他能够调用程序并执行程序的功能模块等);下文实施例示出的网络设备可以替换为配置与网络设备中的部件(如电路、芯片、芯片系统或其他能够调用程序并执行程序的功能模块等)。只要能够通过运行记录有本申请实施例的提供的方法的代码的程序,以根据本申请实施例提供的方法实现信道测量即可。It should be understood that the following is only for ease of understanding and description, and the interaction between the network device and the terminal device is taken as an example to describe in detail the method provided in the embodiment of the present application. However, this should not constitute any limitation on the execution subject of the method provided in this application. For example, the terminal device shown in the following embodiments can be replaced with components configured in the terminal device (such as circuits, chips, chip systems, or other functional modules that can call and execute programs, etc.); the network devices shown in the following embodiments can be replaced For configuration and network equipment components (such as circuits, chips, chip systems or other functional modules that can call and execute programs, etc.). As long as the program recording the code of the method provided in the embodiment of the present application can be used to implement the channel measurement according to the method provided in the embodiment of the present application.
为避免混淆,作出如下定义:K个角度时延对包含的K个时延向量用于构建频域权值矩阵F,所构建的频域权值矩阵F的维度为N×K;K个角度时延对包含的K个角度向量用于构建空域权值矩阵S,所构建的空域权值矩阵S的维度为T×K。频域单元为RB。参考信号资源包含的RB数为N个。In order to avoid confusion, the following definition is made: K angle delay pairs included K delay vectors are used to construct the frequency domain weight matrix F, and the dimension of the frequency domain weight matrix F is N×K; K angles The K angle vectors included in the delay pair are used to construct the spatial weight matrix S, and the dimension of the constructed spatial weight matrix S is T×K. The frequency domain unit is RB. The number of RBs included in the reference signal resource is N.
此外,为便于理解和说明,下文实施例中均以一个极化方向上的发射天线和一个接收 天线端口为例,说明了本申请实施例提供的信道测量方法。但应理解,以一个接收端口为例,说明了本申请实施例提供的信道测量方法。可以理解,下文实施例中对于网络设备的发射天线的极化方向未做限定,对于终端设备的接收天线端口数也未做限定。In addition, for ease of understanding and description, the following embodiments all use a transmitting antenna and a receiving antenna port in a polarization direction as examples to illustrate the channel measurement method provided in the embodiments of the present application. However, it should be understood that a receiving port is taken as an example to illustrate the channel measurement method provided in the embodiment of the present application. It can be understood that, in the following embodiments, the polarization direction of the transmitting antenna of the network device is not limited, and the number of receiving antenna ports of the terminal device is also not limited.
若网络设备的发射天线为多个极化方向,比如双极化天线,则角度向量仍然可以是长度为T的向量。网络设备可以通过两个极化方向的发射天线发送对应于同一角度时延对的预编码参考信号。满足H=FCS H的空频矩阵可以表示为N×2T维的矩阵,满足H=SCF H的空频矩阵可以表示为2T×N维的矩阵,等等。 If the transmitting antenna of the network device has multiple polarization directions, such as a dual-polarization antenna, the angle vector can still be a vector of length T. The network device may transmit the precoding reference signal corresponding to the same angle delay pair through the transmitting antennas in the two polarization directions. The space-frequency matrix satisfying H=FCS H can be expressed as an N×2T-dimensional matrix, and the space-frequency matrix satisfying H=SCF H can be expressed as a 2T×N-dimensional matrix, and so on.
若终端设备的接收天线端口为多个,终端设备可以基于下文所述相同的方法进行测量和反馈。例如,下文实施例中终端设备生成的第一指示信息可用于指示R组加权系数,每组加权系数包括对应于K个角度时延对的K个加权系数。If the terminal device has multiple receiving antenna ports, the terminal device can perform measurement and feedback based on the same method described below. For example, the first indication information generated by the terminal device in the following embodiment may be used to indicate R groups of weighting coefficients, and each group of weighting coefficients includes K weighting coefficients corresponding to K angle delay pairs.
图4是本申请实施例提供的信道测量方法400的示意性流程图。如图4所示,该方法400可以包括步骤410至步骤450。下面将结合附图详细说明方法400中的各个步骤。FIG. 4 is a schematic flowchart of a channel measurement method 400 provided by an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 4, the method 400 may include step 410 to step 450. Hereinafter, each step in the method 400 will be described in detail with reference to the accompanying drawings.
在步骤410中,网络设备生成预编码参考信号。In step 410, the network device generates a precoding reference signal.
网络设备可以基于K个角度时延对,对参考信号进行预编码,以得到预编码参考信号。如前所述,该K个角度时延对包括一个或多个角度向量以及一个或多个时延向量。关于角度时延对和角度向量、时延向量的关系在上文中已经详细说明,为了简洁,这里不再重复。The network device may pre-encode the reference signal based on the K angle delay pairs to obtain the pre-encoded reference signal. As mentioned above, the K angle delay pairs include one or more angle vectors and one or more delay vectors. The relationship between the angle delay pair and the angle vector and the delay vector has been described in detail above, and for the sake of brevity, it will not be repeated here.
上述一个或多个角度向量以及一个或多个时延向量可以是基于上下行信道的互易性,由网络设备基于上行信道测量确定的较强的一个或多个角度向量和较强的一个或多时延向量。例如,网络设备可以通过对上行信道进行空域和频域的DFT确定,也可以利用现有的估计算法,如角度和时延联合估计(joint angle and delay estimation,JADE)算法等确定。本申请对此不作限定。The above-mentioned one or more angle vectors and one or more delay vectors may be based on the reciprocity of the uplink and downlink channels, and the stronger one or more angle vectors and the stronger one or more are determined by the network equipment based on the uplink channel measurement. Multi-delay vector. For example, the network device can determine the uplink channel by DFT in the space domain and the frequency domain, or use existing estimation algorithms, such as joint angle and delay estimation (JADE) algorithms. This application does not limit this.
上述一个或多个角度向量以及一个或多个时延向量也可以是由网络设备基于此前的一次或多次下行信道测量的反馈结果进行统计确定的。本申请对此不作限定。The aforementioned one or more angle vectors and one or more delay vectors may also be statistically determined by the network device based on feedback results of one or more previous downlink channel measurements. This application does not limit this.
在本申请实施例中,为了减小导频开销,网络设备可以将每个角度时延对所加载的RB数量减少。比如,将每个时延向量加载到N个RB中的一部分RB上,使得加载了同一个角度时延对的参考信号的RB在N个RB中离散分布。也就是,每个角度时延对对应的RB为N个RB中的部分RB。In the embodiment of the present application, in order to reduce the pilot overhead, the network device may reduce the delay of each angle to the number of loaded RBs. For example, each delay vector is loaded on a part of the N RBs, so that the RBs loaded with the reference signal of the same angle delay pair are discretely distributed among the N RBs. That is, the RB corresponding to each angular delay pair is a part of the N RBs.
作为一个实施例,网络设备可以为每个终端设备配置P个参考信号端口,每个参考信号端口对应Q个角度时延对,也即,网络设备为每个终端设备配置的参考信号可以是加载了共P×Q个角度时延对的预编码参考信号。换言之,每个终端设备所接收到的预编码参考信号与P个参考信号端口对应,由于每个参考信号端口与Q个角度时延对对应,也即,网络设备针对每个终端设备生成的预编码参考信号可以对应于P×Q个角度时延对。若将针对每个终端设备生成的预编码参考信号对应的角度时延对的数量记为K,则K=P×Q。As an embodiment, the network device may configure P reference signal ports for each terminal device, and each reference signal port corresponds to Q angle delay pairs, that is, the reference signal configured by the network device for each terminal device may be a load A precoding reference signal with a total of P×Q angle delay pairs is obtained. In other words, the precoding reference signal received by each terminal device corresponds to P reference signal ports. Since each reference signal port corresponds to Q angle delay pairs, that is, the network device generates a precoding reference signal for each terminal device. The coded reference signal may correspond to P×Q angle delay pairs. If the number of angle delay pairs corresponding to the precoding reference signal generated for each terminal device is denoted as K, then K=P×Q.
对于每个参考信号端口来说,Q个角度时延对中包含的Q个角度向量中的每个角度向量包括多个空域权值,该Q个角度向量可以作为Q个空域权值向量,用于轮流地对N个RB上的参考信号做预编码。也即,将与一个参考信号端口对应的Q个角度向量用来对N个RB进行预编码轮询。For each reference signal port, each of the Q angle vectors included in the Q angle delay pairs includes multiple spatial weights, and the Q angle vectors can be used as Q spatial weight vectors. In turn, the reference signals on the N RBs are pre-coded. That is, Q angle vectors corresponding to one reference signal port are used to perform precoding polling on N RBs.
对于每个参考信号端口来说,Q个角度时延对中包含的Q个时延向量用于确定N个 频域权值,该N个频域权值可以与N个RB对应,以用于对承载于N个RB上的参考信号做预编码。也即,从与一个参考信号端口对应的Q个时延向量中确定N个频域权值。该N个频域权值可以是从Q个时延向量中抽取出来的。For each reference signal port, the Q delay vectors included in the Q angle delay pairs are used to determine N frequency domain weights, and the N frequency domain weights can correspond to the N RBs for Precoding the reference signals carried on N RBs. That is, N frequency domain weights are determined from Q delay vectors corresponding to one reference signal port. The N frequency domain weights may be extracted from Q delay vectors.
为了便于理解,下面结合图5和图6来说明与一个参考信号端口对应的Q个角度时延对。假设该参考信号端口为P个参考信号端口中的第p个参考信号端口,p为1至P中的任意整数值。图5和图6中示出的预编码参考信号承载在18个RB上,每个参考信号端口对应4个角度时延对。其中,N=18、Q=4。该18个RB可以包括RB#1至RB#18。For ease of understanding, the following describes Q angle delay pairs corresponding to one reference signal port in conjunction with FIG. 5 and FIG. 6. Assume that the reference signal port is the p-th reference signal port among the P reference signal ports, and p is any integer value from 1 to P. The precoding reference signals shown in FIG. 5 and FIG. 6 are carried on 18 RBs, and each reference signal port corresponds to 4 angle delay pairs. Among them, N=18 and Q=4. The 18 RBs may include RB#1 to RB#18.
图5示出了导频密度D为1的一例。导频密度为1,表示每个RB中都有一个RE用于承载同一参考信号端口的参考信号。图中虽未示出每个RB中的RE,但可以理解,图中RB#1至RB#18中的每个RB中都有一个RE用于承载同一个参考信号端口的预编码参考信号。由于每个参考信号端口可以对应于Q个角度时延对,对应于同一个参考信号端口的连续Q个RB可以与Q个不同的角度时延对对应,即对应于同一个参考信号端口的每连续Q个RB可以分别与Q个不同的角度时延对对应。故在图5中,对应于同一个参考信号端口的每连续4个RB可以分别与4个不同的角度时延对对应。Fig. 5 shows an example where the pilot density D is 1. The pilot density is 1, which means that each RB has an RE used to carry the reference signal of the same reference signal port. Although the RE in each RB is not shown in the figure, it can be understood that each RB in RB#1 to RB#18 in the figure has an RE for carrying the precoding reference signal of the same reference signal port. Since each reference signal port can correspond to Q angle delay pairs, consecutive Q RBs corresponding to the same reference signal port can correspond to Q different angle delay pairs, that is, each reference signal port corresponds to each reference signal port. The consecutive Q RBs may respectively correspond to Q different angle delay pairs. Therefore, in FIG. 5, every 4 consecutive RBs corresponding to the same reference signal port may correspond to 4 different angle delay pairs.
假设图中所示对应于同一个参考信号端口的4个角度时延对包括(a 1,b 1)、(a 2,b 2)、(a 3,b 3)、(a 4,b 4)。则RB#1、RB#5、RB#9、RB#13、RB#17可对应于同一个角度时延对(a 1,b 1),RB#2、RB#6、RB#10、RB#14、RB#18可对应于同一个角度时延对(a 2,b 2),RB#3、RB#7、RB#11、RB#15可对应于同一个角度时延对(a 3,b 3),RB#4、RB#8、RB#12、RB#16可对应于同一个角度时延对(a 4,b 4)。可以看到,图5中每个角度时延对所对应的RB之间的最小间隔为3个RB。可以看到,每个角度时延对所对应的RB数不超过
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000018
个。如在图5中,每个角度时延对所对应的RB数为4或5。
Assume that the four angular delay pairs corresponding to the same reference signal port shown in the figure include (a 1 , b 1 ), (a 2 , b 2 ), (a 3 , b 3 ), (a 4 , b 4 ). Then RB#1, RB#5, RB#9, RB#13, RB#17 can correspond to the same angle delay pair (a 1 , b 1 ), RB#2, RB#6, RB#10, RB #14, RB#18 can correspond to the same angle delay pair (a 2 , b 2 ), RB#3, RB#7, RB#11, RB#15 can correspond to the same angle delay pair (a 3 ,b 3 ), RB#4, RB#8, RB#12, and RB#16 may correspond to the same angle delay pair (a 4 , b 4 ). It can be seen that the minimum interval between RBs corresponding to each angular delay pair in FIG. 5 is 3 RBs. It can be seen that the number of RBs corresponding to each angle delay pair does not exceed
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000018
indivual. As in Fig. 5, the number of RBs corresponding to each angular delay pair is 4 or 5.
为避免混淆,图5中的(a)示出了将角度向量a 1至a 4加载到各RB上的示例,图5中的(b)示出了将时延向量b 1至b 4加载到各RB上的示例。 To avoid confusion, (a) in FIG. 5 shows an example of loading angle vectors a 1 to a 4 on each RB, and (b) in FIG. 5 shows loading delay vectors b 1 to b 4 To the examples on each RB.
先看图5中的(a),角度向量a 1可以被加载在RB#1、RB#5、RB#9、RB#13、RB#17上,角度向量a 2可以被加载在RB#2、RB#6、RB#10、RB#14、RB#18上,角度向量a 3可以被加载在RB#3、RB#7、RB#11、RB#15上,角度向量a 4可以被加载在RB#4、RB#8、RB#12、RB#16上。可以发现,在RB#1至RB#18依次排布的18个RB上,角度向量a 1至a 4被轮流地加载到各个RB上,形成多个循环,即对应于同一个参考信号端口的每连续4个RB可以分别与4个不同的角度向量对应。 First look at (a) in Figure 5, the angle vector a 1 can be loaded on RB#1, RB#5, RB#9, RB#13, RB#17, and the angle vector a 2 can be loaded on RB#2 , RB#6, RB#10, RB#14, RB#18, angle vector a 3 can be loaded on RB#3, RB#7, RB#11, RB#15, angle vector a 4 can be loaded On RB#4, RB#8, RB#12, RB#16. It can be found that on the 18 RBs arranged in sequence from RB#1 to RB#18, the angle vectors a 1 to a 4 are loaded on each RB in turn, forming multiple cycles, that is, corresponding to the same reference signal port. Every 4 consecutive RBs can correspond to 4 different angle vectors respectively.
再看图5中的(b)。在N=18、D=1的情况下,时延向量b 1至b 4分别表示如下: Look at (b) in Figure 5. In the case of N=18 and D=1, the delay vectors b 1 to b 4 are expressed as follows:
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000019
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000019
如图所示,时延向量b 1中的第1个权值
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000020
可以被加载在RB#1上,时延向量b 2中 的第2个权值
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000021
可以被加载在RB#2上,时延向量b 3中的第3个权值
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000022
可以被加载在RB#3上,时延向量b 4中的第4个权值
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000023
可以被加载在RB#4上,时延向量b 1中的第5个权值
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000024
可以被加载在RB#5上,时延向量b 2中的第6个权值
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000025
可以被加载在RB#6上,时延向量b 3中的第7个权值
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000026
可以被加载在RB#7上,时延向量b 4中的第8个权值
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000027
可以被加载在RB#8上,以此类推,直到时延向量b 2中的第18个权值
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000028
被加载在RB#18上,即对应于同一个参考信号端口的每连续4个RB可以分别与4个不同的时延向量对应。
As shown in the figure, the first weight in the delay vector b 1
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000020
Can be loaded on RB#1, the second weight in the delay vector b 2
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000021
Can be loaded on RB#2, the third weight in the delay vector b 3
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000022
Can be loaded on RB#3, the fourth weight in the delay vector b 4
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000023
Can be loaded on RB#4, the 5th weight in the delay vector b 1
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000024
Can be loaded on RB#5, the sixth weight in the delay vector b 2
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000025
Can be loaded on RB#6, the seventh weight in the delay vector b 3
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000026
Can be loaded on RB#7, the 8th weight in the delay vector b 4
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000027
Can be loaded on RB#8, and so on, until the 18th weight in the delay vector b 2
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000028
Loaded on RB#18, that is, every 4 consecutive RBs corresponding to the same reference signal port can correspond to 4 different delay vectors.
结合附图可以看到,导频密度D为1,时延向量的长度为N。在N=18、Q=4的情况下,每个时延向量中的18个权值中,每4个权值中有1个被加载到一个RB上。4个时延向量中的权值被轮流地加载到各RB上。也就是说,该18个RB中每4个RB形成一个循环,从RB#1至RB#4,该4个RB轮流被加载分别取自时延向量b 1至b 4中的4个权值,从RB#5至RB#8,该4个RB又轮流被加载分别取自时延向量b 1至b 4中的4个权值,从RB#9至RB#12,该4个RB又轮流被加载分别取自时延向量b 1至b 4中的4个权值,以此类推,直到18个RB都分别被加载一个频域权值。 As can be seen in conjunction with the figure, the pilot density D is 1, and the length of the delay vector is N. In the case of N=18 and Q=4, among the 18 weights in each delay vector, 1 of every 4 weights is loaded on one RB. The weights in the four delay vectors are loaded onto each RB in turn. That is to say, every 4 RBs of the 18 RBs form a cycle, from RB#1 to RB#4, the 4 RBs are loaded in turn and are taken from the 4 weights in the delay vectors b 1 to b 4 respectively. , From RB#5 to RB#8, the 4 RBs are loaded in turn and are taken from the 4 weights of the delay vectors b 1 to b 4 , from RB#9 to RB#12, the 4 RBs are again The four weights in the delay vectors b 1 to b 4 are taken in turn to be loaded, and so on, until each of the 18 RBs is loaded with a frequency domain weight.
由此,该18个RB被加载了4个角度向量和4个时延向量,即,加载了4个角度时延对。可以看到,在导频密度为1的情况下,每两个加载了相同的角度时延对的RB之间至少间隔了3个RB,也即Q-1个RB。Thus, the 18 RBs are loaded with 4 angle vectors and 4 delay vectors, that is, 4 angle delay pairs are loaded. It can be seen that when the pilot density is 1, there are at least 3 RBs between every two RBs loaded with the same angular delay pair, that is, Q-1 RBs.
对于每个参考信号端口,网络设备都可以基于上文所述的方法,将与参考信号端口对应的Q个角度时延对加载到N个RB上。For each reference signal port, the network device can load the Q angle delay pairs corresponding to the reference signal port onto the N RBs based on the method described above.
在一种实现方式中,网络设备可以对上述由K个时延向量构建的频域权值矩阵F进行重组,得到新的频域权值矩阵
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000029
进而基于重组得到的频域权值矩阵
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000030
对参考信号进行频域预编码。
In an implementation manner, the network device can reorganize the frequency domain weight matrix F constructed from the K delay vectors to obtain a new frequency domain weight matrix
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000029
Then based on the frequency domain weight matrix obtained by recombination
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000030
Perform frequency domain precoding on the reference signal.
具体来说,矩阵
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000031
和F之间可以满足:
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000032
q=1,……;Q,p=1,……,P。其中,q:Q:end表示从第q个至最后一个,以Q为增量来取值。关于函数的具体含义可参看前文说明,为了简洁,这里不做赘述。
Specifically, the matrix
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000031
Between and F can meet:
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000032
q=1,...; Q, p=1,...,P. Among them, q:Q:end means from the qth to the last, the value is taken in increments of Q. For the specific meaning of the function, please refer to the previous description, for the sake of brevity, I will not repeat it here.
示例性地,对于第p个参考信号端口,从所对应的Q个时延向量中,q从1至Q中遍历取值,进而确定与第p个参考信号端口对应的N个频域权值。Exemplarily, for the p-th reference signal port, from the corresponding Q delay vectors, q is traversed from 1 to Q to determine the N frequency domain weights corresponding to the p-th reference signal port .
将q=1、2、3、4分别代入上述矩阵
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000033
和F满足的关系式中,可以得到:
Substitute q=1, 2, 3, 4 into the above matrix
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000033
In the relational expression satisfied with F, we can get:
当q=1时,从矩阵F中第1列的第1行开始,以Q为增量来抽取权值,所抽取出来的权值作为矩阵
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000034
的第1列的权值,比如,在上文示例中,N=18,Q=4,则取矩阵F中第1列的第1行、第5行、第9行、第13行、第17行。
When q=1, starting from the first row of the first column in the matrix F, the weights are extracted with Q as the increment, and the extracted weights are used as the matrix
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000034
For example, in the above example, N=18, Q=4, then take the first row, fifth row, nineteenth row, thirteenth row, and thirteenth row of the first column in matrix F. 17 lines.
当q=2时,从矩阵F中第2列的第2行开始,以Q为增量来抽取权值,所抽取出来的权值作为矩阵
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000035
的第2列的权值,比如,在上文示例中,取矩阵F中第1列的第2行、第6行、第10行、第14行、第18行。
When q=2, starting from the second row of the second column of the matrix F, the weights are extracted with the increment of Q, and the extracted weights are used as the matrix
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000035
The weight of the second column of, for example, in the above example, take the second row, sixth row, tenth row, fourteenth row, and eighteenth row of the first column in matrix F.
当q=3时,从矩阵F中第3列的第3行开始,以Q为增量来抽取权值,所抽取出来的权值作为矩阵
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000036
的第3列的权值,比如,在上文示例中,取矩阵F中第3列的第3行、第7行、第11行、第15行。
When q=3, starting from the third row of the third column of the matrix F, the weights are extracted with Q as the increment, and the extracted weights are used as the matrix
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000036
The weight of the third column of, for example, in the above example, take the third row, the seventh row, the 11th row, and the 15th row of the third column in the matrix F.
当q=4时,从矩阵F中第4列的第4行开始,以Q为增量来抽取权值,所抽取出来的权值作为矩阵
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000037
的第4列的权值,比如,在上文示例中,取矩阵F中第4列的第4行、 第8行、第12行、第16行。
When q=4, starting from the 4th row of the 4th column of the matrix F, the weights are extracted with Q as the increment, and the extracted weights are used as the matrix
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000037
For example, in the above example, take the 4th row, 8th row, 12th row, and 16th row of the 4th column in matrix F.
比如,由时延向量b 1至b 4可以确定与N个RB对应的N个频域权值依次分别为: For example, it can be determined from the delay vectors b 1 to b 4 that the N frequency domain weights corresponding to the N RBs are as follows:
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000038
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000038
基于上文所述相同的方法,网络设备可以由K个时延向量,确定与P个参考信号端口对应的N×P个频域权值。该N×P个频域权值可构建N×P维矩阵,即,矩阵
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000039
为N×P维矩阵。
Based on the same method described above, the network device can determine the N×P frequency domain weights corresponding to the P reference signal ports from the K delay vectors. The N×P frequency domain weights can construct an N×P-dimensional matrix, that is, the matrix
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000039
It is an N×P dimensional matrix.
网络设备基于矩阵
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000040
对参考信号做频域预编码时,该矩阵
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000041
中的第n行第p列的权值被加载到对应于第p个参考信号端口的第n个RB上。
Network equipment based on matrix
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000040
When precoding the reference signal in the frequency domain, the matrix
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000041
The weight value of the nth row and pth column in is loaded on the nth RB corresponding to the pth reference signal port.
应理解,基于矩阵F重组矩阵
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000042
进而对参考信号进行频域预编码,仅为一种可能的实现方式,不应对本申请构成任何限定。在实际实现过程中,该矩阵
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000043
可能并不一定会生成。本领域的技术人员可以基于相同的构思,通过不同的算法来实现上述过程。本申请对此不作限定。
It should be understood that the matrix is reorganized based on matrix F
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000042
Furthermore, precoding the reference signal in the frequency domain is only a possible implementation manner, and should not constitute any limitation in this application. In the actual implementation process, the matrix
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000043
It may not necessarily be generated. Those skilled in the art can implement the above process through different algorithms based on the same concept. This application does not limit this.
网络设备对参考信号进行空域预编码时,所使用的空域权值向量也可以基于参考信号端口和RB编号而确定。对应于第p个参考信号端口的第n个RB所使用的空域权值向量可以是K个角度向量中的第(p-1)Q+(n-1)%Q+1个角度向量。When the network device performs spatial precoding on the reference signal, the spatial weight vector used may also be determined based on the reference signal port and the RB number. The spatial weight vector used by the nth RB corresponding to the pth reference signal port may be the (p-1)Q+(n-1)%Q+1th angle vector among the K angle vectors.
结合上例,Q=4、N=18,当p=1,n=1时,对应的空域权值向量为K个角度向量中的第1个角度向量;当p=1,n=2时,对应的空域权值向量为K个角度向量中的第2个角度向量;当p=1,n=3时,对应的空域权值向量为K个角度向量中的第3个角度向量;当p=1,n=4时,对应的空域权值向量为K个角度向量中的第4个角度向量;当p=1,n=5时,对应的空域权值向量为K个角度向量中的第1个角度向量;当p=1,n=6时,对应的空域权值向量为K个角度向量中的第2个角度向量;当p=1,n=7时,对应的空域权值向量为K个角度向量中的第3个角度向量;当p=1,n=8时,对应的空域权值向量为K个角度向量中的第4个角度向量;以此类推。可以发现,K个角度向量中的第1个角度向量至第4个角度向量可以轮流被加载到N个RB上。Combining the above example, Q=4, N=18, when p=1, n=1, the corresponding spatial weight vector is the first angle vector among K angle vectors; when p=1, n=2 , The corresponding airspace weight vector is the second angle vector among the K angle vectors; when p=1 and n=3, the corresponding airspace weight vector is the third angle vector among the K angle vectors; when When p=1 and n=4, the corresponding spatial weight vector is the fourth angle vector among the K angle vectors; when p=1 and n=5, the corresponding spatial weight vector is the K angle vector When p=1 and n=6, the corresponding airspace weight vector is the second angle vector in K angle vectors; when p=1 and n=7, the corresponding airspace weight The value vector is the third angle vector among the K angle vectors; when p=1 and n=8, the corresponding spatial weight vector is the fourth angle vector among the K angle vectors; and so on. It can be found that the first angle vector to the fourth angle vector among the K angle vectors can be loaded onto the N RBs in turn.
上文中为便于理解,结合具体的例子说明了本申请实施例中将每个参考信号端口对应的多个角度时延对加载到参考信号上的过程。但这些示例仅为便于理解而示出,上文所列举的各空域权值向量、各频域权值与各参考信号端口、各RB的对应关系,以及为了便于理解这些对应关系所示出的公式等仅为示例。本领域的技术人员基于相同的构思,可以对上述公式作出各种可能的数学变换或等价替换。这些数学变换或等价替换均应落入本申请的保护范围内。For ease of understanding, the process of loading multiple angle delay pairs corresponding to each reference signal port to the reference signal in the embodiment of the present application is described in combination with specific examples. However, these examples are only shown for ease of understanding. The above-listed spatial domain weight vectors, the corresponding relationship between each frequency domain weight and each reference signal port, each RB, and the corresponding relationship shown in order to facilitate understanding The formulas are just examples. Based on the same concept, those skilled in the art can make various possible mathematical transformations or equivalent substitutions to the above formulas. These mathematical transformations or equivalent substitutions should fall within the scope of protection of this application.
为了更好地理解本实施例,下面再结合一个示例来说明。图6示出了导频密度D为0.5的一例。导频密度为0.5,表示每两个RB中都有一个RE用于承载同一个参考信号端口的参考信号。为便于区分,图中将承载了预编码参考信号的RB用填充图案的方格示出,未承载预编码参考信号的RB用空白方格示出。但应理解,图6只是针对一个参考信号端口而示出了承载有预编码参考信号的RB。在参考信号端口为多个的情况下,也有可能部分参考信号端口对应的预编码参考信号承载在图中以空白方格示出的RB上。另外,图中虽未示出每个RB中的RE,但可以理解,图中RB#1至RB#18中每隔一个RB就有一个RB包含一个RE用于承载同一参考信号端口的参考信号。如图中所示,RB#1、RB#3、RB#5、 RB#7、RB#9、RB#11、RB#13、RB#15、RB#17用于承载同一个参考信号端口的参考信号,其他RB未用于承载该参考信号端口的参考信号。图中所示仅为示意,也可通过RB#2、RB#4、RB#6、RB#8、RB#10、RB#12、RB#14、RB#16、RB#18这9个RB来承载同一个参考信号端口的参考信号。这里不做限定。In order to better understand this embodiment, an example will be combined for description below. Fig. 6 shows an example where the pilot density D is 0.5. The pilot density is 0.5, which means that there is one RE in every two RBs for carrying the reference signal of the same reference signal port. To facilitate distinction, the RBs carrying the precoding reference signal are shown in squares with filling patterns in the figure, and the RBs not carrying the precoding reference signal are shown as blank squares. However, it should be understood that FIG. 6 only shows the RB carrying the precoding reference signal for one reference signal port. In the case where there are multiple reference signal ports, it is also possible that some of the precoding reference signals corresponding to the reference signal ports are carried on the RBs shown in blank squares in the figure. In addition, although the RE in each RB is not shown in the figure, it can be understood that every other RB in RB#1 to RB#18 in the figure contains an RE for carrying the reference signal of the same reference signal port. . As shown in the figure, RB#1, RB#3, RB#5, RB#7, RB#9, RB#11, RB#13, RB#15, RB#17 are used to carry the same reference signal port Reference signal, other RBs are not used to carry the reference signal of the reference signal port. The figure shown in the figure is only for illustration, and 9 RBs such as RB#2, RB#4, RB#6, RB#8, RB#10, RB#12, RB#14, RB#16, and RB#18 To carry the reference signal of the same reference signal port. There is no limitation here.
由于每个参考信号端口可以对应于Q个角度时延对,对应于同一个参考信号端口的连续Q/D个RB可以与Q个不同的角度时延对对应。故在图6中,对应于同一个参考信号端口的连续8个RB可以与4个不同的角度时延对对应。Since each reference signal port can correspond to Q angle delay pairs, consecutive Q/D RBs corresponding to the same reference signal port can correspond to Q different angle delay pairs. Therefore, in FIG. 6, consecutive 8 RBs corresponding to the same reference signal port can correspond to 4 different angle delay pairs.
假设图中所示对应于同一个参考信号端口的4个角度时延对包括(a 1,b 1)、(a 2,b 2)、(a 3,b 3)、(a 4,b 4)。则RB#1、RB#9、RB#17可对应于同一个角度时延对(a 1,b 1),RB#3、RB#11可对应于同一个角度时延对(a 2,b 2),RB#5、RB#13可对应于同一个角度时延对(a 3,b 3),RB#7、RB#15可对应于同一个角度时延对(a 4,b 4)。 Assume that the four angular delay pairs corresponding to the same reference signal port shown in the figure include (a 1 , b 1 ), (a 2 , b 2 ), (a 3 , b 3 ), (a 4 , b 4 ). Then RB#1, RB#9, RB#17 can correspond to the same angle delay pair (a 1 ,b 1 ), and RB#3, RB#11 can correspond to the same angle delay pair (a 2 ,b 2 ), RB#5, RB#13 can correspond to the same angle delay pair (a 3 ,b 3 ), RB#7, RB#15 can correspond to the same angle delay pair (a 4 ,b 4 ) .
图6中示出了各角度向量被加载到不同的RB上。可以发现,在RB#1至RB#18依次排布的18个RB上,角度向量a 1至a 4被轮流地加载到其中9个用于承载参考信号的RB上,形成多个循环。 Figure 6 shows that the angle vectors are loaded on different RBs. It can be found that on the 18 RBs arranged in sequence from RB#1 to RB#18, the angle vectors a 1 to a 4 are alternately loaded on 9 of the RBs used to carry the reference signal, forming multiple cycles.
在N=18、D=0.5的情况下,时延向量可以是长度为9的向量。用于频域加权的频域权值向量例如可以是从时延向量b 1至b 4,也可以是由从时延向量b 1至b 4中抽取出来的部分权值重构的向量。 In the case of N=18 and D=0.5, the delay vector may be a vector of length 9. Weight vectors for the frequency domain in the frequency domain may be weighted, for example from a delay vector. 1 b to b 4, it can be reconstructed from the portion by weight of 4 vectors extracted delay. 1 b to b vector.
下文示出了由时延向量b 1至b 4重构的频域权值向量b 1'至b 4'的一例。按照所加载的各RB之间的间隔,从时延向量b 1至b 4中抽取相应的权值,得到频域权值向量b 1'至b 4'分别表示如下: The following shows an example of the frequency domain weight vectors b 1 ′ to b 4reconstructed from the time delay vectors b 1 to b 4. According to the interval between the loaded RBs, the corresponding weights are extracted from the delay vectors b 1 to b 4 , and the frequency domain weight vectors b 1 ′ to b 4 ′ are obtained as follows:
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000044
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000044
则,如图6中所示,时延向量b 1'中的第1个权值
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000045
可以被加载在RB#1上,时延向量b 2'中的第2个权值
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000046
可以被加载在RB#3上,时延向量b 3'中的第3个权值
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000047
可以被加载在RB#5上,时延向量b 4'中的第4个权值
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000048
可以被加载在RB#7上,时延向量b 1'中的第5个权值
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000049
可以被加载在RB#9上,时延向量b 2'中的第6个权值
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000050
可以被加载在RB#11上,时延向量b 3'中的第7个权值
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000051
可以被加载在RB#13上,时延向量b 4'中的第8个权值
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000052
可以被加载在RB#15上,时延向量b 1'中的第9个权值
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000053
被加载在RB#17上。
Then, as shown in Figure 6, the first weight in the delay vector b 1 '
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000045
Can be loaded on RB#1, the second weight in the delay vector b 2 '
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000046
Can be loaded on RB#3, the third weight in the delay vector b 3 '
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000047
Can be loaded on RB#5, the fourth weight in the delay vector b 4 '
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000048
Can be loaded on RB#7, the fifth weight in the delay vector b 1 '
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000049
Can be loaded on RB#9, the sixth weight in the delay vector b 2 '
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000050
Can be loaded on RB#11, the seventh weight in the delay vector b 3 '
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000051
Can be loaded on RB#13, the eighth weight in the delay vector b 4 '
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000052
Can be loaded on RB#15, the 9th weight in the delay vector b 1 '
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000053
It is loaded on RB#17.
结合附图可以看到,导频密度D为0.5,时延向量的长度为N/2。在N=18、Q=4的情况下,每个时延向量中的9个权值中,每4个权值中有1个被加载到一个RB上。4个时延向量中的权值被轮流地加载到各RB上。也就是说,该18个RB中每4个RB形成一个 循环。从RB#1开始,RB#1、RB#3、RB#5、RB#7这4个RB轮流被加载分别取自频域权值向量b 1'至b 4'中的4个权值;RB#9、RB#11、RB#13、RB#15这4个RB又轮流被加载分别取自频域权值向量b 1'至b 4'中的4个权值;RB#17是最后一个对应于同一个参考信号端口的RB,RB#17被加载取自频域权值向量b 1'的1个权值。由此,该18个RB中,每隔1个RB都有1个RB被加载到一个频域权值。 As can be seen in conjunction with the figure, the pilot density D is 0.5, and the length of the delay vector is N/2. In the case of N=18 and Q=4, among the 9 weights in each delay vector, 1 of every 4 weights is loaded on one RB. The weights in the four delay vectors are loaded onto each RB in turn. In other words, every 4 RBs among the 18 RBs form a cycle. Starting from RB#1, the 4 RBs, RB#1, RB#3, RB#5, and RB#7, are loaded in turn and are respectively taken from the 4 weights in the frequency domain weight vector b 1 'to b 4'; RB # 9, RB # 11, RB # 13, RB # 15 and RB four turns are loaded from 'to 4 b' 4 weightings frequency domain values b 1 weight vectors, respectively; RB # 17 is the last One RB corresponding to the same reference signal port, RB#17 is loaded with 1 weight taken from the frequency domain weight vector b 1 ′. Thus, among the 18 RBs, every RB has 1 RB loaded into a frequency domain weight.
由此,该18个RB被加载了4个角度向量和4个时延向量,即,加载了4个角度时延对。可以看到,在导频密度D为0.5的情况下,每两个加载了相同的角度时延对的RB之间至少间隔了7个RB,也即,Q/D-1个RB。Thus, the 18 RBs are loaded with 4 angle vectors and 4 delay vectors, that is, 4 angle delay pairs are loaded. It can be seen that when the pilot density D is 0.5, there are at least 7 RBs between every two RBs loaded with the same angular delay pair, that is, Q/D-1 RBs.
对于每个参考信号端口,网络设备都可以基于上文所述的方法,将与参考信号端口对应的Q个角度时延对加载到N个RB上。For each reference signal port, the network device can load the Q angle delay pairs corresponding to the reference signal port onto the N RBs based on the method described above.
当然,在导频密度D不为1的情况下,网络设备依然可以基于上文所述的方法,对频域权值矩阵F进行重组,得到频域权值矩阵
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000054
进而基于重组得到的频域权值矩阵
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000055
对参考信号进行频域预编码。具体过程与上文所述相同,为了简洁,这里不再赘述。
Of course, when the pilot density D is not 1, the network device can still reorganize the frequency domain weight matrix F based on the method described above to obtain the frequency domain weight matrix
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000054
Then based on the frequency domain weight matrix obtained by recombination
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000055
Perform frequency domain precoding on the reference signal. The specific process is the same as that described above, for the sake of brevity, it will not be repeated here.
此外,网络设备对参考信号进行空域预编码时所使用的空域权值向量也可以基于上文所述的方法来确定。对应于第p个参考信号端口的第n个RB所使用的空域权值向量可以是K个角度向量中的第(p-1)Q+(n-1)%Q+1个角度向量。具体过程与上文所述相同,为了简洁,这里不再赘述。In addition, the spatial weight vector used when the network device performs spatial precoding on the reference signal may also be determined based on the method described above. The spatial weight vector used by the nth RB corresponding to the pth reference signal port may be the (p-1)Q+(n-1)%Q+1th angle vector among the K angle vectors. The specific process is the same as that described above, for the sake of brevity, it will not be repeated here.
应理解,上文仅为便于理解,以导频密度D分别为1和0.5为例详细说明了与一个参考信号端口对应的Q个角度时延对,以及将该Q个角度时延对如何加载到N个RB上的过程。本领域的技术人员可以理解,对于任意一个导频密度的取值,网络设备都可以基于上文所述的方法,对参考信号进行空域和频域的预编码。It should be understood that the above is only for ease of understanding, taking the pilot density D of 1 and 0.5 as an example to illustrate in detail the Q angle delay pairs corresponding to a reference signal port, and how to load the Q angle delay pairs. The process to N RBs. Those skilled in the art can understand that, for any value of the pilot density, the network device can perform spatial and frequency precoding on the reference signal based on the method described above.
此外,由上文示例的两例可以看到,对应于同一个角度时延对的各RB之间以Q/D-1个RB为间隔排布。网络设备可以通过对Q和/或D的取值进行配置,以使得Q/D的值为整数。In addition, it can be seen from the two examples above that the RBs corresponding to the same angular delay pair are arranged at intervals of Q/D-1 RBs. The network device can configure the value of Q and/or D so that the value of Q/D is an integer.
还应理解,上文虽然结合图5和图6详细说明了网络设备对一个参考信号端口的参考信号进行空域预编码和频域预编码的过程。但这不应对本申请构成任何限定。同一个RB可以与多个参考信号端口对应,用于承载多个参考信号端口的参考信号。该多个参考信号端口例如可以通过频分复用(frequency division multiplexing,FDM)、时分复用(time division multiplexing,TDM)、码分复用(code division multiplexing,CDM)等方式来复用该N个RB的资源。本申请对此不作限定。It should also be understood that, although the foregoing describes in detail the process of performing spatial precoding and frequency domain precoding on the reference signal of a reference signal port by the network device in conjunction with FIG. 5 and FIG. 6. But this should not constitute any limitation to this application. The same RB may correspond to multiple reference signal ports, and is used to carry reference signals of multiple reference signal ports. The multiple reference signal ports can be multiplexed by means of frequency division multiplexing (FDM), time division multiplexing (TDM), code division multiplexing (CDM), etc., for example. RB resources. This application does not limit this.
此外,上文所述的D、Q、N等的取值均为示例,不应对本申请构成任何限定。In addition, the values of D, Q, N, etc. mentioned above are all examples, and should not constitute any limitation to this application.
步骤420,网络设备发送预编码参考信号。相应地,在步骤420中,终端设备接收预编码参考信号。Step 420: The network device sends a precoding reference signal. Correspondingly, in step 420, the terminal device receives the precoding reference signal.
网络设备可以通过预先配置的参考信号资源来向终端设备传输预编码参考信号。网络设备向终端设备发送预编码参考信号的过程可以与现有技术相同,为了简洁,这里不做详述。The network device may transmit the precoding reference signal to the terminal device through the pre-configured reference signal resource. The process of the network device sending the precoding reference signal to the terminal device may be the same as the prior art, and for brevity, it will not be described in detail here.
可以理解的是,网络设备发送了P个参考信号端口的参考信号,终端设备可以接收到P个参考信号端口的参考信号。It is understandable that the network device sends the reference signals of the P reference signal ports, and the terminal device can receive the reference signals of the P reference signal ports.
在步骤430中,终端设备生成第一指示信息,该第一指示信息用于指示对应于K个角 度时延对的K个加权系数。In step 430, the terminal device generates first indication information, which is used to indicate K weighting coefficients corresponding to K angle delay pairs.
终端设备可以基于在步骤420中接收到的预编码参考信号进行信道估计,以得到每个RB上对应于各参考信号端口的信道估计值。在本申请实施例中,每个参考信号端口对应于Q个角度时延对,终端设备基于每个参考信号端口的预编码参考信号可以确定Q个加权系数。则对应于P个参考信号端口,共可确定P×Q个加权系数,即,K个加权系数。The terminal device may perform channel estimation based on the precoding reference signal received in step 420 to obtain a channel estimation value corresponding to each reference signal port on each RB. In the embodiment of the present application, each reference signal port corresponds to Q angle delay pairs, and the terminal device can determine Q weighting coefficients based on the precoding reference signal of each reference signal port. Corresponding to P reference signal ports, a total of P×Q weighting coefficients can be determined, that is, K weighting coefficients.
终端设备在确定K个加权系数时,需要预先确定参考信号端口的数量P、每个参考信号端口对应的角度时延对的数量Q,以及每个角度时延对被加载到了哪些RB上。也即,需要预先知道D值、Q值和P值。When determining the K weighting coefficients, the terminal device needs to predetermine the number P of reference signal ports, the number Q of angle delay pairs corresponding to each reference signal port, and which RBs each angle delay pair is loaded on. That is, the D value, Q value, and P value need to be known in advance.
其中,导频密度D和参考信号端口数P可以通过已有的信令来指示,比如,通过参考信号资源的配置信令来指示。Wherein, the pilot density D and the number of reference signal ports P can be indicated by existing signaling, for example, by configuration signaling of reference signal resources.
在本实施例中,Q和P可以满足:K=P×Q,因此终端设备只要知道K、P、Q中的任意两项的值即可。In this embodiment, Q and P can satisfy: K=P×Q, so the terminal device only needs to know the values of any two of K, P, and Q.
一种可能的情况是,Q可以是固定值。可选地,Q为预定义值,如,协议预先定义Q值。在此情况下,网络设备只需通过已有信令来指示D值、P值,终端设备便可确定D值、P值和Q值。One possibility is that Q can be a fixed value. Optionally, Q is a predefined value, for example, the protocol defines the Q value in advance. In this case, the network device only needs to indicate the D value and P value through existing signaling, and the terminal device can determine the D value, P value, and Q value.
另一种可能的情况是,Q可以灵活配置。可选地,该方法还包括:网络设备发送第三指示信息,该第三指示信息用于指示Q的值。相应地,终端设备接收该第三指示信息。换言之,该第三指示信息用于终端设备确定Q的值。Another possibility is that Q can be flexibly configured. Optionally, the method further includes: the network device sends third indication information, where the third indication information is used to indicate the value of Q. Correspondingly, the terminal device receives the third indication information. In other words, the third indication information is used for the terminal device to determine the value of Q.
其中,关于Q的指示可以是显式指示,也可以是隐式指示。Among them, the indication of Q may be an explicit indication or an implicit indication.
比如,网络设备和终端设备预先约定了Q的多种可能的取值与多个索引的对应关系,网络设备可以通过第三指示信息指示当前Q值所对应的索引,来指示Q值。For example, the network device and the terminal device pre-appoint the correspondence between multiple possible values of Q and multiple indexes, and the network device may indicate the index corresponding to the current Q value through the third indication information to indicate the Q value.
或者,网络设备和终端设备预先约定了K/P的多种可能的取值与多个索引的对应关系,网络设备可以通过第三指示信息指示当前使用的K与P的比值来间接地指示Q的值。Alternatively, the network device and the terminal device pre-agreed on the correspondence between multiple possible values of K/P and multiple indexes, and the network device may indirectly indicate Q through the third indication information indicating the ratio of the currently used K to P Value.
又比如,协议可以预先定义Q的多种可能的取值与参考信号的传输带宽的多个取值的对应关系。如,当参考信号的传输带宽为20兆(M)时,Q=8;当参考信号的传输带宽为10M时,Q=4,等等。网络设备可以通过第三指示信息指示当前分配给终端设备的带宽来隐式指示当前配置给该终端设备的Q值。此情况下,该第三指示信息例如可以是已有的关于参考信号的传输带宽的配置信令。例如该信令可以是CSI-Frequency Occupation。For another example, the protocol may predefine the correspondence between multiple possible values of Q and multiple values of the transmission bandwidth of the reference signal. For example, when the transmission bandwidth of the reference signal is 20 megabytes (M), Q=8; when the transmission bandwidth of the reference signal is 10M, Q=4, and so on. The network device may indicate the bandwidth currently allocated to the terminal device through the third indication information to implicitly indicate the Q value currently allocated to the terminal device. In this case, the third indication information may be, for example, existing configuration signaling about the transmission bandwidth of the reference signal. For example, the signaling may be CSI-Frequency Occupation.
再比如,网络设备可以直接通过第三指示信息来指示Q的值,或者指示Q-1的值。For another example, the network device may directly indicate the value of Q or indicate the value of Q-1 through the third indication information.
还比如,网络设备可以通过第三指示信息指示K的值,来间接指示Q的值。For another example, the network device may indicate the value of K through the third indication information to indirectly indicate the value of Q.
应理解,该第三指示信息例如可以是已有信令,或者携带在已有的信令中,也可以是新增的信令。本申请对此不作限定。It should be understood that the third indication information may be, for example, existing signaling, or carried in existing signaling, or may also be newly-added signaling. This application does not limit this.
当然,网络设备也可以通过一个额外的信令来指示D、K、P、Q中一项或多项的值。本申请对此并不限定。Of course, the network device may also indicate the value of one or more of D, K, P, and Q through an additional signaling. This application is not limited to this.
终端设备在确定了D值、P值和Q值之后,便可以确定上述K个加权系数。在本实施例中,该K个加权系数中的每个加权系数可以由N个RB中对应于同一个角度时延对的RB上接收到的预编码参考信号确定,具体可以由上述对应于同一个角度时延对的RB上的信道估计值累加求和得到。如前所述,每个角度时延对对应的RB为N个RB中的部分RB,也就是说,每个角度时延对对应的加权系数由N个RB中的部分RB上的信道估 计值累加求和得到,而不需要将N个RB上的信道估计值进行累加求和。After determining the D value, P value, and Q value, the terminal device can determine the above K weighting coefficients. In this embodiment, each of the K weighting coefficients may be determined by the precoding reference signal received on the RBs corresponding to the same angle delay pair among the N RBs, which may be specifically determined by the above corresponding to the same angle delay pair. The channel estimation value on the RB of an angle delay pair is accumulated and summed. As mentioned above, the RB corresponding to each angular delay pair is a part of the RBs in the N RBs, that is, the weighting coefficient corresponding to each angular delay pair is determined by the channel estimation value on the part of the RBs in the N RBs. It is obtained by accumulation and summation, without the need to accumulate and sum the channel estimation values on the N RBs.
下面以图5所示为例来说明。终端设备可以在RB#1、RB#5、RB#9、RB#13、RB#17上接收到对应于角度时延对(a 1,b 1)的预编码参考信号,在RB#2、RB#6、RB#10、RB#14、RB#18上接收到对应于角度时延对(a 2,b 2)的预编码参考信号,在RB#3、RB#7、RB#11、RB#15上接收到对应于角度时延对(a 3,b 3)的预编码参考信号,在RB#4、RB#8、RB#12、RB#16上接收到对应于角度时延对(a 4,b 4)的预编码参考信号。如前所述,上述4个角度时延对(a 1,b 1)、(a 2,b 2)、(a 3,b 3)、(a 4,b 4)对应于第p个参考信号端口。故,终端设备在RB#1至RB#18上可以接收到对应于同一个参考信号端口的预编码参考信号。 Take the example shown in Figure 5 as an example below. The terminal device can receive the precoding reference signal corresponding to the angle delay pair (a 1 , b 1 ) on RB#1, RB#5, RB#9, RB#13, and RB#17, and on RB#2, The precoding reference signal corresponding to the angle delay pair (a 2 , b 2 ) is received on RB#6, RB#10, RB#14, and RB#18. The precoding reference signal corresponding to the angle delay pair (a 3 , b 3 ) is received on RB#15, and the corresponding angle delay pair is received on RB#4, RB#8, RB#12, and RB#16. (a 4 , b 4 ) precoding reference signal. As mentioned above, the above four angle delay pairs (a 1 , b 1 ), (a 2 , b 2 ), (a 3 , b 3 ), (a 4 , b 4 ) correspond to the p-th reference signal port. Therefore, the terminal device can receive the precoding reference signal corresponding to the same reference signal port on RB#1 to RB#18.
每个角度时延对对应的加权系数可以由对应于该角度时延对的预编码参考信号的信道估计值确定,具体可以是对加载了该角度时延对的各RB上的信道估计值进行累加求和。图5中的每个参考信号端口对应于4个角度时延对,故终端设备针对每个参考信号端口的预编码参考信号进行信道估计,可以得到对应于4个角度时延对的加权系数。The weighting coefficient corresponding to each angle delay pair may be determined by the channel estimation value of the precoding reference signal corresponding to the angle delay pair, and specifically may be the channel estimation value of each RB loaded with the angle delay pair. Cumulative summation. Each reference signal port in FIG. 5 corresponds to 4 angle delay pairs, so the terminal device performs channel estimation for the precoding reference signal of each reference signal port, and can obtain weighting coefficients corresponding to the 4 angle delay pairs.
如图5,角度时延对(a 1,b 1)对应的加权系数可以基于在RB#1、RB#5、RB#9、RB#13、RB#17上接收到的预编码参考信号确定。终端设备基于在RB#1、RB#5、RB#9、RB#13、RB#17上接收到的对应于角度时延对(a 1,b 1)的预编码参考信号进行信道估计,可以得到5个信道估计值。该5个信道估计值的累加和即为该角度时延对(a 1,b 1)对应的加权系数。 As shown in Figure 5, the weighting coefficient corresponding to the angle delay pair (a 1 , b 1 ) can be determined based on the precoding reference signals received on RB#1, RB#5, RB#9, RB#13, and RB#17. . The terminal equipment performs channel estimation based on the precoding reference signal corresponding to the angle delay pair (a 1 , b 1 ) received on RB#1, RB#5, RB#9, RB#13, and RB#17, which can be Get 5 channel estimates. The cumulative sum of the five channel estimation values is the weighting coefficient corresponding to the angle delay pair (a 1 , b 1 ).
角度时延对(a 2,b 2)对应的加权系数可以基于在RB#2、RB#6、RB#10、RB#14、RB#18上接收到的预编码参考信号确定。终端设备基于在RB#2、RB#6、RB#10、RB#14、RB#18上接收到的对应于角度时延对(a 2,b 2)的预编码参考信号进行信道估计,可以得到5个信道估计值。该5个信道估计值的累加和即为该角度时延对(a 2,b 2)对应的加权系数。 The weight coefficient corresponding to the angle delay pair (a 2 , b 2 ) may be determined based on the precoding reference signals received on RB#2, RB#6, RB#10, RB#14, and RB#18. The terminal device performs channel estimation based on the precoding reference signal corresponding to the angle delay pair (a 2 , b 2 ) received on RB#2, RB#6, RB#10, RB#14, and RB#18, and can Get 5 channel estimates. The cumulative sum of the five channel estimation values is the weighting coefficient corresponding to the angle delay pair (a 2 , b 2 ).
与之相似,角度时延对(a 3,b 3)对应的加权系数可以是基于在RB#3、RB#7、RB#11、RB#15上接收到的预编码参考信号确定的4个信道估计值的累加和;角度时延对(a 4,b 4)对应的加权系数可以是基于在RB#4、RB#8、RB#12、RB#16上接收到的预编码参考信号确定的4个信道估计值的累加和。 Similarly, the weighting coefficients corresponding to the angle delay pair (a 3 , b 3 ) can be four determined based on the precoding reference signals received on RB#3, RB#7, RB#11, and RB#15. The cumulative sum of the channel estimation value; the weighting coefficient corresponding to the angle delay pair (a 4 , b 4 ) may be determined based on the precoding reference signal received on RB#4, RB#8, RB#12, and RB#16 The cumulative sum of the 4 channel estimates.
图7示出了图5中的各RB与各角度时延对的加权系数的对应关系。如图所示,基于在RB#1、RB#5、RB#9、RB#13、RB#17上接收到的预编码参考信号所确定的信道估计值分别为:
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000056
将该5个信道估计值累加求和,可以得到与角度时延对(a 1,b 1)对应的加权系数。故,与角度时延对(a 1,b 1)对应的加权系数c p,1可以满足:
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000057
其中,下角标p,1表示第p个参考信号端口对应的第1个角度时延对;上角标n表示第n个RB,Γ 1表示加载了上述第p个参考信号端口对应的第1个角度时延对的RB,比如,Γ 1包括RB#1、RB#5、RB#9、RB#13、RB#17。
FIG. 7 shows the corresponding relationship between each RB in FIG. 5 and the weighting coefficient of each angle delay pair. As shown in the figure, the channel estimation values determined based on the precoding reference signals received on RB#1, RB#5, RB#9, RB#13, and RB#17 are:
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000056
The 5 channel estimation values are accumulated and summed, and the weighting coefficient corresponding to the angle delay pair (a 1 , b 1) can be obtained. Therefore, the weighting coefficient c p,1 corresponding to the angle delay pair (a 1 ,b 1 ) can satisfy:
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000057
Among them, the subscript p,1 indicates the first angle delay pair corresponding to the p-th reference signal port; the superscript n indicates the nth RB, and Γ 1 indicates that the first corresponding to the p-th reference signal port is loaded. RBs of a pair of angle delays, for example, Γ 1 includes RB#1, RB#5, RB#9, RB#13, and RB#17.
基于在RB#2、RB#6、RB#10、RB#14、RB#18上接收到的预编码参考信号所确定的信道估计值分别为:
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000058
将该5个信道估计值累加求和,可以得到与角度时延对(a 2,b 2)对应的加权系数。故,与角度时延对(a 2,b 2)对应的加权系数c p,2可以满足:
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000059
其中,下角标p,2表示第p个参考信号端口对应的第1个角度时延对;Γ 2表示加载了上述第p个参考信号端口对应的第2个角度时延对的RB,比如,Γ 2包括RB#2、RB#6、RB#10、RB#14、RB#18。
The channel estimation values determined based on the precoding reference signals received on RB#2, RB#6, RB#10, RB#14, and RB#18 are:
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000058
The 5 channel estimation values are accumulated and summed, and the weighting coefficient corresponding to the angle delay pair (a 2 , b 2) can be obtained. Therefore, the weighting coefficient c p,2 corresponding to the angle delay pair (a 2 ,b 2 ) can satisfy:
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000059
Among them, the subscript p,2 represents the first angle delay pair corresponding to the p-th reference signal port; Γ 2 represents the RB loaded with the second angle delay pair corresponding to the p-th reference signal port, for example, Γ 2 includes RB#2, RB#6, RB#10, RB#14, and RB#18.
基于上述相同的方法,终端设备可以确定与角度时延对(a 3,b 3)对应的加权系数c p,4可以满足:
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000060
与角度时延对(a 4,b 4)对应的加权系数c p,4可以满足:
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000061
其中,下角标p,3表示第p个参考信号端口对应的第3个角度时延对;Γ 3表示加载了上述第p个参考信号端口对应的第3个角度时延对的RB,比如,Γ 3包括RB#3、RB#7、RB#11、RB#15;下角标p,4表示第p个参考信号端口对应的第4个角度时延对;Γ 4表示加载了上述第p个参考信号端口对应的第4个角度时延对的RB,比如,Γ 4包括RB#4、RB#8、RB#12、RB#16。
Based on the same method described above, the terminal device can determine that the weighting coefficient c p,4 corresponding to the angle delay pair (a 3 , b 3 ) can satisfy:
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000060
The weighting coefficient c p,4 corresponding to the angle delay pair (a 4 ,b 4 ) can satisfy:
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000061
Among them, the subscript p,3 represents the third angle delay pair corresponding to the p-th reference signal port; Γ 3 represents the RB loaded with the third angle delay pair corresponding to the p-th reference signal port, for example, Γ 3 includes RB#3, RB#7, RB#11, RB#15; the subscript p, 4 indicates the fourth angle delay pair corresponding to the p-th reference signal port; Γ 4 indicates that the p-th above is loaded The RB of the fourth angle delay pair corresponding to the reference signal port, for example, Γ 4 includes RB#4, RB#8, RB#12, and RB#16.
由此,终端设备可以确定出与第p个参考信号端口对应的4个加权系数。Therefore, the terminal device can determine 4 weighting coefficients corresponding to the p-th reference signal port.
基于上述相同的方法,终端设备可以对p值在1至P中遍历取值,以得到与每个参考信号端口对应的Q个加权系数。故终端设备共可确定出P×Q个加权系数,也即K个加权系数。若将该K个加权系数通过矩阵来表示,则可以表示为系数矩阵C如下:Based on the same method described above, the terminal device can traverse the value of p from 1 to P to obtain Q weighting coefficients corresponding to each reference signal port. Therefore, the terminal equipment can determine a total of P×Q weighting coefficients, that is, K weighting coefficients. If the K weighting coefficients are expressed by a matrix, they can be expressed as a coefficient matrix C as follows:
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000062
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000062
其中,该系数矩阵C中的c p,q可以表示对应于P个参考信号端口中第p个参考信号端口、与第p个参考信号端口对应的Q角度时延对中的第q个角度时延对的加权系数。 Wherein, c p,q in the coefficient matrix C can represent the q-th angle time corresponding to the p-th reference signal port among the P reference signal ports and the Q-th angle delay pair corresponding to the p-th reference signal port. The weighting factor of the extension.
若将该系数矩阵C表示为P×Q维矩阵,则该矩阵的每一行对应一个参考信号端口,每一行包括与该参考信号端口对应的Q个角度时延对的加权系数。若将该系数矩阵C表示为Q×P维矩阵,则该矩阵的每一列对应一个参考信号端口,每一列包括与该参考信号端口对应的Q个角度时延对的加权系数。If the coefficient matrix C is expressed as a P×Q-dimensional matrix, each row of the matrix corresponds to a reference signal port, and each row includes the weighting coefficients of Q angle delay pairs corresponding to the reference signal port. If the coefficient matrix C is expressed as a Q×P-dimensional matrix, each column of the matrix corresponds to a reference signal port, and each column includes the weighting coefficients of Q angle delay pairs corresponding to the reference signal port.
终端设备对该K个加权系数的反馈可以依据网络设备所指示的上报规则来依次上报。可选地,该方法还包括:网络设备发送第二指示信息,该第二指示信息用于指示上报规则。相应地,终端设备接收该第二指示信息。The feedback of the K weighting coefficients by the terminal device may be reported in sequence according to the reporting rule indicated by the network device. Optionally, the method further includes: the network device sends second indication information, where the second indication information is used to indicate a reporting rule. Correspondingly, the terminal device receives the second indication information.
网络设备通过第二指示信息向终端设备指示了上报规则之后,终端设备便可以基于该上报规则来生成第一指示信息,并在此后的步骤440中,向网络设备发送第一指示信息。After the network device indicates the reporting rule to the terminal device through the second instruction information, the terminal device can generate the first instruction information based on the reporting rule, and then in step 440, send the first instruction information to the network device.
下面先结合具体的例子来详细说明不同的上报规则。The different reporting rules will be explained in detail below with specific examples.
示例性地,一种可能的上报规则是,按照从第1个参考信号端口至第P个参考信号端口的顺序,依次上报与每个参考信号端口对应的Q个加权系数。也即,从1至P对p依次取值,对于每一个p的取值,上报所对应的Q个加权系数,Exemplarily, a possible reporting rule is to sequentially report Q weighting coefficients corresponding to each reference signal port in a sequence from the first reference signal port to the P-th reference signal port. That is, the values of p are sequentially taken from 1 to P, and for each value of p, the corresponding Q weighting coefficients are reported,
以将系数矩阵C表示为上述P×Q维矩阵为例,终端设备可以优先按行上报,从第1行至第P行,依次上报每行中的Q个加权系数。例如按照c 1,1、c 1,2、……、c 1,Q、c 2,1、c 2,2、……、c 2,Q、……、c P,1、c P,2、……、c P,Q的顺序依次上报K个加权系数。 Taking the coefficient matrix C as the above-mentioned P×Q-dimensional matrix as an example, the terminal device may preferentially report by row, from the first row to the P-th row, sequentially reporting the Q weighting coefficients in each row. For example, according to c 1,1 , c 1,2 , …, c 1,Q , c 2,1 , c 2,2 , …, c 2,Q , …, c P,1 , c P,2 ,..., c P, Q are reported in the order of K weighting coefficients.
另一种可能的上报规则是,先上报与P个参考信号端口对应的第1个角度时延对的加权系数,再上报与P个参考信号端口对应的第2个角度时延对的加权系数,以此类推,直至最后,上报与P个参考信号端口对应的第Q个角度时延对的加权系数。也即,从1至Q对q依次取值,对于每一个q的取值,上报所对应的P个加权系数。Another possible reporting rule is to first report the weighting coefficient of the first angle delay pair corresponding to P reference signal ports, and then report the weighting coefficient of the second angle delay pair corresponding to P reference signal ports , And so on, until finally, report the weighting coefficient of the Q-th angle delay pair corresponding to the P reference signal ports. That is, the values of q are sequentially taken from 1 to Q, and for each value of q, the corresponding P weighting coefficients are reported.
以将系数矩阵C表示为上述P×Q维矩阵为例,终端设备可以优先按列上报,从第1 列至第Q列,依次上报每列中的P个加权系数。例如按照c 1,1、c 2,1、……、c P,1、c 1,2、c 2,2、……、c P,2、……、c 1,Q、c 2,Q、……、c P,Q的顺序依次上报K个加权系数。 Taking the coefficient matrix C as the above-mentioned P×Q-dimensional matrix as an example, the terminal device may preferentially report by column, from the first column to the Q-th column, sequentially reporting the P weighting coefficients in each column. For example, according to c 1,1 , c 2,1 , …, c P,1 , c 1,2 , c 2,2 , …, c P,2 , …, c 1,Q , c 2,Q ,..., c P, Q are reported in the order of K weighting coefficients.
终端设备对上述K个加权系数的上报例如可以使用量化值、量化值的索引或其他形式来上报。本申请对此不作限定。The report of the above K weighting coefficients by the terminal device may, for example, use the quantized value, the index of the quantized value, or other forms to report. This application does not limit this.
在一种可能的实现方式中,终端设备可以对该K个加权系数进行归一化处理,并对归一化处理后的结果进行量化和上报。所谓归一化处理,就是在归一化单位的范围内将所有加权系数的幅度值控制在不超过1的范围内的处理。In a possible implementation manner, the terminal device may perform normalization processing on the K weighting coefficients, and quantize and report the result of the normalization processing. The so-called normalization process is the process of controlling the amplitude value of all weighting coefficients within the range of not exceeding 1 within the range of the normalization unit.
示例性地,终端设备可以将K个加权系数中幅值最大的加权系数作为基准来进行归一化处理。该终端设备可以对除了该幅值最大的加权系数之外的其余加权系数的幅值分别除以该幅值最大的加权系数的幅值,得到与各加权系数对应的比值。经过归一化处理,上述幅值最大的加权系数的幅值被归一化为1,其余加权系数分别为各自与该最大幅值的比值。终端设备可以基于各归一化之后的结果的量化值按照上文所述的上报规则,生成第一指示信息。终端设备可以通过该第一指示信息来指示上述最大幅值的加权系数的位置,例如在系数矩阵幅值最大的中的行和列,并可通过第一指示信息来指示其余加权系数对应的量化值。Exemplarily, the terminal device may use the weighting coefficient with the largest magnitude among the K weighting coefficients as a reference to perform normalization processing. The terminal device may divide the amplitudes of the remaining weighting coefficients except the weighting coefficient with the largest amplitude by the amplitude of the weighting coefficient with the largest amplitude to obtain the ratio corresponding to each weighting coefficient. After the normalization process, the amplitude of the weighting coefficient with the largest amplitude is normalized to 1, and the remaining weighting coefficients are their respective ratios to the maximum amplitude. The terminal device may generate the first indication information according to the above-mentioned reporting rule based on the quantized value of each normalized result. The terminal device can use the first indication information to indicate the position of the weighting coefficient of the maximum amplitude, for example, the row and column in the coefficient matrix with the largest amplitude, and can use the first indication information to indicate the quantization of the remaining weighting coefficients. value.
又一示例,终端设备可以将K个加权系数中的第1个加权系数,例如上述系数矩阵C中的c 1,1作为基准来进行归一化处理。具体处理方式与上文所述相似,为了简洁,这里不再重复。由于预先定义了将K个加权系数中的第1个加权系数作为基准来进行归一化处理,终端设备在通过该第一指示信息来指示上述K个加权系数时,可以不指示作为基准的加权系数的位置,而直接指示其余加权系数对应的量化值。 In another example, the terminal device may use the first weighting coefficient among the K weighting coefficients, for example, c 1,1 in the aforementioned coefficient matrix C as a reference to perform normalization processing. The specific processing method is similar to that described above, for the sake of brevity, it will not be repeated here. Since it is pre-defined that the first weighting coefficient of the K weighting coefficients is used as a reference for normalization processing, when the terminal device indicates the K weighting coefficients through the first indication information, it may not indicate the weighting as the reference. The position of the coefficient directly indicates the quantized value corresponding to the remaining weighting coefficients.
事实上,终端设备可以将K个加权系数中的任意一个加权系数作为基准来对K个加权系数进行归一化处理。具体实现方式可参看上文描述,为了简洁,这里不再重复。In fact, the terminal device can use any one of the K weighting coefficients as a reference to normalize the K weighting coefficients. For specific implementation methods, please refer to the above description. For brevity, it will not be repeated here.
应理解,终端设备在通过归一化处理后的量化值指示上述K个加权系数时,并不一定真正将K个加权系数的量化值全部指示给网络设备。例如上文示例中,对作为基准的加权系数的量化值可以不做指示,但网络设备仍然可以根据终端设备所指示的信息恢复出上述K个加权系数。因此便可以认为该第一指示信息用于指示K个加权系数。It should be understood that when the terminal device indicates the aforementioned K weighting coefficients through the quantized value after the normalization process, it does not necessarily indicate all the quantized values of the K weighting coefficients to the network device. For example, in the above example, the quantized value of the weighting coefficient used as the reference may not be indicated, but the network device can still recover the above K weighting coefficients according to the information indicated by the terminal device. Therefore, it can be considered that the first indication information is used to indicate K weighting coefficients.
在前文结合图2的相关说明中可以看到,网络设备在生成预编码参考信号时,可以将每个角度时延对加载到N个RB中的每个RB上,终端设备在确定与每个角度时延对对应的加权系数时,将在N个RB上得到的信道估计值进行全带累加,即,将N个信道估计值进行累加求和。该方法可以与本实施例所提供的方法并存。网络设备例如可以根据当前的资源使用情况、终端设备数量等因素选择其中的一种来进行下行信道测量。换言之,网络设备发送的预编码参考信号有可能是与K个角度时延对对应的K个参考信号端口的参考信号,每个角度时延对被加载到N个RB上;也有可能每个参考信号端口对应于Q个角度时延对,每个角度时延对被加载到N个RB中的部分RB上。As can be seen in the previous description in conjunction with Figure 2, when the network device generates the precoding reference signal, each angle delay pair can be loaded on each of the N RBs, and the terminal device is determined to be with each RB. When the angle delay is used for the corresponding weighting coefficient, the channel estimation values obtained on the N RBs are accumulated in the full band, that is, the N channel estimation values are accumulated and summed. This method can coexist with the method provided in this embodiment. For example, the network device may select one of them to perform downlink channel measurement according to factors such as current resource usage and the number of terminal devices. In other words, the precoding reference signal sent by the network device may be the reference signal of the K reference signal ports corresponding to the K angle delay pairs, and each angle delay pair is loaded on the N RBs; it is also possible that each reference signal is loaded on the N RBs. The signal port corresponds to Q angle delay pairs, and each angle delay pair is loaded on part of the N RBs.
但是,由于终端设备对于网络设备生成预编码参考信号的具体实现方式并不感知,终端设备并不知道一个参考信号端口对应于一个角度时延对还是多个角度时延对,或者说,终端设备并不知道网络设备在N个RB上相同的位置所加载角度时延对是相同的角度时延对还是不同的时延对,即,终端设备并不知道所接收到的预编码参考信号是按照如图2所示的方式所生成的,还是按照如图5或图6所示的方式生成的。因此终端设备也就不知道, 在确定一个角度时延对对应的加权系数时,是对N个RB上的信道估计值进行全带累加,还是对N个RB中的部分RB的信道估计值进行累加求和。However, since the terminal device is not aware of the specific implementation of the precoding reference signal generated by the network device, the terminal device does not know whether a reference signal port corresponds to one angle delay pair or multiple angle delay pairs, in other words, the terminal device It is not known whether the angle delay pair loaded by the network device at the same position on the N RBs is the same angle delay pair or different delay pairs, that is, the terminal device does not know whether the received precoding reference signal is according to What is generated in the manner shown in FIG. 2 is still generated in the manner shown in FIG. 5 or FIG. 6. Therefore, the terminal device does not know whether to perform full-band accumulation on the channel estimation values on N RBs or to perform full-band accumulation on the channel estimation values of part of the N RBs when determining the corresponding weighting coefficient of an angle delay pair. Cumulative summation.
在一种实现方式中,网络设备可以通过信令预先配置终端设备的行为。比如,网络设备可以通过信令通知终端设备,在确定一个角度时延对对应的加权系数时,对N个RB上的信道估计值进行全带累加,或者,对N个RB中每隔多少个RB进行信道估计值的累加求和。In an implementation manner, the network device may pre-configure the behavior of the terminal device through signaling. For example, the network device can notify the terminal device through signaling to perform full-band accumulation on the channel estimation values on N RBs when determining the corresponding weighting coefficient of an angle delay pair, or how many every N RBs The RB performs accumulation and summation of channel estimation values.
在另一种实现方式中,网络设备可以通过Q值来隐式地指示。比如,若网络设备指示Q值为1,则表示对应于同一个角度时延对的两个RB间的最小间隔为0,即,对应于同一个角度时延对的RB在N个RB中连续分布,可以通过对N个RB上的信道估计值进行全带累加的方式来确定与角度时延对对应的加权系数。若网络设备指示Q值大于1,则表示对应于同一个角度时延对的两个RB间的最小间隔为1个RB,即,对应于同一个角度时延对的RB在N个RB中不连续分布,可以对N个RB中每隔Q/D-1个RB进行信道估计值的累加求和。In another implementation manner, the network device can be implicitly indicated by the Q value. For example, if the network device indicates that the Q value is 1, it means that the minimum interval between two RBs corresponding to the same angular delay pair is 0, that is, the RBs corresponding to the same angular delay pair are consecutive in N RBs For distribution, the weighting coefficient corresponding to the angle delay pair can be determined by performing full-band accumulation on the channel estimation values on the N RBs. If the network device indicates that the Q value is greater than 1, it means that the minimum interval between two RBs corresponding to the same angular delay pair is 1 RB, that is, the RBs corresponding to the same angular delay pair are not among the N RBs. Continuous distribution, the channel estimation value can be accumulated and summed every Q/D-1 RB among the N RBs.
其中,网络设备指示Q值是否大于1的方法也可以有很多种。例如通过1个指示比特来指示,如“1”表示大于1,“0”表示等于1;又例如通过指示Q的具体数值来指示,关于Q的具体数值的指示在上文中已经详细说明,为了简洁,这里不再重复。Among them, there may be many methods for the network device to indicate whether the Q value is greater than 1. For example, it is indicated by 1 indicator bit, such as "1" means greater than 1, and "0" means equal to 1; for example, it is indicated by indicating the specific value of Q. The indication of the specific value of Q has been described in detail above. Concise, I won't repeat it here.
此外,如上文所述,Q值也可以是固定值。此情况下,系统可以约定按照上文所述的方法对参考信号进行预编码和信道测量。In addition, as described above, the Q value may also be a fixed value. In this case, the system can agree to perform precoding and channel measurement on the reference signal according to the method described above.
在步骤440中,终端设备发送第一指示信息。相应地,网络设备接收该第一指示信息。In step 440, the terminal device sends first indication information. Correspondingly, the network device receives the first indication information.
该第一指示信息例如可以是信道状态信息(channel state information,CSI),也可以是CSI中的部分信元,还可以是其他信息。示例性地,该第一指示信息为预编码矩阵指示(precoding matrix indicator,PMI)。本申请对此不作限定。该第一指示信息可以携带在现有技术中的一个或者多个消息中由终端设备发送给网络设备,也可以携带在新设计的一个或者多个消息中由终端设备发送给网络设备。终端设备例如可以通过物理上行资源,如物理上行共享信道(physical uplink share channel,PUSCH)或物理上行控制信道(physical uplink control channel,PUCCH),向网络设备发送该第一指示信息,以便于网络设备基于该第一指示信息确定预编码矩阵。The first indication information may be, for example, channel state information (channel state information, CSI), may also be part of information elements in the CSI, or may also be other information. Exemplarily, the first indication information is a precoding matrix indicator (precoding matrix indicator, PMI). This application does not limit this. The first indication information may be carried in one or more messages in the prior art and sent by the terminal device to the network device, or carried in one or more newly designed messages and sent by the terminal device to the network device. For example, the terminal device may send the first indication information to the network device through physical uplink resources, such as physical uplink share channel (PUSCH) or physical uplink control channel (PUCCH), to facilitate the network device The precoding matrix is determined based on the first indication information.
终端设备通过物理上行资源向网络设备发送第一指示信息的具体方法可以与现有技术相同,为了简洁,这里省略对其具体过程的详细说明。The specific method for the terminal device to send the first indication information to the network device through the physical uplink resource may be the same as the prior art. For brevity, a detailed description of the specific process is omitted here.
在步骤450中,网络设备根据第一指示信息,确定各频域单元对应的预编码矩阵。In step 450, the network device determines the precoding matrix corresponding to each frequency domain unit according to the first indication information.
网络设备基于接收到的第一指示信息,便可以恢复出与K个角度时延对对应的K个加权系数,进而可以结合此前进行预编码所使用的频域加权矩阵F和空域加权矩阵S,确定预编码矩阵。Based on the received first indication information, the network device can recover K weighting coefficients corresponding to K angle delay pairs, and then can combine the frequency domain weighting matrix F and the spatial domain weighting matrix S used in the previous precoding, Determine the precoding matrix.
示例性地,网络设备可以基于终端设备上报K个加权系数的规则,得到与P个参考信号端口中的每个参考信号端口对应的Q个加权系数。网络设备可以基于该K个加权系数生成K×K维对角阵,该K×K维对角阵中对角线上的K个元素为上述K个加权系数。该K个加权系数与上述频域加权矩阵F中的K个时延向量和空域加权矩阵S中的K个角度向量一一对应。由此,网络设备可以确定空频矩阵H如下式所示:Exemplarily, the network device may obtain Q weighting coefficients corresponding to each of the P reference signal ports based on the rule of reporting K weighting coefficients by the terminal device. The network device may generate a K×K-dimensional diagonal matrix based on the K weighting coefficients, and the K elements on the diagonal of the K×K-dimensional diagonal matrix are the above K weighting coefficients. The K weighting coefficients have a one-to-one correspondence with the K delay vectors in the frequency domain weighting matrix F and the K angle vectors in the spatial weighting matrix S. Therefore, the network equipment can determine the space-frequency matrix H as shown in the following formula:
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000063
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000063
其中,
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000064
中的元素
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000065
表示恢复值,该对角阵
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000066
可以是由上述网络设备恢复得到的K个加权系数
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000067
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000068
构建的K×K维对角阵。其中,
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000069
与上文中c p,q的对应关系可以通过下式来确定:k=(p-1)×Q+q。例如,
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000070
可对应于上文中的c 1,1
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000071
可对应于上文中的c 1,2
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000072
可对应于上文中的c P,Q。为了简洁,这里不一一列举。
in,
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000064
Elements in
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000065
Indicates the recovery value, the diagonal matrix
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000066
It can be K weighting coefficients recovered by the above network equipment
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000067
to
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000068
Constructed K×K dimensional diagonal matrix. in,
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000069
The corresponding relationship with the above c p, q can be determined by the following formula: k=(p-1)×Q+q. E.g,
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000070
Can correspond to c 1,1 above,
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000071
Can correspond to c 1,2 in the above,
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000072
Can correspond to c P,Q above . For the sake of brevity, I will not list them all here.
在确定了空频矩阵H之后,网络设备便可以根据每个RB对应的下行信道,确定适用于每个RB的预编码。这里,与RB对应的预编码矩阵,可以是指,以RB为粒度基于该RB对应的信道矩阵确定的预编码矩阵,或者说,基于该RB上接收到的预编码参考信号确定的预编码矩阵,可用于对通过该RB传输的数据做预编码。与RB对应的下行信道,可以是指,基于该RB上接收到的预编码参考信号确定的下行信道,可用于确定与该RB对应的预编码矩阵。After determining the space-frequency matrix H, the network device can determine the precoding suitable for each RB according to the downlink channel corresponding to each RB. Here, the precoding matrix corresponding to the RB may refer to the precoding matrix determined based on the channel matrix corresponding to the RB with the granularity of the RB, or in other words, the precoding matrix determined based on the precoding reference signal received on the RB , Can be used to pre-code the data transmitted through the RB. The downlink channel corresponding to the RB may refer to a downlink channel determined based on the precoding reference signal received on the RB, and may be used to determine the precoding matrix corresponding to the RB.
应理解,上文示出的用于确定空频矩阵H的计算式仅为本申请提供的一种可能的实现方式,不应对本申请构成任何限定。本申请的技术人员可以基于相同的构思,做出数学变换或等价替换,以确定空频矩阵H。此外,空频矩阵H也并不一定是必须生成的,通过采用不同的算法,本领域的技术人员甚至可以直接获得与各RB对应的预编码矩阵。It should be understood that the calculation formula for determining the space-frequency matrix H shown above is only a possible implementation manner provided by this application, and should not constitute any limitation to this application. The technicians of this application can make mathematical transformations or equivalent substitutions based on the same concept to determine the space-frequency matrix H. In addition, the space-frequency matrix H does not necessarily have to be generated. By using different algorithms, those skilled in the art can even directly obtain the precoding matrix corresponding to each RB.
基于上述技术方案,网络设备可以将K个角度时延对加载到N个RB中的部分RB上,使得被加载到一个角度时延对的RB数量得以减少。若将每个角度时延对加载到N个RB上,则需要N个RB来承载对应于一个角度时延对的预编码参考信号;但若将每个角度时延对加载到N个RB中的部分RB上,原本用来承载一个角度时延对的N个RB可以用于承载更多个角度时延对对应的预编码参考信号。在角度时延对数量K一定的情况下,可以减少导频开销。在终端设备数量剧增的情况下,可以通过调整每个参考信号端口对应的角度时延对数Q来减小导频开销,从而保证有效的频谱资源得以充分利用。Based on the above technical solution, the network device can load K angle delay pairs on part of the N RBs, so that the number of RBs loaded on one angle delay pair can be reduced. If each angle delay pair is loaded on N RBs, N RBs are needed to carry the precoding reference signal corresponding to one angle delay pair; but if each angle delay pair is loaded into N RBs On the part of RBs, the N RBs originally used to carry one angular delay pair can be used to carry the precoding reference signals corresponding to more angular delay pairs. When the angular delay pair number K is constant, the pilot overhead can be reduced. In the case of a sharp increase in the number of terminal devices, the pilot overhead can be reduced by adjusting the angle delay logarithm Q corresponding to each reference signal port, so as to ensure that effective spectrum resources are fully utilized.
与之相应,在本申请实施例中,终端设备也可以根据被加载了同一个角度时延对的RB上的信道估计值来确定与角度时延对对应的加权系数,减少了终端设备的计算量。Correspondingly, in the embodiment of the present application, the terminal device can also determine the weighting coefficient corresponding to the angle delay pair according to the channel estimation value on the RB loaded with the same angle delay pair, which reduces the calculation of the terminal device. quantity.
同时,本申请实施例中仍然可以沿用现有技术中对参考信号端口的配置。即,被配置为同一个参考信号端口的时频资源用于承载Q个角度时延对对应的预编码参考信号。终端设备并不需要感知网络设备生成预编码参考信号的具体过程,只需根据Q值来确定对应于每个角度时延对的加权系数如何计算即可。因此,兼容性强,实现灵活、方便。At the same time, the configuration of the reference signal port in the prior art can still be used in the embodiments of the present application. That is, the time-frequency resources configured as the same reference signal port are used to carry the precoding reference signals corresponding to Q angle delay pairs. The terminal device does not need to perceive the specific process of the network device generating the precoding reference signal, and only needs to determine how to calculate the weighting coefficient corresponding to each angle delay pair according to the Q value. Therefore, the compatibility is strong, and the realization is flexible and convenient.
图8是本申请另一实施例提供的信道测量方法800的示意性流程图。与上文图4中所示的方法不同,图8所示的信道测量方法中的参考信号端口与角度时延对一一对应。也就是说,参考信号端口数P等于角度时延对数K。同一个参考信号端口对应的预编码参考信号离散地分布在N个RB上。FIG. 8 is a schematic flowchart of a channel measurement method 800 provided by another embodiment of the present application. Different from the method shown in FIG. 4 above, the reference signal port in the channel measurement method shown in FIG. 8 corresponds to the angle delay on a one-to-one basis. In other words, the number P of reference signal ports is equal to the logarithm K of the angle delay. The precoding reference signals corresponding to the same reference signal port are discretely distributed on N RBs.
如图8所示,该方法800可以包括步骤810至850。下面将结合附图详细说明图8所示的方法。As shown in FIG. 8, the method 800 may include steps 810 to 850. The method shown in FIG. 8 will be described in detail below with reference to the accompanying drawings.
在步骤810中,网络设备生成预编码参考信号。In step 810, the network device generates a precoding reference signal.
网络设备可以基于K个角度时延对,对参考信号进行预编码,以得到预编码参考信号。如前所述,该K个角度时延对包括一个或多个角度向量以及一个或多个时延向量。关于角度时延对和角度向量、时延向量的关系,以及该K个角度时延对的确定方法在上文中已经做了说明,为了简洁,这里不再重复。The network device may pre-encode the reference signal based on the K angle delay pairs to obtain the pre-encoded reference signal. As mentioned above, the K angle delay pairs include one or more angle vectors and one or more delay vectors. The relationship between the angle delay pair, the angle vector and the delay vector, and the method for determining the K angle delay pairs have been explained above, and for the sake of brevity, it will not be repeated here.
为了减小导频开销,网络设备可以将每个角度时延对所加载的RB数量减少,使得每个角度时延对对应的RB为N个RB中的部分RB。例如在导频密度D为1的情况下,每个角度时延对对应的RB可以以Q-1为间隔来分布。或者说,每个角度时延对对应的RB可以以Q/D-1为间隔来分布。这也就是说,N个RB中,每Q/D个RB中就有一个RB对应了同一个角度时延对。对应于同一个角度时延对的任意两个RB之间的最小间距为Q/D-1个RB。In order to reduce the pilot overhead, the network device may reduce the number of RBs loaded for each angular delay pair, so that the RBs corresponding to each angular delay pair are part of the N RBs. For example, when the pilot density D is 1, the RBs corresponding to each angular delay pair may be distributed at intervals of Q-1. In other words, the RBs corresponding to each angular delay pair can be distributed at intervals of Q/D-1. That is to say, among the N RBs, one RB in each Q/D RB corresponds to the same angle delay pair. The minimum distance between any two RBs corresponding to the same angular delay pair is Q/D-1 RBs.
作为一个实施例,网络设备可以为每个终端设备配置K个参考信号端口,每个参考信号端口对应一个角度时延对。也即,网络设备为每个终端设备配置的参考信号可以是加载了K个角度时延对的预编码参考信号。换言之,每个终端设备所接收到的预编码参考信号与K个参考信号端口对应。由于网络设备将每个角度时延对加载到N个RB中的部分RB上,而每个参考信号端口又与一个角度时延对对应,故每个参考信号端口在N个RB上也呈离散分布。即,每个参考信号端口对应的RB可以以Q/D-1为间隔来分布。对应于同一个参考信号端口的任意两个RB之间的最小间距为Q/D-1个RB。As an embodiment, the network device may configure K reference signal ports for each terminal device, and each reference signal port corresponds to an angle delay pair. That is, the reference signal configured by the network device for each terminal device may be a precoding reference signal loaded with K angle delay pairs. In other words, the precoding reference signal received by each terminal device corresponds to K reference signal ports. Since the network equipment loads each angle delay pair on part of the N RBs, and each reference signal port corresponds to an angle delay pair, each reference signal port is also discrete on the N RBs. distributed. That is, the RBs corresponding to each reference signal port may be distributed at intervals of Q/D-1. The minimum distance between any two RBs corresponding to the same reference signal port is Q/D-1 RBs.
图9示出了多个参考信号端口在N个RB上分布的一例。如图9所示,N=18,Q=4,D=1。该18个RB可以包括RB#1至RB#18。图中虽未示出,但本领域的技术人员可以理解,在导频密度D为1的情况下,图中的每个RB都有一个RE用于承载同一个参考信号端口的预编码参考信号。FIG. 9 shows an example of the distribution of multiple reference signal ports on N RBs. As shown in Figure 9, N=18, Q=4, and D=1. The 18 RBs may include RB#1 to RB#18. Although not shown in the figure, those skilled in the art can understand that when the pilot density D is 1, each RB in the figure has an RE for carrying the precoding reference signal of the same reference signal port. .
图9示出了4个参考信号端口的预编码参考信号,该4参考信号端口可以记为端口#1至端口#4。图中不同的填充图案表示不同的参考信号端口。其中,端口#1可对应于角度时延对(a 1,b 1),承载于图中18个RB中的RB#1、RB#5、RB#9、RB#13、RB#17上。端口#2可对应于角度时延对(a 2,b 2),承载于图中18个RB中的RB#2、RB#6、RB#10、RB#14、RB#18上。端口#3可对应于角度时延对(a 3,b 3),承载于图中18个RB中的RB#3、RB#7、RB#11、RB#15上。端口#4可对应于角度时延对(a 4,b 4),承载于图中18个RB中的RB#4、RB#8、RB#12、RB#16上。可以看到,图9中每个参考信号端口所对应的RB之间的最小间隔为3个RB。 FIG. 9 shows the precoding reference signal of 4 reference signal ports, and the 4 reference signal ports can be denoted as port #1 to port #4. The different filling patterns in the figure represent different reference signal ports. Wherein, port #1 may correspond to the angle delay pair (a 1 , b 1 ), which is carried on RB#1, RB#5, RB#9, RB#13, and RB#17 of the 18 RBs in the figure. Port #2 can correspond to the angle delay pair (a 2 , b 2 ), and is carried on RB#2, RB#6, RB#10, RB#14, and RB#18 of the 18 RBs in the figure. Port #3 can correspond to the angle delay pair (a 3 , b 3 ), and is carried on RB#3, RB#7, RB#11, and RB#15 among the 18 RBs in the figure. Port #4 can correspond to the angle delay pair (a 4 , b 4 ), and is carried on RB#4, RB#8, RB#12, and RB#16 of the 18 RBs in the figure. It can be seen that the minimum interval between RBs corresponding to each reference signal port in FIG. 9 is 3 RBs.
由于每个参考信号端口对应于一个角度时延对,故,每个参考信号端口对应的预编码参考信号的预编码可以是由一个角度时延对确定。具体地,每个参考信号端口对应的预编码参考信号的预编码可以包括一个空域权值向量和一个频域权值向量。其中,每个空域权值向量为K个角度时延对中的一个角度向量,每个频域权值向量由K个角度时延对中的一个时延向量确定。Since each reference signal port corresponds to an angle delay pair, the precoding of the precoding reference signal corresponding to each reference signal port may be determined by an angle delay pair. Specifically, the precoding of the precoding reference signal corresponding to each reference signal port may include a spatial weight vector and a frequency domain weight vector. Wherein, each spatial domain weight vector is an angle vector in K angle delay pairs, and each frequency domain weight vector is determined by a delay vector in K angle delay pairs.
假设K个参考信号端口与K个角度时延对一一对应,K个参考信号端口中的第k个参考信号端口对应的预编码中的空域权值向量为K个角度时延对中的第k个角度向量。K 个参考信号端口中的第k个参考信号端口对应的预编码中的频域权值向量由K个角度时延对中的第k个时延向量确定。Assuming that K reference signal ports have a one-to-one correspondence with K angle delay pairs, the spatial weight vector in the precoding corresponding to the k-th reference signal port among the K reference signal ports is the first of the K angle delay pairs. k angle vectors. The frequency domain weight vector in the precoding corresponding to the k-th reference signal port among the K reference signal ports is determined by the k-th delay vector in the K angle delay pairs.
在一种可能的设计中,每个时延向量为长度为N的向量。每个时延向量包括N个权值。N个RB中的第n个RB上的第k个参考信号端口的预编码的频域权值为上述第k个时延向量中的第n个权值。In one possible design, each delay vector is a vector of length N. Each delay vector includes N weights. The frequency domain weight of the precoding of the k-th reference signal port on the n-th RB among the N RBs is the n-th weight in the k-th delay vector.
为避免混淆,图9中的(a)示出了将角度向量a 1至a 4加载到各RB上的示例,图9中的(b)示出了将时延向量b 1至b 4加载到各RB上的示例。 To avoid confusion, (a) in FIG. 9 shows an example of loading angle vectors a 1 to a 4 on each RB, and (b) in FIG. 9 shows loading delay vectors b 1 to b 4 To the examples on each RB.
先看图9中的(a),每个角度向量所对应的RB以3个RB为间隔均匀分布在18个RB中。每个角度向量作为一个空域权值向量,被加载到对所对应的RB上。Looking at (a) in Figure 9 first, the RBs corresponding to each angle vector are evenly distributed in 18 RBs at intervals of 3 RBs. Each angle vector is used as a spatial weight vector and loaded onto the corresponding RB of the pair.
再看图9中的(b),每个时延向量所对应的RB也以3个RB为间隔均匀分布在18个RB中。每个时延向量可用于确定一个频域权值向量。如图中所示,时延向量b 1中的第1个、第5个、第9个、第13个、第17个权值可用于构成一个频域权值向量,其中的5个权值被分别加载在RB#1、RB#5、RB#9、RB#13、RB#17上。时延向量b 2中的第2个、第6个、第10个、第14个、第18个权值可用于构成一个频域权值向量,其中的5个权值被分别加载在RB#2、RB#6、RB#10、RB#14、RB#18上。时延向量b 3中的第3个、第7个、第11个、第15个权值可用于构成一个频域权值向量,其中的4个权值被分别加载在RB#3、RB#7、RB#11、RB#15上。时延向量中b 4中的第4个、第8个、第12个、第16个权值可用于构成一个频域权值向量,其中的4个权值被分别加载在RB#4、RB#8、RB#12、RB#16上。可以看到,每个参考信号端口上被加载的频域权值减少,即,频域权值向量的长度较时延向量的长度小。 Looking at (b) in Figure 9, the RBs corresponding to each delay vector are also evenly distributed in 18 RBs at intervals of 3 RBs. Each delay vector can be used to determine a frequency domain weight vector. As shown in the figure, the first, fifth, ninth, thirteenth, and seventeenth weights in the delay vector b 1 can be used to form a frequency domain weight vector, of which 5 weights It is loaded on RB#1, RB#5, RB#9, RB#13, and RB#17 respectively. The second, sixth, tenth, fourteenth, and eighteenth weights in the delay vector b 2 can be used to form a frequency domain weight vector, and the five weights are loaded in RB#. 2. On RB#6, RB#10, RB#14, RB#18. The third, seventh, eleventh, and fifteenth weights in the delay vector b 3 can be used to form a frequency domain weight vector, and the four weights are loaded on RB#3 and RB# respectively. 7. On RB#11, RB#15. The 4th, 8th, 12th, and 16th weights in b 4 in the delay vector can be used to form a frequency domain weight vector, and the 4 weights are loaded on RB#4 and RB respectively. #8, RB#12, RB#16. It can be seen that the frequency domain weight loaded on each reference signal port is reduced, that is, the length of the frequency domain weight vector is smaller than the length of the delay vector.
在一种实现方式中,网络设备可以基于上述K个时延向量构建的频域权值矩阵F进行重组,得到新的频域权值矩阵
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000073
进而基于重组得到的频域权值矩阵
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000074
对参考信号进行频域预编码。网络设备基于矩阵F重组矩阵
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000075
的具体实现方式可以参看上文方法400中的相关描述,为了简洁,这里不再重复。
In an implementation manner, the network device may reorganize based on the frequency domain weight matrix F constructed by the above K delay vectors to obtain a new frequency domain weight matrix
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000073
Then based on the frequency domain weight matrix obtained by recombination
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000074
Perform frequency domain precoding on the reference signal. Network equipment based on matrix F recombination matrix
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000075
For the specific implementation manner of, please refer to the related description in the above method 400, for the sake of brevity, it will not be repeated here.
可以理解,新的频域权值矩阵
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000076
中各频域权值向量相比于频域权值矩阵F中各频域权值向量而言,长度得以减小。
Understandably, the new frequency domain weight matrix
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000076
Compared with each frequency domain weight vector in the frequency domain weight matrix F, the length of each frequency domain weight vector in F is reduced.
应理解,基于矩阵F重组矩阵
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000077
进而对参考信号进行频域预编码,仅为一种可能的实现方式,不应对本申请构成任何限定。在实际实现过程中,该矩阵
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000078
可能并不一定会生成。本领域的技术人员可以基于相同的构思,通过不同的算法来实现上述过程。本申请对此不作限定。
It should be understood that the matrix is reorganized based on matrix F
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000077
Furthermore, precoding the reference signal in the frequency domain is only a possible implementation manner, and should not constitute any limitation in this application. In the actual implementation process, the matrix
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000078
It may not necessarily be generated. Those skilled in the art can implement the above process through different algorithms based on the same concept. This application does not limit this.
此外,图中虽未示出,但本领域的技术人员可以理解,在该RB中还可以包括更多用于承载参考信号的RE,以用于承载更多参考信号端口的预编码参考信号。In addition, although not shown in the figure, those skilled in the art can understand that the RB may also include more REs for carrying reference signals to carry precoding reference signals of more reference signal ports.
上文中为便于理解,结合具体的例子说明了本申请实施例中将每个参考信号端口对应的一个角度时延对加载到参考信号上的过程。但这些示例仅为便于理解而示出,上文所列举的各空域权值向量、各频域权值与各参考信号端口、各RB的对应关系,以及为了便于理解这些对应关系所示出的公式等仅为示例。本领域的技术人员基于相同的构思,可以对上述公式作出各种可能的数学变换或等价替换。这些数学变换或等价替换均应落入本申请的保护范围内。For ease of understanding, the process of loading an angle delay pair corresponding to each reference signal port to the reference signal in the embodiment of the present application is described in conjunction with specific examples. However, these examples are only shown for ease of understanding. The above-listed spatial domain weight vectors, the corresponding relationship between each frequency domain weight and each reference signal port, each RB, and the corresponding relationship shown in order to facilitate understanding The formulas are just examples. Based on the same concept, those skilled in the art can make various possible mathematical transformations or equivalent substitutions to the above formulas. These mathematical transformations or equivalent substitutions should fall within the scope of protection of this application.
本实施例同样也适用于导频密度不为1的情况。例如导频密度0.5等。由于其具体实 现过程与上文图9所示相似。基于上文中结合图6和图9的相关说明,本领域的技术人员可以很容易地想到导频密度为0.5的情况下各空域权值向量、各频域权值与各参考信号端口、各RB的对应关系,为了简洁,这里不再结合附图做详细说明。This embodiment is also applicable to the case where the pilot density is not 1. For example, the pilot density is 0.5 and so on. Because its specific implementation process is similar to that shown in Figure 9 above. Based on the above description in conjunction with FIG. 6 and FIG. 9, those skilled in the art can easily think of each spatial weight vector, each frequency domain weight, each reference signal port, and each RB when the pilot density is 0.5. For the sake of brevity, the corresponding relationship between is not described in detail with the accompanying drawings.
此外,与方法400相似,在本实施例中,对应于同一个角度时延对(或者说,对应于同一个参考信号端口)的各RB之间以Q/D-1个RB为间隔排布。网络设备可以通过对Q和/或D的取值进行配置,以使得Q/D的值为整数。In addition, similar to the method 400, in this embodiment, the RBs corresponding to the same angular delay pair (or corresponding to the same reference signal port) are arranged at intervals of Q/D-1 RBs. . The network device can configure the value of Q and/or D so that the value of Q/D is an integer.
还应理解,网络设备对多个参考信号端口的参考信号进行预编码的过程可以参考上文的具体描述,为了简洁,这里不再赘述。可以理解,同一个RB可以与多个参考信号端口对应,用于承载多个参考信号端口的参考信号。该多个参考信号端口例如可以通过FDD、TDD、CDD等方式来复用该N个RB的资源。本申请对此不作限定。It should also be understood that the process of precoding the reference signals of the multiple reference signal ports by the network device may refer to the specific description above, and for the sake of brevity, it will not be repeated here. It can be understood that the same RB may correspond to multiple reference signal ports, and is used to carry reference signals of multiple reference signal ports. The multiple reference signal ports may multiplex the resources of the N RBs by means of FDD, TDD, CDD, etc., for example. This application does not limit this.
此外,上文所述的D、Q、N等的取值均为示例,不应对本申请构成任何限定。In addition, the values of D, Q, N, etc. mentioned above are all examples, and should not constitute any limitation to this application.
在步骤820中,网络设备发送预编码参考信号。相应地,在步骤820中,终端设备接收预编码参考信号。In step 820, the network device transmits a precoding reference signal. Correspondingly, in step 820, the terminal device receives the precoding reference signal.
网络设备可以通过预先配置的参考信号资源来向终端设备传输预编码参考信号。网络设备向终端设备发送预编码参考信号的过程可以与现有技术相同,为了简洁,这里不做详述。The network device may transmit the precoding reference signal to the terminal device through the pre-configured reference signal resource. The process of the network device sending the precoding reference signal to the terminal device may be the same as the prior art, and for brevity, it will not be described in detail here.
可以理解的是,网络设备发送了K个参考信号端口的参考信号,终端设备可以接收到K个参考信号端口的参考信号。It can be understood that the network device sends the reference signals of K reference signal ports, and the terminal device can receive the reference signals of K reference signal ports.
在步骤830中,终端设备生成第一指示信息,该第一指示信息用于指示对应于K个角度时延对的K个加权系数。In step 830, the terminal device generates first indication information, where the first indication information is used to indicate K weighting coefficients corresponding to K angle delay pairs.
终端设备可以基于在步骤420中接收到的预编码参考信号进行信道估计,以得到每个RB上对应于各参考信号端口的信道估计值。在本申请实施例中,每个参考信号端口对应于一个角度时延对,终端设备基于每个参考信号端口的预编码参考信号可以确定一个加权系数。则对应于K个参考信号端口,共可确定K个加权系数。The terminal device may perform channel estimation based on the precoding reference signal received in step 420 to obtain a channel estimation value corresponding to each reference signal port on each RB. In the embodiment of the present application, each reference signal port corresponds to an angle delay pair, and the terminal device can determine a weighting coefficient based on the precoding reference signal of each reference signal port. Corresponding to K reference signal ports, a total of K weighting coefficients can be determined.
终端设备在确定K个加权系数时,需要预先确定每个参考信号端口对应的角度时延对被加载到了哪些RB上,也即需要知道每个角度时延对所加载的各RB之间的间隔。因此终端设备需要预先知道D值、Q值和K值。When determining the K weighting coefficients, the terminal device needs to determine in advance which RBs are loaded on the angle delay pair corresponding to each reference signal port, that is, it needs to know the interval between the RBs loaded by each angle delay pair . Therefore, the terminal device needs to know the D value, Q value and K value in advance.
其中,导频密度D和参考信号端口数K可以通过已有的信令来指示,比如,通过参考信号资源的配置信令来指示。Wherein, the pilot density D and the number of reference signal ports K can be indicated through existing signaling, for example, through configuration signaling of reference signal resources.
一种可能的情况是,Q可以是固定值。可选地,Q为预定义值,如,协议预先定义Q值。在此情况下,网络设备只需通过已有信令来指示D值、P值,终端设备便可确定D值、P值和Q值。One possibility is that Q can be a fixed value. Optionally, Q is a predefined value, for example, the protocol defines the Q value in advance. In this case, the network device only needs to indicate the D value and P value through existing signaling, and the terminal device can determine the D value, P value, and Q value.
另一种可能的情况是,Q可以灵活配置。可选地,该方法还包括:网络设备发送第三指示信息,该第三指示信息用于指示Q的值。相应地,终端设备接收该第三指示信息。换言之,该第三指示信息用于终端设备确定Q的值。Another possibility is that Q can be flexibly configured. Optionally, the method further includes: the network device sends third indication information, where the third indication information is used to indicate the value of Q. Correspondingly, the terminal device receives the third indication information. In other words, the third indication information is used for the terminal device to determine the value of Q.
关于Q值的具体指示方式可以参看上文方法400的步骤430中的相关说明,为了简洁,这里不再重复。For the specific indication manner of the Q value, please refer to the relevant description in step 430 of the method 400 above. For brevity, it will not be repeated here.
当然,网络设备也可以通过一个额外的信令来指示D、K、Q中一项或多项的值。本申请对此并不限定。Of course, the network device may also indicate the value of one or more of D, K, and Q through an additional signaling. This application is not limited to this.
终端设备在确定了D值、K值和Q值之后,便可以确定上述K个加权系数。在本实施例中,该K个加权系数中的每个加权系数可以由N个RB中对应于同一个角度时延对的RB上接收到的预编码参考信号确定,具体可以由上述对应于同一个角度时延对的RB上的信道估计值累加求和得到。如前所述,每个角度时延对对应的RB为N个RB中的部分RB,也就是说,每个角度时延对对应的加权系数由N个RB中的部分RB上的信道估计值累加求和得到,而不需要将N个RB上的信道估计值进行累加求和。After determining the D value, K value, and Q value, the terminal device can determine the above K weighting coefficients. In this embodiment, each of the K weighting coefficients may be determined by the precoding reference signal received on the RBs corresponding to the same angle delay pair among the N RBs, which may be specifically determined by the above corresponding to the same angle delay pair. The channel estimation value on the RB of an angle delay pair is accumulated and summed. As mentioned above, the RB corresponding to each angular delay pair is a part of the RBs in the N RBs, that is, the weighting coefficient corresponding to each angular delay pair is determined by the channel estimation value on the part of the RBs in the N RBs. It is obtained by accumulation and summation, without the need to accumulate and sum the channel estimation values on the N RBs.
终端设备确定每个角度时延对对应的加权系数的具体方法与方法400中的方法相似。以图9中所示为例,终端设备基于在RB#1、RB#5、RB#9、RB#13、RB#17上接收到的对应于角度时延对(a 1,b 1)的预编码参考信号进行信道估计,可以得到5个信道估计值,例如分别为:
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000079
该5个信道估计值的累加和即为该角度时延对(a 1,b 1)对应的加权系数。故,与角度时延对(a 1,b 1)对应的加权系数c 1可以满足:
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000080
其中,下角标1表示K个角度时延对中的第1个角度时延对;上角标n表示第n个RB,Γ 1表示加载了上述第1个角度时延对的RB,比如,Γ 1包括RB#1、RB#5、RB#9、RB#13、RB#17。可以理解,上述角度时延对(a 1,b 1)对应的加权系数也即第1个参考信号端口对应的加权系数。
The specific method for the terminal device to determine the weighting coefficient corresponding to each angle delay pair is similar to the method in method 400. Taking the example shown in Figure 9 as an example, the terminal equipment is based on the angle delay pair (a 1 , b 1 ) received on RB#1, RB#5, RB#9, RB#13, and RB#17. The precoding reference signal is used for channel estimation, and 5 channel estimation values can be obtained, for example:
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000079
The cumulative sum of the five channel estimation values is the weighting coefficient corresponding to the angle delay pair (a 1 , b 1 ). Therefore, the weighting coefficient c 1 corresponding to the angle delay pair (a 1 , b 1 ) can satisfy:
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000080
Among them, the subscript 1 represents the first angle delay pair of K angle delay pairs; the superscript n represents the nth RB, and Γ 1 represents the RB loaded with the first angle delay pair, for example, Γ 1 includes RB#1, RB#5, RB#9, RB#13, and RB#17. It can be understood that the weighting coefficient corresponding to the above-mentioned angle delay pair (a 1 , b 1 ) is also the weighting coefficient corresponding to the first reference signal port.
与之相似,终端设备基于在RB#2、RB#6、RB#10、RB#14、RB#18上接收到的对应于角度时延对(a 2,b 2)的预编码参考信号进行信道估计,可以得到5个信道估计值,例如分别为:
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000081
该5个信道估计值的累加和即为该角度时延对(a 2,b 2)对应的加权系数。故,与角度时延对(a 2,b 2)对应的加权系数c 2可以满足:
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000082
其中,下角标2表示K个角度时延对中的第2个角度时延对;上角标n表示第n个RB,Γ 2表示加载了上述第2个角度时延对(a 2,b 2)的RB,比如,Γ 2包括RB#2、RB#6、RB#10、RB#14、RB#18。
Similarly, the terminal equipment performs processing based on the precoding reference signal corresponding to the angle delay pair (a 2 , b 2 ) received on RB#2, RB#6, RB#10, RB#14, and RB#18. For channel estimation, 5 channel estimation values can be obtained, for example:
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000081
The cumulative sum of the five channel estimation values is the weighting coefficient corresponding to the angle delay pair (a 2 , b 2 ). Therefore, the weighting coefficient c 2 corresponding to the angle delay pair (a 2 , b 2 ) can satisfy:
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000082
Among them, the subscript 2 represents the second angle delay pair among the K angle delay pairs; the superscript n represents the nth RB, and Γ 2 represents the loading of the above second angle delay pair (a 2 ,b 2 ) RB, for example, Γ 2 includes RB#2, RB#6, RB#10, RB#14, and RB#18.
终端设备基于在RB#3、RB#7、RB#12、RB#15上接收到的对应于角度时延对(a 3,b 3)的预编码参考信号进行信道估计,可以得到4个信道估计值,例如分别为:
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000083
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000084
该4个信道估计值的累加和即为该角度时延对(a 3,b 3)对应的加权系数。故,与角度时延对(a 3,b 3)对应的加权系数c 3可以满足:
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000085
其中,下角标3表示K个角度时延对中的第3个角度时延对;上角标n表示第n个RB,Γ 3表示加载了上述第3个角度时延对(a 3,b 3)的RB,比如,Γ 3包括RB#3、RB#7、RB#12、RB#15。
The terminal equipment performs channel estimation on the precoding reference signal corresponding to the angle delay pair (a 3 , b 3 ) received on RB#3, RB#7, RB#12, RB#15, and can obtain 4 channels Estimated values, for example:
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000083
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000084
The cumulative sum of the four channel estimation values is the weighting coefficient corresponding to the angle delay pair (a 3 , b 3 ). Therefore, the weighting coefficient c 3 corresponding to the angle delay pair (a 3 , b 3 ) can satisfy:
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000085
Among them, the subscript 3 represents the third angle delay pair among the K angle delay pairs; the superscript n represents the nth RB, and Γ 3 represents the third angle delay pair (a 3 ,b 3 ) RB, for example, Γ 3 includes RB#3, RB#7, RB#12, and RB#15.
终端设备基于在RB#4、RB#8、RB#12、RB#16上接收到的对应于角度时延对(a 4,b 4)的预编码参考信号进行信道估计,可以得到4个信道估计值,例如分别为:
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000086
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000087
该4个信道估计值的累加和即为该角度时延对(a 4,b 4)对应的加权系数。故,与角度时延对(a 4,b 4)对应的加权系数c 4可以满足:
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000088
其中,下角标4表示K个角度时延对中的第4个角度时延对;上角标n表示第n个RB,Γ 4表示加载了上述第4个角度时延对(a 4,b 4)的RB,比如,Γ 4包括RB#4、RB#8、RB#12、RB#16。
The terminal equipment performs channel estimation on the precoding reference signal corresponding to the angle delay pair (a 4 , b 4 ) received on RB#4, RB#8, RB#12, RB#16, and can obtain 4 channels Estimated values, for example:
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000086
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000087
The cumulative sum of the four channel estimation values is the weighting coefficient corresponding to the angle delay pair (a 4 , b 4 ). Therefore, the weighting coefficient c 4 corresponding to the angle delay pair (a 4 , b 4 ) can satisfy:
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000088
Among them, the subscript 4 represents the fourth angle delay pair among the K angle delay pairs; the superscript n represents the nth RB, and Γ 4 represents the fourth angle delay pair (a 4 ,b 4 ) RB, for example, Γ 4 includes RB#4, RB#8, RB#12, and RB#16.
由此,终端设备可以确定出与上述4个角度时延对对应的4个加权系数,也即确定出了与4个参考信号端口对应的加权系数。Thus, the terminal device can determine the 4 weighting coefficients corresponding to the above-mentioned 4 angle delay pairs, that is, the weighting coefficients corresponding to the 4 reference signal ports are determined.
基于上述相同的方法,终端设备可以对k值在1至K中遍历取值,以得到与每个角度时延对对应的加权系数。故终端设备共可确定出K个加权系数。若将该K个加权系数通过K×K维的对角阵来表示,则可以表示为系数矩阵C如下:Based on the same method described above, the terminal device can traverse the value of k from 1 to K to obtain the weighting coefficient corresponding to each angle delay pair. Therefore, the terminal equipment can determine a total of K weighting coefficients. If the K weighting coefficients are expressed by a K×K-dimensional diagonal matrix, they can be expressed as a coefficient matrix C as follows:
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000089
Figure PCTCN2020084017-appb-000089
该系数矩阵C中的c k可以表示对应于K个角度时延对中的第k个角度时延对的加权系数,或者,对应于K个参考信号端口中的第k个参考信号端口的加权系数。 C k in the coefficient matrix C may represent the weighting coefficient corresponding to the k-th angle-delay pair in the K angle-delay pairs, or the weighting coefficient corresponding to the k-th reference signal port among the K reference signal ports coefficient.
终端设备可以按照预先与网络设备约定好的该K个角度时延对的顺序依次上报该K个角度时延对对应的K个加权系数。故,终端设备可以在步骤830中按照该K个角度时延对的顺序生成第一指示信息,以指示该K个加权系数,并在步骤840中,发送该第一指示信息。The terminal device may sequentially report the K weighting coefficients corresponding to the K angle delay pairs in the order of the K angle delay pairs pre-arranged with the network device. Therefore, the terminal device may generate the first indication information in the order of the K angle delay pairs in step 830 to indicate the K weighting coefficients, and in step 840, send the first indication information.
在一种实现方式中,终端设备可以对该K个加权系数进行归一化处理,并对归一化处理后的结果进行量化和上报。由于上文方法400的步骤430中对归一化处理做了详细说明,为了简洁,这里不再赘述。In an implementation manner, the terminal device may perform normalization processing on the K weighting coefficients, and quantize and report the result of the normalization processing. Since the normalization process is described in detail in step 430 of the method 400 above, for the sake of brevity, it will not be repeated here.
在步骤840中,终端设备发送该第一指示信息。相应地,网络设备接收该第一指示信息。In step 840, the terminal device sends the first indication information. Correspondingly, the network device receives the first indication information.
在步骤850中,网络设备根据该第一指示信息,确定各频域单元对应的预编码矩阵。In step 850, the network device determines the precoding matrix corresponding to each frequency domain unit according to the first indication information.
应理解,步骤840和步骤850的具体过程可以参看上文方法400中步骤440和步骤450的相关描述,为了简洁,这里不再赘述。It should be understood that the specific process of step 840 and step 850 can be referred to the related description of step 440 and step 450 in the method 400 above, and for the sake of brevity, it will not be repeated here.
基于上述技术方案,网络设备可以将K个角度时延对加载到N个RB中的部分RB上,使得被加载到一个角度时延对的RB数量得以减少。若将每个角度时延对加载到N个RB上,则需要N个RB来承载对应于一个角度时延对的预编码参考信号;但若将每个角度时延对加载到N个RB中的部分RB上,原本用来承载一个角度时延对的N个RB可以用于承载更多个角度时延对对应的预编码参考信号。在角度时延对数量K一定的情况下,可以减少导频开销。在终端设备数量剧增的情况下,可以通过调整每个参考信号端口对应的角度时延对数Q来减小导频开销,从而保证有效的频谱资源得以充分利用。Based on the above technical solution, the network device can load K angle delay pairs on part of the N RBs, so that the number of RBs loaded on one angle delay pair can be reduced. If each angle delay pair is loaded on N RBs, N RBs are needed to carry the precoding reference signal corresponding to one angle delay pair; but if each angle delay pair is loaded into N RBs On the part of RBs, the N RBs originally used to carry one angular delay pair can be used to carry the precoding reference signals corresponding to more angular delay pairs. When the angular delay pair number K is constant, the pilot overhead can be reduced. In the case of a sharp increase in the number of terminal devices, the pilot overhead can be reduced by adjusting the angle delay logarithm Q corresponding to each reference signal port, so as to ensure that effective spectrum resources are fully utilized.
与之相应,在本申请实施例中,终端设备也可以根据被加载了同一个角度时延对的RB上的信道估计值来确定与角度时延对对应的加权系数,减少了终端设备的计算量。Correspondingly, in the embodiment of the present application, the terminal device can also determine the weighting coefficient corresponding to the angle delay pair according to the channel estimation value on the RB loaded with the same angle delay pair, which reduces the calculation of the terminal device. quantity.
需要说明的是,上述本申请实施例提供的信道测量方法所确定的预编码矩阵可以是直接用于下行数据传输的预编码矩阵;也可以经过一些波束成形方法,例如包括迫零(zero forcing,ZF)、最小均方误差(minimum mean-squared error,MMSE)、最大化信漏噪比(signal-to-leakage-and-noise,SLNR)等,得到最终用于下行数据传输的预编码矩阵。本申请对此不作限定。本申请实施例中所涉及的预编码矩阵均可以是指基于本申请提供的信道测量方法确定的预编码矩阵。It should be noted that the precoding matrix determined by the channel measurement method provided in the foregoing embodiment of the application may be a precoding matrix directly used for downlink data transmission; it may also undergo some beamforming methods, such as zero forcing (zero forcing, ZF), minimum mean-squared error (MMSE), maximum signal-to-leakage-and-noise (SLNR), etc., to obtain the final precoding matrix for downlink data transmission. This application does not limit this. The precoding matrices involved in the embodiments of this application may all refer to a precoding matrix determined based on the channel measurement method provided in this application.
应理解,在上文各实施例中,终端设备和/或网络设备可以执行各实施例中的部分或全部步骤。这些步骤或操作仅是示例,本申请实施例还可以执行其它操作或者各种操作的变形。此外,各个步骤可以按照各实施例呈现的不同的顺序来执行,并且有可能并非要执行本申请实施例中的全部操作。且,各步骤的序号的大小并不意味着执行顺序的先后,各过程的执行顺序应以其功能和内在逻辑确定,而不应对本申请实施例的实施过程构成任何限定。It should be understood that, in the above embodiments, the terminal device and/or the network device may perform part or all of the steps in the embodiments. These steps or operations are only examples, and the embodiments of the present application may also perform other operations or variations of various operations. In addition, each step may be performed in a different order presented in each embodiment, and it may not be necessary to perform all operations in the embodiments of the present application. Moreover, the size of the sequence number of each step does not mean the order of execution. The execution sequence of each process should be determined by its function and internal logic, and should not constitute any limitation to the implementation process of the embodiments of the present application.
以上,结合图4至图9详细说明了本申请实施例提供的信道测量方法。以下,结合图 10至图13详细说明本申请实施例提供的通信装置。Above, the channel measurement method provided by the embodiment of the present application has been described in detail with reference to FIG. 4 to FIG. 9. Hereinafter, the communication device provided by the embodiment of the present application will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 10 to FIG. 13.
图10是本申请实施例提供的通信装置的示意性框图。如图10所示,该通信装置1000可以包括处理单元1100和收发单元1200。FIG. 10 is a schematic block diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 10, the communication device 1000 may include a processing unit 1100 and a transceiving unit 1200.
可选地,该通信装置1000可对应于上文方法实施例中的终端设备,例如,可以为终端设备,或者配置于终端设备中的部件(如电路、芯片或芯片系统等)。Optionally, the communication device 1000 may correspond to the terminal device in the above method embodiment, for example, it may be a terminal device, or a component (such as a circuit, a chip, or a chip system, etc.) configured in the terminal device.
应理解,该通信装置1000可对应于根据本申请实施例的方法400或方法800中的终端设备,该通信装置1000可以包括用于执行图4中的方法400或图8中的方法800中终端设备执行的方法的单元。并且,该通信装置1000中的各单元和上述其他操作和/或功能分别为了实现图4中的方法400或图8中的方法800的相应流程。It should be understood that the communication device 1000 may correspond to the terminal device in the method 400 or the method 800 according to an embodiment of the present application, and the communication device 1000 may include a terminal device for executing the method 400 in FIG. 4 or the method 800 in FIG. The unit of the method performed by the device. In addition, each unit in the communication device 1000 and other operations and/or functions described above are used to implement the corresponding process of the method 400 in FIG. 4 or the method 800 in FIG. 8, respectively.
其中,当该通信装置1000用于执行图4中的方法400时,处理单元1100可用于执行方法400中的步骤430,收发单元1200可用于执行方法400中的步骤420和步骤440。应理解,各单元执行上述相应步骤的具体过程在上述方法实施例中已经详细说明,为了简洁,在此不再赘述。Wherein, when the communication device 1000 is used to execute the method 400 in FIG. 4, the processing unit 1100 can be used to execute step 430 in the method 400, and the transceiver unit 1200 can be used to execute step 420 and step 440 in the method 400. It should be understood that the specific process for each unit to execute the foregoing corresponding steps has been described in detail in the foregoing method embodiment, and is not repeated here for brevity.
当该通信装置1000用于执行图8中的方法800时,处理单元1100可用于执行方法800中的步骤830,收发单元1200可用于执行方法800中的步骤820和步骤840。应理解,各单元执行上述相应步骤的具体过程在上述方法实施例中已经详细说明,为了简洁,在此不再赘述。When the communication device 1000 is used to perform the method 800 in FIG. 8, the processing unit 1100 may be used to perform step 830 in the method 800, and the transceiver unit 1200 may be used to perform step 820 and step 840 in the method 800. It should be understood that the specific process for each unit to execute the foregoing corresponding steps has been described in detail in the foregoing method embodiment, and is not repeated here for brevity.
还应理解,该通信装置1000为终端设备时,该通信装置1000中的收发单元1200可以通过收发器实现,例如可对应于图11中示出的通信装置2000中的收发器2020或图12中示出的终端设备3000中的收发器3020,该通信装置1000中的处理单元1100可通过至少一个处理器实现,例如可对应于图11中示出的通信装置2000中的处理器2010或图12中示出的终端设备3000中的处理器3010。It should also be understood that when the communication device 1000 is a terminal device, the transceiver unit 1200 in the communication device 1000 may be implemented by a transceiver, for example, it may correspond to the transceiver 2020 in the communication device 2000 shown in FIG. 11 or the transceiver 2020 in FIG. The transceiver 3020 in the terminal device 3000 shown, the processing unit 1100 in the communication device 1000 may be implemented by at least one processor, for example, may correspond to the processor 2010 in the communication device 2000 shown in FIG. 11 or FIG. 12 The processor 3010 in the terminal device 3000 shown in.
还应理解,该通信装置1000为配置于终端设备中的芯片或芯片系统时,该通信装置1000中的收发单元1200可以通过输入/输出接口、电路等实现,该通信装置1000中的处理单元1100可以通过该芯片或芯片系统上集成的处理器、微处理器或集成电路等实现。It should also be understood that when the communication device 1000 is a chip or a chip system configured in a terminal device, the transceiver unit 1200 in the communication device 1000 can be implemented through input/output interfaces, circuits, etc., and the processing unit 1100 in the communication device 1000 It can be implemented by a processor, microprocessor, or integrated circuit integrated on the chip or chip system.
可选地,该通信装置1000可对应于上文方法实施例中的网络设备,例如,可以为网络设备,或者配置于网络设备中的部件(如电路、芯片或芯片系统等)。Optionally, the communication device 1000 may correspond to the network device in the above method embodiment, for example, it may be a network device, or a component (such as a circuit, a chip, or a chip system, etc.) configured in the network device.
应理解,该通信装置1000可对应于根据本申请实施例的方法400或方法800中的网络设备,该通信装置1000可以包括用于执行图4中的方法400或图8中的方法800中网络设备执行的方法的单元。并且,该通信装置1000中的各单元和上述其他操作和/或功能分别为了实现图4中的方法400或图8中的方法800的相应流程。It should be understood that the communication device 1000 may correspond to the network device in the method 400 or the method 800 according to the embodiment of the present application, and the communication device 1000 may include a network device for executing the method 400 in FIG. 4 or the method 800 in FIG. The unit of the method performed by the device. In addition, each unit in the communication device 1000 and other operations and/or functions described above are used to implement the corresponding process of the method 400 in FIG. 4 or the method 800 in FIG. 8, respectively.
其中,当该通信装置1000用于执行图4中的方法400时,处理单元1100可用于执行方法400中的步骤410和步骤450,收发单元1200可用于执行方法400中的步骤420和步骤440。应理解,各单元执行上述相应步骤的具体过程在上述方法实施例中已经详细说明,为了简洁,在此不再赘述。Wherein, when the communication device 1000 is used to execute the method 400 in FIG. 4, the processing unit 1100 can be used to execute steps 410 and 450 in the method 400, and the transceiver unit 1200 can be used to execute steps 420 and 440 in the method 400. It should be understood that the specific process for each unit to execute the foregoing corresponding steps has been described in detail in the foregoing method embodiment, and is not repeated here for brevity.
当该通信装置1000用于执行图8中的方法800时,处理单元1100可用于执行方法800中的步骤810和步骤850,收发单元1200可用于执行方法800中的步骤820和步骤840。应理解,各单元执行上述相应步骤的具体过程在上述方法实施例中已经详细说明,为了简洁,在此不再赘述。When the communication device 1000 is used to execute the method 800 in FIG. 8, the processing unit 1100 can be used to execute step 810 and step 850 in the method 800, and the transceiver unit 1200 can be used to execute step 820 and step 840 in the method 800. It should be understood that the specific process for each unit to execute the foregoing corresponding steps has been described in detail in the foregoing method embodiment, and is not repeated here for brevity.
还应理解,该通信装置1000为网络设备时,该通信装置1000中的收发单元1200可以通过收发器实现,例如可对应于图11中示出的通信装置2000中的收发器2020或图13中示出的网络设备4000中的RRU 4100,该通信装置1000中的处理单元1100可通过至少一个处理器实现,例如可对应于图11中示出的通信装置2000中的处理器2010或图13中示出的网络设备4000中的处理单元4200或处理器4202。It should also be understood that when the communication device 1000 is a network device, the transceiver unit 1200 in the communication device 1000 may be implemented by a transceiver, for example, it may correspond to the transceiver 2020 in the communication device 2000 shown in FIG. 11 or the transceiver 2020 in FIG. 13 In the shown RRU 4100 in the network device 4000, the processing unit 1100 in the communication device 1000 may be implemented by at least one processor, for example, may correspond to the processor 2010 in the communication device 2000 shown in FIG. 11 or in FIG. 13 The processing unit 4200 or the processor 4202 in the network device 4000 is shown.
还应理解,该通信装置1000为配置于网络设备中的芯片或芯片系统时,该通信装置1000中的收发单元1200可以通过输入/输出接口、电路等实现,该通信装置1000中的处理单元1100可以通过该芯片或芯片系统上集成的处理器、微处理器或集成电路等实现。It should also be understood that when the communication device 1000 is a chip or a chip system configured in a network device, the transceiver unit 1200 in the communication device 1000 can be implemented through input/output interfaces, circuits, etc., and the processing unit 1100 in the communication device 1000 It can be implemented by a processor, microprocessor, or integrated circuit integrated on the chip or chip system.
图11是本申请实施例提供的通信装置2000的另一示意性框图。如图6所示,该通信装置2000包括处理器2010、收发器2020和存储器2030。其中,处理器2010、收发器2020和存储器2030通过内部连接通路互相通信,该存储器2030用于存储指令,该处理器2010用于执行该存储器2030存储的指令,以控制该收发器2020发送信号和/或接收信号。FIG. 11 is another schematic block diagram of a communication device 2000 provided by an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 6, the communication device 2000 includes a processor 2010, a transceiver 2020, and a memory 2030. The processor 2010, the transceiver 2020, and the memory 2030 communicate with each other through an internal connection path. The memory 2030 is used to store instructions, and the processor 2010 is used to execute the instructions stored in the memory 2030 to control the transceiver 2020 to send signals and / Or receive the signal.
应理解,该通信装置2000可以对应于上述方法实施例中的终端设备,并且可以用于执行上述方法实施例中网络设备或终端设备执行的各个步骤和/或流程。可选地,该存储器2030可以包括只读存储器和随机存取存储器,并向处理器提供指令和数据。存储器的一部分还可以包括非易失性随机存取存储器。存储器2030可以是一个单独的器件,也可以集成在处理器2010中。该处理器2010可以用于执行存储器2030中存储的指令,并且当该处理器2010执行存储器中存储的指令时,该处理器2010用于执行上述与网络设备或终端设备对应的方法实施例的各个步骤和/或流程。It should be understood that the communication apparatus 2000 may correspond to the terminal device in the foregoing method embodiment, and may be used to execute various steps and/or processes performed by the network device or terminal device in the foregoing method embodiment. Optionally, the memory 2030 may include a read-only memory and a random access memory, and provide instructions and data to the processor. A part of the memory may also include a non-volatile random access memory. The memory 2030 may be a separate device or integrated in the processor 2010. The processor 2010 may be used to execute instructions stored in the memory 2030, and when the processor 2010 executes the instructions stored in the memory, the processor 2010 is used to execute each of the above method embodiments corresponding to the network device or the terminal device. Steps and/or processes.
可选地,该通信装置2000是前文实施例中的终端设备。Optionally, the communication device 2000 is the terminal device in the foregoing embodiment.
可选地,该通信装置2000是前文实施例中的网络设备。Optionally, the communication device 2000 is the network device in the foregoing embodiment.
其中,收发器2020可以包括发射机和接收机。收发器2020还可以进一步包括天线,天线的数量可以为一个或多个。该处理器2010和存储器2030与收发器2020可以是集成在不同芯片上的器件。如,处理器2010和存储器2030可以集成在基带芯片中,收发器2020可以集成在射频芯片中。该处理器2010和存储器2030与收发器2020也可以是集成在同一个芯片上的器件。本申请对此不作限定。Among them, the transceiver 2020 may include a transmitter and a receiver. The transceiver 2020 may further include an antenna, and the number of antennas may be one or more. The processor 2010, the memory 2030, and the transceiver 2020 may be devices integrated on different chips. For example, the processor 2010 and the memory 2030 may be integrated in a baseband chip, and the transceiver 2020 may be integrated in a radio frequency chip. The processor 2010, the memory 2030, and the transceiver 2020 may also be devices integrated on the same chip. This application does not limit this.
可选地,该通信装置2000是配置在终端设备中的部件,如电路、芯片、芯片系统等。Optionally, the communication device 2000 is a component configured in a terminal device, such as a circuit, a chip, a chip system, and so on.
可选地,该通信装置2000是配置在网络设备中的部件,如电路、芯片、芯片系统等。Optionally, the communication device 2000 is a component configured in a network device, such as a circuit, a chip, a chip system, and the like.
其中,收发器2020也可以是通信接口,如输入/输出接口、电路等。该收发器2020与处理器2010和存储器2020都可以集成在同一个芯片中,如集成在基带芯片中。Among them, the transceiver 2020 may also be a communication interface, such as an input/output interface, a circuit, and so on. The transceiver 2020, the processor 2010 and the memory 2020 may be integrated in the same chip, such as integrated in a baseband chip.
图12是本申请实施例提供的终端设备3000的结构示意图。该终端设备3000可应用于如图1所示的系统中,执行上述方法实施例中终端设备的功能。如图所示,该终端设备3000包括处理器3010和收发器3020。可选地,该终端设备3000还包括存储器3030。其中,处理器3010、收发器3020和存储器3030之间可以通过内部连接通路互相通信,传递控制和/或数据信号,该存储器3030用于存储计算机程序,该处理器3010用于从该存储器3030中调用并运行该计算机程序,以控制该收发器3020收发信号。可选地,终端设备3000还可以包括天线3040,用于将收发器3020输出的上行数据或上行控制信令通过无线信号发送出去。FIG. 12 is a schematic structural diagram of a terminal device 3000 provided by an embodiment of the present application. The terminal device 3000 can be applied to the system shown in FIG. 1 to perform the functions of the terminal device in the foregoing method embodiment. As shown in the figure, the terminal device 3000 includes a processor 3010 and a transceiver 3020. Optionally, the terminal device 3000 further includes a memory 3030. Among them, the processor 3010, the transceiver 3020, and the memory 3030 can communicate with each other through an internal connection path to transfer control and/or data signals. The memory 3030 is used to store computer programs, and the processor 3010 is used to download from the memory 3030. Call and run the computer program to control the transceiver 3020 to send and receive signals. Optionally, the terminal device 3000 may further include an antenna 3040 for transmitting the uplink data or uplink control signaling output by the transceiver 3020 through a wireless signal.
上述处理器3010可以和存储器3030可以合成一个处理装置,处理器3010用于执行 存储器3030中存储的程序代码来实现上述功能。具体实现时,该存储器3030也可以集成在处理器3010中,或者独立于处理器3010。该处理器3010可以与图10中的处理单元1100或图11中的处理器2010对应。The aforementioned processor 3010 and the memory 3030 can be combined into a processing device, and the processor 3010 is configured to execute the program code stored in the memory 3030 to realize the aforementioned functions. During specific implementation, the memory 3030 may also be integrated in the processor 3010 or independent of the processor 3010. The processor 3010 may correspond to the processing unit 1100 in FIG. 10 or the processor 2010 in FIG. 11.
上述收发器3020可以与图10中的收发单元1200或图11中的收发器2020对应。收发器3020可以包括接收器(或称接收机、接收电路)和发射器(或称发射机、发射电路)。其中,接收器用于接收信号,发射器用于发射信号。The aforementioned transceiver 3020 may correspond to the transceiver unit 1200 in FIG. 10 or the transceiver 2020 in FIG. 11. The transceiver 3020 may include a receiver (or receiver, receiving circuit) and a transmitter (or transmitter, transmitting circuit). Among them, the receiver is used to receive signals, and the transmitter is used to transmit signals.
应理解,图12所示的终端设备3000能够实现图4或图8所示方法实施例中涉及终端设备的各个过程。终端设备3000中的各个模块的操作和/或功能,分别为了实现上述方法实施例中的相应流程。具体可参见上述方法实施例中的描述,为避免重复,此处适当省略详细描述。It should be understood that the terminal device 3000 shown in FIG. 12 can implement various processes involving the terminal device in the method embodiment shown in FIG. 4 or FIG. 8. The operations and/or functions of each module in the terminal device 3000 are respectively for implementing the corresponding processes in the foregoing method embodiments. For details, please refer to the description in the foregoing method embodiment, and to avoid repetition, detailed description is omitted here as appropriate.
上述处理器3010可以用于执行前面方法实施例中描述的由终端设备内部实现的动作,而收发器3020可以用于执行前面方法实施例中描述的终端设备向网络设备发送或从网络设备接收的动作。具体请见前面方法实施例中的描述,此处不再赘述。The above-mentioned processor 3010 can be used to execute the actions described in the previous method embodiments implemented by the terminal device, and the transceiver 3020 can be used to execute the terminal device described in the previous method embodiments to send to or receive from the network device. action. For details, please refer to the description in the previous method embodiment, which will not be repeated here.
可选地,上述终端设备3000还可以包括电源3050,用于给终端设备中的各种器件或电路提供电源。Optionally, the aforementioned terminal device 3000 may further include a power supply 3050 for providing power to various devices or circuits in the terminal device.
除此之外,为了使得终端设备的功能更加完善,该终端设备3000还可以包括输入单元3060、显示单元3070、音频电路3080、摄像头3090和传感器3100等中的一个或多个,所述音频电路还可以包括扬声器3082、麦克风3084等。In addition, in order to make the function of the terminal device more complete, the terminal device 3000 may also include one or more of the input unit 3060, the display unit 3070, the audio circuit 3080, the camera 3090, and the sensor 3100. The audio circuit It may also include a speaker 3082, a microphone 3084, and so on.
图13是本申请实施例提供的网络设备的结构示意图,例如可以为基站的结构示意图。该基站4000可应用于如图1所示的系统中,执行上述方法实施例中网络设备的功能。如图所示,该基站4000可以包括一个或多个射频单元,如远端射频单元(remote radio unit,RRU)4100和一个或多个基带单元(BBU)(也可称为分布式单元(DU))4200。所述RRU 4100可以称为收发单元,可以与图10中的收发单元1200或图11中的收发器2020对应。可选地,该RRU 4100还可以称为收发机、收发电路、或者收发器等等,其可以包括至少一个天线4101和射频单元4102。可选地,RRU 4100可以包括接收单元和发送单元,接收单元可以对应于接收器(或称接收机、接收电路),发送单元可以对应于发射器(或称发射机、发射电路)。所述RRU 4100部分主要用于射频信号的收发以及射频信号与基带信号的转换,例如用于向终端设备发送指示信息。所述BBU 4200部分主要用于进行基带处理,对基站进行控制等。所述RRU 4100与BBU 4200可以是物理上设置在一起,也可以物理上分离设置的,即分布式基站。FIG. 13 is a schematic structural diagram of a network device provided by an embodiment of the present application, for example, it may be a schematic structural diagram of a base station. The base station 4000 can be applied to the system shown in FIG. 1 to perform the functions of the network device in the foregoing method embodiment. As shown in the figure, the base station 4000 may include one or more radio frequency units, such as a remote radio unit (RRU) 4100 and one or more baseband units (BBU) (also known as distributed unit (DU) )) 4200. The RRU 4100 may be called a transceiver unit, and may correspond to the transceiver unit 1200 in FIG. 10 or the transceiver 2020 in FIG. 11. Optionally, the RRU 4100 may also be called a transceiver, a transceiver circuit, or a transceiver, etc., and it may include at least one antenna 4101 and a radio frequency unit 4102. Optionally, the RRU 4100 may include a receiving unit and a sending unit. The receiving unit may correspond to a receiver (or receiver or receiving circuit), and the sending unit may correspond to a transmitter (or transmitter or transmitting circuit). The RRU 4100 part is mainly used for receiving and sending radio frequency signals and conversion between radio frequency signals and baseband signals, for example, for sending instruction information to terminal equipment. The 4200 part of the BBU is mainly used for baseband processing, base station control, and so on. The RRU 4100 and the BBU 4200 may be physically set together, or may be physically separated, that is, a distributed base station.
所述BBU 4200为基站的控制中心,也可以称为处理单元,可以与图10中的处理单元1100或图11中的处理器2010对应,主要用于完成基带处理功能,如信道编码,复用,调制,扩频等等。例如所述BBU(处理单元)可以用于控制基站执行上述方法实施例中关于网络设备的操作流程,例如,生成上述指示信息等。The BBU 4200 is the control center of the base station, and can also be called a processing unit, which can correspond to the processing unit 1100 in FIG. 10 or the processor 2010 in FIG. 11, and is mainly used to complete baseband processing functions such as channel coding and multiplexing. , Modulation, spread spectrum and so on. For example, the BBU (processing unit) may be used to control the base station to execute the operation procedure of the network device in the foregoing method embodiment, for example, to generate the foregoing indication information.
在一个示例中,所述BBU 4200可以由一个或多个单板构成,多个单板可以共同支持单一接入制式的无线接入网(如LTE网),也可以分别支持不同接入制式的无线接入网(如LTE网,5G网或其他网)。所述BBU 4200还包括存储器4201和处理器4202。所述存储器4201用以存储必要的指令和数据。所述处理器4202用于控制基站进行必要的动作,例如用于控制基站执行上述方法实施例中关于网络设备的操作流程。所述存储器4201 和处理器4202可以服务于一个或多个单板。也就是说,可以每个单板上单独设置存储器和处理器。也可以是多个单板共用相同的存储器和处理器。此外每个单板上还可以设置有必要的电路。In an example, the BBU 4200 may be composed of one or more single boards, and multiple single boards may jointly support a radio access network with a single access standard (such as an LTE network), or support different access standards. Wireless access network (such as LTE network, 5G network or other networks). The BBU 4200 further includes a memory 4201 and a processor 4202. The memory 4201 is used to store necessary instructions and data. The processor 4202 is configured to control the base station to perform necessary actions, for example, to control the base station to execute the operation procedure of the network device in the foregoing method embodiment. The memory 4201 and the processor 4202 may serve one or more single boards. In other words, the memory and the processor can be set separately on each board. It can also be that multiple boards share the same memory and processor. In addition, necessary circuits can be provided on each board.
应理解,图13所示的基站4000能够实现图4或图8所示方法实施例中涉及网络设备的各个过程。基站4000中的各个模块的操作和/或功能,分别为了实现上述方法实施例中的相应流程。具体可参见上述方法实施例中的描述,为避免重复,此处适当省略详细描述。It should be understood that the base station 4000 shown in FIG. 13 can implement various processes involving network devices in the method embodiment shown in FIG. 4 or FIG. 8. The operations and/or functions of the various modules in the base station 4000 are to implement the corresponding procedures in the foregoing method embodiments. For details, please refer to the description in the foregoing method embodiment, and to avoid repetition, detailed description is omitted here as appropriate.
上述BBU 4200可以用于执行前面方法实施例中描述的由网络设备内部实现的动作,而RRU 4100可以用于执行前面方法实施例中描述的网络设备向终端设备发送或从终端设备接收的动作。具体请见前面方法实施例中的描述,此处不再赘述。The above-mentioned BBU 4200 can be used to perform the actions described in the previous method embodiments implemented by the network device, and the RRU 4100 can be used to perform the actions described in the previous method embodiments that the network device sends to or receives from the terminal device. For details, please refer to the description in the previous method embodiment, which will not be repeated here.
应理解,图13所示出的基站4000仅为网络设备的一种可能的形态,而不应对本申请构成任何限定。本申请所提供的方法可适用于其他形态的网络设备。例如,包括AAU,还可以包括CU和/或DU,或者包括BBU和自适应无线单元(adaptive radio unit,ARU),或BBU;也可以为客户终端设备(customer premises equipment,CPE),还可以为其它形态,本申请对于网络设备的具体形态不做限定。It should be understood that the base station 4000 shown in FIG. 13 is only a possible form of network equipment, and should not constitute any limitation to this application. The method provided in this application can be applied to other types of network equipment. For example, it may include AAU, it may also include CU and/or DU, or it may include BBU and adaptive radio unit (ARU), or BBU; it may also be customer premises equipment (CPE), or it may be For other forms, this application does not limit the specific form of the network device.
其中,CU和/或DU可以用于执行前面方法实施例中描述的由网络设备内部实现的动作,而AAU可以用于执行前面方法实施例中描述的网络设备向终端设备发送或从终端设备接收的动作。具体请见前面方法实施例中的描述,此处不再赘述。Among them, the CU and/or DU can be used to perform the actions described in the previous method embodiment implemented by the network device, and the AAU can be used to perform the network device described in the previous method embodiment to send to or receive from the terminal device Actions. For details, please refer to the description in the previous method embodiment, which will not be repeated here.
本申请还提供了一种处理装置,包括至少一个处理器,所述至少一个处理器用于执行存储器中存储的计算机程序,以使得所述处理装置执行上述任一方法实施例中终端设备或网络设备所执行的方法。The present application also provides a processing device including at least one processor, and the at least one processor is configured to execute a computer program stored in a memory, so that the processing device executes the terminal device or the network device in any of the foregoing method embodiments The method performed.
应理解,上述处理装置可以是一个或多个芯片。例如,该处理装置可以是现场可编程门阵列(field programmable gate array,FPGA),可以是专用集成芯片(application specific integrated circuit,ASIC),还可以是系统芯片(system on chip,SoC),还可以是中央处理器(central processor unit,CPU),还可以是网络处理器(network processor,NP),还可以是数字信号处理电路(digital signal processor,DSP),还可以是微控制器(micro controller unit,MCU),还可以是可编程控制器(programmable logic device,PLD)或其他集成芯片。It should be understood that the aforementioned processing device may be one or more chips. For example, the processing device may be a field programmable gate array (FPGA), an application specific integrated circuit (ASIC), a system on chip (SoC), or It is a central processor unit (CPU), it can also be a network processor (NP), it can also be a digital signal processing circuit (digital signal processor, DSP), or it can be a microcontroller (microcontroller unit). , MCU), it can also be a programmable logic device (PLD) or other integrated chips.
本申请实施例还提供了一种处理装置,包括处理器和通信接口。所述通信接口与所述处理器耦合。所述通信接口用于输入和/或输出信息。所述信息包括指令和数据中的至少一项。所述处理器用于执行计算机程序,以使得所述处理装置执行上述任一方法实施例中终端设备或网络设备所执行的方法。The embodiment of the present application also provides a processing device, including a processor and a communication interface. The communication interface is coupled with the processor. The communication interface is used to input and/or output information. The information includes at least one of instructions and data. The processor is used to execute a computer program, so that the processing apparatus executes the method executed by the terminal device or the network device in any of the foregoing method embodiments.
本申请实施例还提供了一种处理装置,包括处理器和存储器。所述存储器用于存储计算机程序,所述处理器用于从所述存储器调用并运行所述计算机程序,以使得所述处理装置执行上述任一方法实施例中终端设备或网络设备所执行的方法。An embodiment of the present application also provides a processing device, including a processor and a memory. The memory is used to store a computer program, and the processor is used to call and run the computer program from the memory, so that the processing device executes the method executed by the terminal device or the network device in any of the foregoing method embodiments.
在实现过程中,上述方法的各步骤可以通过处理器中的硬件的集成逻辑电路或者软件形式的指令完成。结合本申请实施例所公开的方法的步骤可以直接体现为硬件处理器执行完成,或者用处理器中的硬件及软件模块组合执行完成。软件模块可以位于随机存储器,闪存、只读存储器,可编程只读存储器或者电可擦写可编程存储器、寄存器等本领域成熟的存储介质中。该存储介质位于存储器,处理器读取存储器中的信息,结合其硬件完成上 述方法的步骤。为避免重复,这里不再详细描述。In the implementation process, each step of the above method can be completed by an integrated logic circuit of hardware in the processor or instructions in the form of software. The steps of the method disclosed in combination with the embodiments of the present application may be directly embodied as being executed and completed by a hardware processor, or executed and completed by a combination of hardware and software modules in the processor. The software module can be located in a mature storage medium in the field, such as random access memory, flash memory, read-only memory, programmable read-only memory, or electrically erasable programmable memory, registers. The storage medium is located in the memory, and the processor reads the information in the memory and completes the steps of the above method in combination with its hardware. To avoid repetition, it will not be described in detail here.
应注意,本申请实施例中的处理器可以是一种集成电路芯片,具有信号的处理能力。在实现过程中,上述方法实施例的各步骤可以通过处理器中的硬件的集成逻辑电路或者软件形式的指令完成。上述的处理器可以是通用处理器、数字信号处理器(DSP)、专用集成电路(ASIC)、现场可编程门阵列(FPGA)或者其他可编程逻辑器件、分立门或者晶体管逻辑器件、分立硬件组件。可以实现或者执行本申请实施例中的公开的各方法、步骤及逻辑框图。通用处理器可以是微处理器或者该处理器也可以是任何常规的处理器等。结合本申请实施例所公开的方法的步骤可以直接体现为硬件译码处理器执行完成,或者用译码处理器中的硬件及软件模块组合执行完成。软件模块可以位于随机存储器,闪存、只读存储器,可编程只读存储器或者电可擦写可编程存储器、寄存器等本领域成熟的存储介质中。该存储介质位于存储器,处理器读取存储器中的信息,结合其硬件完成上述方法的步骤。It should be noted that the processor in the embodiment of the present application may be an integrated circuit chip with signal processing capability. In the implementation process, the steps of the foregoing method embodiments can be completed by hardware integrated logic circuits in the processor or instructions in the form of software. The above-mentioned processor may be a general-purpose processor, a digital signal processor (DSP), an application specific integrated circuit (ASIC), a field programmable gate array (FPGA) or other programmable logic devices, discrete gates or transistor logic devices, discrete hardware components . The methods, steps, and logical block diagrams disclosed in the embodiments of the present application can be implemented or executed. The general-purpose processor may be a microprocessor or the processor may also be any conventional processor or the like. The steps of the method disclosed in the embodiments of the present application may be directly embodied as being executed and completed by a hardware decoding processor, or executed and completed by a combination of hardware and software modules in the decoding processor. The software module can be located in a mature storage medium in the field, such as random access memory, flash memory, read-only memory, programmable read-only memory, or electrically erasable programmable memory, registers. The storage medium is located in the memory, and the processor reads the information in the memory and completes the steps of the above method in combination with its hardware.
可以理解,本申请实施例中的存储器可以是易失性存储器或非易失性存储器,或可包括易失性和非易失性存储器两者。其中,非易失性存储器可以是只读存储器(read-only memory,ROM)、可编程只读存储器(programmable ROM,PROM)、可擦除可编程只读存储器(erasable PROM,EPROM)、电可擦除可编程只读存储器(electrically EPROM,EEPROM)或闪存。易失性存储器可以是随机存取存储器(random access memory,RAM),其用作外部高速缓存。通过示例性但不是限制性说明,许多形式的RAM可用,例如静态随机存取存储器(static RAM,SRAM)、动态随机存取存储器(dynamic RAM,DRAM)、同步动态随机存取存储器(synchronous DRAM,SDRAM)、双倍数据速率同步动态随机存取存储器(double data rate SDRAM,DDR SDRAM)、增强型同步动态随机存取存储器(enhanced SDRAM,ESDRAM)、同步连接动态随机存取存储器(synchlink DRAM,SLDRAM)和直接内存总线随机存取存储器(direct rambus RAM,DR RAM)。应注意,本文描述的系统和方法的存储器旨在包括但不限于这些和任意其它适合类型的存储器。It can be understood that the memory in the embodiments of the present application may be a volatile memory or a non-volatile memory, or may include both volatile and non-volatile memory. Among them, the non-volatile memory can be read-only memory (ROM), programmable read-only memory (programmable ROM, PROM), erasable programmable read-only memory (erasable PROM, EPROM), and electrically available Erase programmable read-only memory (electrically EPROM, EEPROM) or flash memory. The volatile memory may be random access memory (RAM), which is used as an external cache. By way of exemplary but not restrictive description, many forms of RAM are available, such as static random access memory (static RAM, SRAM), dynamic random access memory (dynamic RAM, DRAM), and synchronous dynamic random access memory (synchronous DRAM, SDRAM), double data rate synchronous dynamic random access memory (double data rate SDRAM, DDR SDRAM), enhanced synchronous dynamic random access memory (enhanced SDRAM, ESDRAM), synchronous connection dynamic random access memory (synchlink DRAM, SLDRAM) ) And direct memory bus random access memory (direct rambus RAM, DR RAM). It should be noted that the memories of the systems and methods described herein are intended to include, but are not limited to, these and any other suitable types of memories.
根据本申请实施例提供的方法,本申请还提供一种计算机程序产品,该计算机程序产品包括:计算机程序代码,当该计算机程序代码在计算机上运行时,使得该计算机执行图4或图8所示实施例中的终端设备执行的方法或网络设备执行的方法。According to the method provided in the embodiments of the present application, the present application also provides a computer program product, the computer program product includes: computer program code, when the computer program code runs on a computer, the computer executes the steps shown in FIG. 4 or FIG. 8 The method executed by the terminal device or the method executed by the network device in the embodiment is shown.
根据本申请实施例提供的方法,本申请还提供一种计算机可读存储介质,该计算机可读存储介质存储有程序代码,当该程序代码在计算机上运行时,使得该计算机执行图4或图8所示实施例中的终端设备执行的方法或网络设备执行的方法。According to the method provided in the embodiments of the present application, the present application also provides a computer-readable storage medium that stores program code, and when the program code runs on a computer, the computer executes FIG. 4 or FIG. The method executed by the terminal device or the method executed by the network device in the embodiment shown in 8.
根据本申请实施例提供的方法,本申请还提供一种系统,其包括前述的一个或多个终端设备以及一个或多个网络设备。According to the method provided in the embodiment of the present application, the present application also provides a system, which includes the aforementioned one or more terminal devices and one or more network devices.
上述各个装置实施例中网络设备与终端设备和方法实施例中的网络设备或终端设备完全对应,由相应的模块或单元执行相应的步骤,例如通信单元(收发器)执行方法实施例中接收或发送的步骤,除发送、接收外的其它步骤可以由处理单元(处理器)执行。具体单元的功能可以参考相应的方法实施例。其中,处理器可以为一个或多个。The network equipment in each of the above-mentioned device embodiments corresponds completely to the network equipment or terminal equipment in the terminal equipment and method embodiments, and the corresponding modules or units execute the corresponding steps. For example, the communication unit (transceiver) executes the receiving or the terminal equipment in the method embodiments. In the sending step, other steps except sending and receiving can be executed by the processing unit (processor). For the functions of specific units, refer to the corresponding method embodiments. Among them, there may be one or more processors.
上述实施例中,终端设备可以作为接收设备的一例,网络设备可以作为发送设备的一例。但这不应对本申请构成任何限定。例如,发送设备和接收设备也可以均为终端设备等。本申请对于发送设备和接收设备的具体类型不作限定。In the foregoing embodiment, the terminal device may be used as an example of the receiving device, and the network device may be used as an example of the sending device. But this should not constitute any limitation to this application. For example, the sending device and the receiving device may both be terminal devices and the like. This application does not limit the specific types of sending equipment and receiving equipment.
在本说明书中使用的术语“部件”、“模块”、“系统”等用于表示计算机相关的实体、硬件、固件、硬件和软件的组合、软件、或执行中的软件。例如,部件可以是但不限于,在处理器上运行的进程、处理器、对象、可执行文件、执行线程、程序和/或计算机。通过图示,在计算设备上运行的应用和计算设备都可以是部件。一个或多个部件可驻留在进程和/或执行线程中,部件可位于一个计算机上和/或分布在2个或更多个计算机之间。此外,这些部件可从在上面存储有各种数据结构的各种计算机可读介质执行。部件可例如根据具有一个或多个数据分组(例如来自与本地系统、分布式系统和/或网络间的另一部件交互的二个部件的数据,例如通过信号与其它系统交互的互联网)的信号通过本地和/或远程进程来通信。The terms "component", "module", "system", etc. used in this specification are used to denote computer-related entities, hardware, firmware, a combination of hardware and software, software, or software in execution. For example, the component may be, but is not limited to, a process, a processor, an object, an executable file, an execution thread, a program, and/or a computer running on a processor. Through the illustration, both the application running on the computing device and the computing device can be components. One or more components may reside in processes and/or threads of execution, and components may be located on one computer and/or distributed among two or more computers. In addition, these components can be executed from various computer readable media having various data structures stored thereon. The component can be based on, for example, a signal having one or more data packets (e.g. data from two components interacting with another component in a local system, a distributed system, and/or a network, such as the Internet that interacts with other systems through a signal) Communicate through local and/or remote processes.
本领域普通技术人员可以意识到,结合本文中所公开的实施例描述的各示例的单元及算法步骤,能够以电子硬件、或者计算机软件和电子硬件的结合来实现。这些功能究竟以硬件还是软件方式来执行,取决于技术方案的特定应用和设计约束条件。专业技术人员可以对每个特定的应用来使用不同方法来实现所描述的功能,但是这种实现不应认为超出本申请的范围。A person of ordinary skill in the art may realize that the units and algorithm steps of the examples described in combination with the embodiments disclosed herein can be implemented by electronic hardware or a combination of computer software and electronic hardware. Whether these functions are executed by hardware or software depends on the specific application and design constraint conditions of the technical solution. Professionals and technicians can use different methods for each specific application to implement the described functions, but such implementation should not be considered beyond the scope of this application.
所属领域的技术人员可以清楚地了解到,为描述的方便和简洁,上述描述的系统、装置和单元的具体工作过程,可以参考前述方法实施例中的对应过程,在此不再赘述。Those skilled in the art can clearly understand that, for the convenience and conciseness of description, the specific working process of the system, device and unit described above can refer to the corresponding process in the foregoing method embodiment, which will not be repeated here.
在本申请所提供的几个实施例中,应该理解到,所揭露的系统、装置和方法,可以通过其它的方式实现。例如,以上所描述的装置实施例仅仅是示意性的,例如,所述单元的划分,仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分,实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式,例如多个单元或组件可以结合或者可以集成到另一个系统,或一些特征可以忽略,或不执行。另一点,所显示或讨论的相互之间的耦合或直接耦合或通信连接可以是通过一些接口,装置或单元的间接耦合或通信连接,可以是电性,机械或其它的形式。In the several embodiments provided in this application, it should be understood that the disclosed system, device, and method can be implemented in other ways. For example, the device embodiments described above are merely illustrative, for example, the division of the units is only a logical function division, and there may be other divisions in actual implementation, for example, multiple units or components may be combined or It can be integrated into another system, or some features can be ignored or not implemented. In addition, the displayed or discussed mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection may be indirect coupling or communication connection through some interfaces, devices or units, and may be in electrical, mechanical or other forms.
所述作为分离部件说明的单元可以是或者也可以不是物理上分开的,作为单元显示的部件可以是或者也可以不是物理单元,即可以位于一个地方,或者也可以分布到多个网络单元上。可以根据实际的需要选择其中的部分或者全部单元来实现本实施例方案的目的。The units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and the components displayed as units may or may not be physical units, that is, they may be located in one place, or they may be distributed on multiple network units. Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the objectives of the solutions of the embodiments.
另外,在本申请各个实施例中的各功能单元可以集成在一个处理单元中,也可以是各个单元单独物理存在,也可以两个或两个以上单元集成在一个单元中。In addition, the functional units in the various embodiments of the present application may be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit may exist alone physically, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit.
所述功能如果以软件功能单元的形式实现并作为独立的产品销售或使用时,可以存储在一个计算机可读取存储介质中。基于这样的理解,本申请的技术方案本质上或者说对现有技术做出贡献的部分或者该技术方案的部分可以以软件产品的形式体现出来,该计算机软件产品存储在一个存储介质中,包括若干指令用以使得一台计算机设备(可以是个人计算机,服务器,或者网络设备等)执行本申请各个实施例所述方法的全部或部分步骤。而前述的存储介质包括:U盘、移动硬盘、只读存储器(Read-Only Memory,ROM)、随机存取存储器(Random Access Memory,RAM)、磁碟或者光盘等各种可以存储程序代码的介质。If the function is implemented in the form of a software functional unit and sold or used as an independent product, it can be stored in a computer readable storage medium. Based on this understanding, the technical solution of the present application essentially or the part that contributes to the existing technology or the part of the technical solution can be embodied in the form of a software product, and the computer software product is stored in a storage medium, including Several instructions are used to make a computer device (which may be a personal computer, a server, or a network device, etc.) execute all or part of the steps of the methods described in the various embodiments of the present application. The aforementioned storage media include: U disk, mobile hard disk, read-only memory (Read-Only Memory, ROM), random access memory (Random Access Memory, RAM), magnetic disk or optical disk and other media that can store program code .
以上所述,仅为本申请的具体实施方式,但本申请的保护范围并不局限于此,任何熟悉本技术领域的技术人员在本申请揭露的技术范围内,可轻易想到变化或替换,都应涵盖在本申请的保护范围之内。因此,本申请的保护范围应以所述权利要求的保护范围为准。The above are only specific implementations of this application, but the protection scope of this application is not limited to this. Any person skilled in the art can easily think of changes or substitutions within the technical scope disclosed in this application. Should be covered within the scope of protection of this application. Therefore, the protection scope of this application should be subject to the protection scope of the claims.

Claims (56)

  1. 一种信道测量方法,其特征在于,包括:A channel measurement method, characterized in that it comprises:
    生成第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息基于接收到的预编码参考信号确定,所述预编码参考信号的预编码由K个角度时延对确定,所述K个角度时延对中的每个角度时延对包括一个角度向量和一个时延向量;所述第一指示信息用于指示与所述K个角度时延对对应的K个加权系数,所述K个角度时延对及其对应的所述K个加权系数用于构建预编码矩阵;所述K个加权系数中的每个加权系数基于N个频域单元中的部分频域单元上承载的预编码参考信号确定;其中,N为导频传输带宽中包含的频域单元数,K和N均为大于1的整数;Generate first indication information, the first indication information is determined based on the received precoding reference signal, the precoding of the precoding reference signal is determined by K angle delay pairs, and among the K angle delay pairs Each angle delay pair includes an angle vector and a delay vector; the first indication information is used to indicate K weighting coefficients corresponding to the K angle delay pairs, the K angle delay pairs and The corresponding K weighting coefficients are used to construct a precoding matrix; each weighting coefficient of the K weighting coefficients is determined based on the precoding reference signal carried on part of the N frequency domain units; where , N is the number of frequency domain units included in the pilot transmission bandwidth, K and N are both integers greater than 1;
    发送所述第一指示信息。Sending the first instruction information.
  2. 如权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述K个加权系数中的每个加权系数由在所述N个频域单元中的至少一个频域单元上接收到的预编码参考信号确定,所述至少一个频域单元为所述N个频域单元中的部分频域单元,且所述至少一个频域单元中的任意两个频域单元之间至少间隔Q/D-1个频域单元;Q为大于1的整数,Q<K;D为导频密度,0<D≤1;Q/D为整数。The method according to claim 1, wherein each of the K weighting coefficients is determined by a precoding reference signal received on at least one of the N frequency domain units , The at least one frequency domain unit is part of the N frequency domain units, and any two frequency domain units in the at least one frequency domain unit are separated by at least Q/D-1 frequency Domain unit; Q is an integer greater than 1, Q<K; D is the pilot density, 0<D≤1; Q/D is an integer.
  3. 如权利要求2所述的方法,其特征在于,所述K个加权系数中的每个加权系数是基于在所述至少一个频域单元上接收到的预编码参考信号所确定的至少一个估计值的和,所述至少一个估计值中的每个估计值是基于在所述至少一个频域单元中的一个频域单元上接收到的预编码参考信号进行信道估计得到的。The method according to claim 2, wherein each of the K weighting coefficients is based on at least one estimated value determined based on the precoding reference signal received on the at least one frequency domain unit Each of the at least one estimated value is obtained by performing channel estimation based on a precoding reference signal received on one of the at least one frequency domain unit.
  4. 如权利要求2或3所述的方法,其特征在于,所述预编码参考信号与P个参考信号端口对应,每个参考信号端口对应的预编码参考信号的预编码包括空域权值和频域权值,每个参考信号端口对应的预编码参考信号的预编码由所述K个角度时延对中的Q个角度时延对确定;P<K,P为正整数。The method according to claim 2 or 3, wherein the precoding reference signal corresponds to P reference signal ports, and the precoding of the precoding reference signal corresponding to each reference signal port includes spatial weights and frequency domains. The weight value, the precoding of the precoding reference signal corresponding to each reference signal port is determined by the Q angle delay pairs among the K angle delay pairs; P<K, and P is a positive integer.
  5. 如权利要求4所述的方法,其特征在于,所述Q个角度时延对包含的Q个角度向量为Q个空域权值向量,所述Q个空域权值向量中的每个空域权值向量包括多个空域权值;所述Q个空域权值向量用于交替地对承载于所述N个频域单元上的参考信号做预编码;The method according to claim 4, wherein the Q angle vectors included in the Q angle delay pairs are Q airspace weight vectors, and each airspace weight in the Q airspace weight vectors The vector includes multiple spatial weights; the Q spatial weight vectors are used to alternately precode the reference signals carried on the N frequency domain units;
    所述Q个角度时延对包含的Q个时延向量用于确定N个频域权值,所述N个频域权值与所述N个频域单元对应,以用于对承载于所述N个频域单元上的参考信号做预编码。The Q delay vectors included in the Q angle delay pairs are used to determine N frequency domain weights, and the N frequency domain weights correspond to the N frequency domain units for the The reference signals on the N frequency domain units are pre-encoded.
  6. 如权利要求4或5所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 4 or 5, wherein the method further comprises:
    接收第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于指示对所述K个加权系数的上报规则。Receiving second indication information, where the second indication information is used to indicate a reporting rule for the K weighting coefficients.
  7. 如权利要求6所述的方法,其特征在于,所述K个加权系数中的系数c p,q对应于所述P个参考信号端口中的第p个参考信号端口、与所述第p个参考信号端口对应的Q个角度时延对中的第q个角度时延对,1≤p≤P,1≤q≤Q,均为整数; The method according to claim 6, wherein the coefficients c p, q in the K weighting coefficients correspond to the p-th reference signal port among the P reference signal ports, and the p-th reference signal port is different from the p-th reference signal port. The qth angle delay pair of the Q angle delay pairs corresponding to the reference signal port, 1≤p≤P, 1≤q≤Q, all integers;
    所述上报规则包括:从1至P对p依次取值,对于每一个p的取值,上报所对应的Q个系数;或者,从1至Q对q依次取值,对于每一个q的取值,上报所对应的P个系数。The reporting rules include: sequentially taking values from 1 to P to p, for each value of p, reporting the corresponding Q coefficients; or, taking values from 1 to Q to q in turn, and taking values for each q Value, P coefficients corresponding to the report.
  8. 如权利要求2或3所述的方法,其特征在于,所述预编码参考信号与K个参考信 号端口对应,每个参考信号端口对应的预编码参考信号的预编码由所述K个角度时延对中的一个确定。The method according to claim 2 or 3, wherein the precoding reference signal corresponds to K reference signal ports, and the precoding of the precoding reference signal corresponding to each reference signal port is determined by the K angles. One of the extensions is confirmed.
  9. 如权利要求8所述的方法,其特征在于,所述K个参考信号端口中的每个参考信号端口对应的预编码参考信号的预编码包括一个空域权值向量和一个频域权值向量;所述K个参考信号端口中的第k个参考信号端口对应的预编码中的空域权值向量为所述K个角度时延对中的第k个角度时延对的角度向量,所述第k个参考信号端口对应的频域权值向量由所述第k个角度时延对的时延向量确定。8. The method according to claim 8, wherein the precoding of the precoding reference signal corresponding to each of the K reference signal ports comprises a spatial domain weight vector and a frequency domain weight vector; The spatial weight vector in the precoding corresponding to the k-th reference signal port among the K reference signal ports is the angle vector of the k-th angle-delay pair in the K-th angle-delay pair, and the The frequency domain weight vector corresponding to the k reference signal ports is determined by the delay vector of the k-th angle delay pair.
  10. 如权利要求2至9中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 2 to 9, wherein the method further comprises:
    接收第三指示信息,所述第三指示信息用于指示Q的值。Receive third indication information, where the third indication information is used to indicate the value of Q.
  11. 如权利要求2至9中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,Q的值为预定义值。The method according to any one of claims 2 to 9, wherein the value of Q is a predefined value.
  12. 一种信道测量方法,其特征在于,包括:A channel measurement method, characterized in that it comprises:
    接收第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息基于预编码参考信号确定,所述预编码参考信号的预编码由K个角度时延对确定,所述K个角度时延对中的每个角度时延对包括一个角度向量和一个时延向量;所述第一指示信息用于指示与所述K个角度时延对对应的K个加权系数,所述K个角度时延对及其对应的所述K个加权系数用于构建预编码矩阵;所述K个加权系数中的每个加权系数基于N个频域单元中的部分频域单元上承载的预编码参考信号确定;其中,N为导频传输带宽包含的频域单元数,K和N均为大于1的整数;Receive first indication information, where the first indication information is determined based on a precoding reference signal, the precoding of the precoding reference signal is determined by K angle delay pairs, and each angle of the K angle delay pairs The delay pair includes an angle vector and a delay vector; the first indication information is used to indicate K weighting coefficients corresponding to the K angle delay pairs, the K angle delay pairs and their corresponding The K weighting coefficients are used to construct a precoding matrix; each weighting coefficient of the K weighting coefficients is determined based on the precoding reference signal carried on some of the N frequency domain units; where N is The number of frequency domain units included in the pilot transmission bandwidth, K and N are both integers greater than 1;
    基于所述第一指示信息确定各频域单元对应的预编码矩阵。The precoding matrix corresponding to each frequency domain unit is determined based on the first indication information.
  13. 如权利要求12所述的方法,其特征在于,所述K个加权系数中的每个加权系数由在所述N个频域单元中的至少一个频域单元上接收到的预编码参考信号确定,所述至少一个频域单元为所述N个频域单元中的部分频域单元,且所述至少一个频域单元中的任意两个频域单元之间至少间隔Q/D-1个频域单元;Q为大于1的整数,Q<K;D为导频密度,0<D≤1;Q/D为整数。The method of claim 12, wherein each of the K weighting coefficients is determined by a precoding reference signal received on at least one of the N frequency domain units , The at least one frequency domain unit is part of the N frequency domain units, and any two frequency domain units in the at least one frequency domain unit are separated by at least Q/D-1 frequency Domain unit; Q is an integer greater than 1, Q<K; D is the pilot density, 0<D≤1; Q/D is an integer.
  14. 如权利要求13所述的方法,其特征在于,所述预编码参考信号与P个参考信号端口对应,每个参考信号端口对应的预编码参考信号的预编码包括空域权值和频域权值,每个参考信号端口对应的预编码参考信号的预编码由所述K个角度时延对中的Q个角度时延对确定;P<K,P为正整数。The method according to claim 13, wherein the precoding reference signal corresponds to P reference signal ports, and the precoding of the precoding reference signal corresponding to each reference signal port includes spatial domain weights and frequency domain weights , The precoding of the precoding reference signal corresponding to each reference signal port is determined by the Q angle delay pairs among the K angle delay pairs; P<K, and P is a positive integer.
  15. 如权利要求14所述的方法,其特征在于,所述Q个角度时延对包含的Q个角度向量为Q个空域权值向量,所述Q个空域权值向量中的每个空域权值向量包括多个空域权值;所述Q个空域权值向量用于交替地对承载于所述N个频域单元上的参考信号做预编码;The method according to claim 14, wherein the Q angle vectors contained in the Q angle delay pairs are Q airspace weight vectors, and each airspace weight in the Q airspace weight vectors The vector includes multiple spatial weights; the Q spatial weight vectors are used to alternately precode the reference signals carried on the N frequency domain units;
    所述Q个角度时延对包含的Q个时延向量用于确定N个频域权值,所述N个频域权值与所述N个频域单元对应,以用于对承载于所述N个频域单元上的参考信号做预编码。The Q delay vectors included in the Q angle delay pairs are used to determine N frequency domain weights, and the N frequency domain weights correspond to the N frequency domain units for the The reference signals on the N frequency domain units are pre-encoded.
  16. 如权利要求14或15所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 14 or 15, wherein the method further comprises:
    发送第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于指示对所述K个加权系数的上报规则。Sending second indication information, where the second indication information is used to indicate a reporting rule for the K weighting coefficients.
  17. 如权利要求16所述的方法,其特征在于,所述K个加权系数中的系数c p,q对应于所述P个参考信号端口中的第p个参考信号端口、与所述第p个参考信号端口对应的Q个角度时延对中的第q个角度时延对,1≤p≤P,1≤q≤Q,均为整数; The method according to claim 16, wherein the coefficients c p, q in the K weighting coefficients correspond to the p-th reference signal port among the P reference signal ports, and the p-th reference signal port is the same as the p-th reference signal port. The qth angle delay pair of the Q angle delay pairs corresponding to the reference signal port, 1≤p≤P, 1≤q≤Q, all integers;
    所述上报规则包括:从1至P对p依次取值,对于每一个p的取值,上报所对应的Q 个系数;或者,从1至Q对q依次取值,对于每一个q的取值,上报所对应的P个系数。The reporting rules include: sequentially taking values from 1 to P to p, and for each value of p, reporting the corresponding Q coefficients; or, taking values from 1 to Q to q in turn, and taking values for each q Value, P coefficients corresponding to the report.
  18. 如权利要求13所述的方法,其特征在于,所述预编码参考信号与K个参考信号端口对应,每个参考信号端口对应的预编码参考信号的预编码由所述K个角度时延对中的一个确定。The method according to claim 13, wherein the precoding reference signal corresponds to K reference signal ports, and the precoding of the precoding reference signal corresponding to each reference signal port is determined by the K angle delay pair One of them is ok.
  19. 如权利要求18所述的方法,其特征在于,所述K个参考信号端口中的每个参考信号端口对应的预编码参考信号的预编码包括一个空域权值向量和一个频域权值向量;所述K个参考信号端口中的第k个参考信号端口对应的预编码中的空域权值向量为所述K个角度时延对中的第k个角度时延对的角度向量,所述第k个参考信号端口对应的频域权值向量由所述第k个角度时延对的时延向量确定。The method according to claim 18, wherein the precoding of the precoding reference signal corresponding to each of the K reference signal ports includes a spatial domain weight vector and a frequency domain weight vector; The spatial weight vector in the precoding corresponding to the k-th reference signal port among the K reference signal ports is the angle vector of the k-th angle-delay pair in the K-th angle-delay pair, and the The frequency domain weight vector corresponding to the k reference signal ports is determined by the delay vector of the k-th angle delay pair.
  20. 如权利要求13至19中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 13 to 19, wherein the method further comprises:
    发送第三指示信息,所述第三指示信息用于指示Q的值。Send third indication information, where the third indication information is used to indicate the value of Q.
  21. 如权利要求13至19中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,Q的值为预定义值。The method according to any one of claims 13 to 19, wherein the value of Q is a predefined value.
  22. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括:A communication device, characterized in that it comprises:
    处理单元,用于生成第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息基于接收到的预编码参考信号确定,所述预编码参考信号的预编码由K个角度时延对确定,所述K个角度时延对中的每个角度时延对包括一个角度向量和一个时延向量;所述第一指示信息用于指示与所述K个角度时延对对应的K个加权系数,所述K个角度时延对及其对应的所述K个加权系数用于构建预编码矩阵;所述K个加权系数中的每个加权系数基于N个频域单元中的部分频域单元上承载的预编码参考信号确定;其中,N为导频传输带宽中包含的频域单元数,K和N均为大于1的整数;The processing unit is configured to generate first indication information, the first indication information being determined based on the received precoding reference signal, the precoding of the precoding reference signal is determined by K angle delay pairs, and the K angles Each angle delay pair in the delay pair includes an angle vector and a delay vector; the first indication information is used to indicate K weighting coefficients corresponding to the K angle delay pairs, and the K The angle delay pair and the corresponding K weighting coefficients are used to construct a precoding matrix; each of the K weighting coefficients is based on the precoding carried on part of the N frequency domain units Reference signal determination; where N is the number of frequency domain units included in the pilot transmission bandwidth, and both K and N are integers greater than 1;
    收发单元,用于发送所述第一指示信息。The transceiver unit is configured to send the first indication information.
  23. 如权利要求22所述的装置,其特征在于,所述K个加权系数中的每个加权系数由在所述N个频域单元中的至少一个频域单元上接收到的预编码参考信号确定,所述至少一个频域单元为所述N个频域单元中的部分频域单元,且所述至少一个频域单元中的任意两个频域单元之间至少间隔Q/D-1个频域单元;Q为大于1的整数,Q<K;D为导频密度,0<D≤1;Q/D为整数。The apparatus according to claim 22, wherein each of the K weighting coefficients is determined by a precoding reference signal received on at least one of the N frequency domain units , The at least one frequency domain unit is part of the N frequency domain units, and any two frequency domain units in the at least one frequency domain unit are separated by at least Q/D-1 frequency Domain unit; Q is an integer greater than 1, Q<K; D is the pilot density, 0<D≤1; Q/D is an integer.
  24. 如权利要求23所述的装置,其特征在于,所述K个加权系数中的每个加权系数是基于在所述至少一个频域单元上接收到的预编码参考信号所确定的至少一个估计值的和,所述至少一个估计值中的每个估计值是基于在所述至少一个频域单元中的一个频域单元上接收到的预编码参考信号进行信道估计得到的。The apparatus of claim 23, wherein each of the K weighting coefficients is based on at least one estimated value determined based on a precoding reference signal received on the at least one frequency domain unit Each of the at least one estimated value is obtained by performing channel estimation based on a precoding reference signal received on one of the at least one frequency domain unit.
  25. 如权利要求23或24所述的装置,其特征在于,所述预编码参考信号与P个参考信号端口对应,每个参考信号端口对应的预编码参考信号的预编码包括空域权值和频域权值,每个参考信号端口对应的预编码参考信号的预编码由所述K个角度时延对中的Q个角度时延对确定;P<K,P为正整数。The apparatus according to claim 23 or 24, wherein the precoding reference signal corresponds to P reference signal ports, and the precoding of the precoding reference signal corresponding to each reference signal port includes spatial weights and frequency domains. The weight value, the precoding of the precoding reference signal corresponding to each reference signal port is determined by the Q angle delay pairs among the K angle delay pairs; P<K, and P is a positive integer.
  26. 如权利要求25所述的装置,其特征在于,所述Q个角度时延对包含的Q个角度向量为Q个空域权值向量,所述Q个空域权值向量中的每个空域权值向量包括多个空域权值;所述Q个空域权值向量用于交替地对承载于所述N个频域单元上的参考信号做预编码;The device of claim 25, wherein the Q angle vectors included in the Q angle delay pairs are Q airspace weight vectors, and each airspace weight in the Q airspace weight vectors The vector includes multiple spatial weights; the Q spatial weight vectors are used to alternately precode the reference signals carried on the N frequency domain units;
    所述Q个角度时延对包含的Q个时延向量用于确定N个频域权值,所述N个频域权 值与所述N个频域单元对应,以用于对承载于所述N个频域单元上的参考信号做预编码。The Q delay vectors included in the Q angle delay pairs are used to determine N frequency domain weights, and the N frequency domain weights correspond to the N frequency domain units for the The reference signals on the N frequency domain units are pre-encoded.
  27. 如权利要求25或26所述的装置,其特征在于,所述收发单元还用于,接收第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于指示对所述K个加权系数的上报规则。The apparatus according to claim 25 or 26, wherein the transceiver unit is further configured to receive second indication information, and the second indication information is used to indicate a reporting rule for the K weighting coefficients.
  28. 如权利要求27所述的装置,其特征在于,所述K个加权系数中的系数c p,q对应于所述P个参考信号端口中的第p个参考信号端口、与所述第p个参考信号端口对应的Q个角度时延对中的第q个角度时延对,1≤p≤P,1≤q≤Q,均为整数; The apparatus according to claim 27, wherein the coefficients c p and q in the K weighting coefficients correspond to the p-th reference signal port among the P reference signal ports, and the p-th reference signal port is the same as the p-th reference signal port. The qth angle delay pair of the Q angle delay pairs corresponding to the reference signal port, 1≤p≤P, 1≤q≤Q, all integers;
    所述上报规则包括:从1至P对p依次取值,对于每一个p的取值,上报所对应的Q个系数;或者,从1至Q对q依次取值,对于每一个q的取值,上报所对应的P个系数。The reporting rules include: sequentially taking values from 1 to P to p, for each value of p, reporting the corresponding Q coefficients; or, taking values from 1 to Q to q in turn, and taking values for each q Value, P coefficients corresponding to the report.
  29. 如权利要求23或24所述的装置,其特征在于,所述预编码参考信号与K个参考信号端口对应,每个参考信号端口对应的预编码参考信号的预编码由所述K个角度时延对中的一个确定。The apparatus according to claim 23 or 24, wherein the precoding reference signal corresponds to K reference signal ports, and the precoding of the precoding reference signal corresponding to each reference signal port is determined by the K angles. One of the extensions is confirmed.
  30. 如权利要求29所述的装置,其特征在于,所述K个参考信号端口中的每个参考信号端口对应的预编码参考信号的预编码包括一个空域权值向量和一个频域权值向量;所述K个参考信号端口中的第k个参考信号端口对应的预编码中的空域权值向量为所述K个角度时延对中的第k个角度时延对的角度向量,所述第k个参考信号端口对应的频域权值向量由所述第k个角度时延对的时延向量确定。The apparatus according to claim 29, wherein the precoding of the precoding reference signal corresponding to each of the K reference signal ports includes a spatial domain weight vector and a frequency domain weight vector; The spatial weight vector in the precoding corresponding to the k-th reference signal port among the K reference signal ports is the angle vector of the k-th angle-delay pair in the K-th angle-delay pair, and the The frequency domain weight vector corresponding to the k reference signal ports is determined by the delay vector of the k-th angle delay pair.
  31. 如权利要求23至30中任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,所述收发单元还用于,接收第三指示信息,所述第三指示信息用于指示Q的值。The apparatus according to any one of claims 23 to 30, wherein the transceiver unit is further configured to receive third indication information, and the third indication information is used to indicate the value of Q.
  32. 如权利要求23至30中任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,Q的值为预定义值。The device according to any one of claims 23 to 30, wherein the value of Q is a predefined value.
  33. 如权利要求22至32中任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,所述处理单元为处理器,所述收发单元为收发器。The device according to any one of claims 22 to 32, wherein the processing unit is a processor, and the transceiving unit is a transceiver.
  34. 如权利要求22至33中任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,所述装置为终端设备。The device according to any one of claims 22 to 33, wherein the device is a terminal device.
  35. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括:A communication device, characterized in that it comprises:
    收发单元,用于接收第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息基于预编码参考信号确定,所述预编码参考信号的预编码由K个角度时延对确定,所述K个角度时延对中的每个角度时延对包括一个角度向量和一个时延向量;所述第一指示信息用于指示与所述K个角度时延对对应的K个加权系数,所述K个角度时延对及其对应的所述K个加权系数用于构建预编码矩阵;所述K个加权系数中的每个加权系数基于N个频域单元中的部分频域单元上承载的预编码参考信号确定;其中,N为导频传输带宽包含的频域单元数,K和N均为大于1的整数;The transceiver unit is configured to receive first indication information, the first indication information being determined based on a precoding reference signal, the precoding of the precoding reference signal is determined by K angle delay pairs, and the K angle delay pairs Each angle delay pair in includes an angle vector and a delay vector; the first indication information is used to indicate K weighting coefficients corresponding to the K angle delay pairs, and the K angle delay pairs The K weighting coefficients and the corresponding K weighting coefficients are used to construct a precoding matrix; each weighting coefficient of the K weighting coefficients is determined based on the precoding reference signal carried on part of the N frequency domain units ; Among them, N is the number of frequency domain units included in the pilot transmission bandwidth, and both K and N are integers greater than 1;
    处理单元,用于基于所述第一指示信息确定各频域单元对应的预编码矩阵。The processing unit is configured to determine a precoding matrix corresponding to each frequency domain unit based on the first indication information.
  36. 如权利要求35所述的装置,其特征在于,所述K个加权系数中的每个加权系数由在所述N个频域单元中的至少一个频域单元上接收到的预编码参考信号确定,所述至少一个频域单元为所述N个频域单元中的部分频域单元,且所述至少一个频域单元中的任意两个频域单元之间至少间隔Q/D-1个频域单元;Q为大于1的整数,Q<K;D为导频密度,0<D≤1;Q/D为整数。The apparatus according to claim 35, wherein each of the K weighting coefficients is determined by a precoding reference signal received on at least one of the N frequency domain units , The at least one frequency domain unit is part of the N frequency domain units, and any two frequency domain units in the at least one frequency domain unit are separated by at least Q/D-1 frequency Domain unit; Q is an integer greater than 1, Q<K; D is the pilot density, 0<D≤1; Q/D is an integer.
  37. 如权利要求36所述的装置,其特征在于,所述预编码参考信号与P个参考信号端口对应,每个参考信号端口对应的预编码参考信号的预编码包括空域权值和频域权值,每个参考信号端口对应的预编码参考信号的预编码由所述K个角度时延对中的Q个角度 时延对确定;P<K,P为正整数。The apparatus according to claim 36, wherein the precoding reference signal corresponds to P reference signal ports, and the precoding of the precoding reference signal corresponding to each reference signal port includes a spatial domain weight and a frequency domain weight , The precoding of the precoding reference signal corresponding to each reference signal port is determined by the Q angle delay pairs among the K angle delay pairs; P<K, and P is a positive integer.
  38. 如权利要求37所述的装置,其特征在于,所述Q个角度时延对包含的Q个角度向量为Q个空域权值向量,所述Q个空域权值向量中的每个空域权值向量包括多个空域权值;所述Q个空域权值向量用于交替地对承载于所述N个频域单元上的参考信号做预编码;The device of claim 37, wherein the Q angle vectors included in the Q angle delay pairs are Q airspace weight vectors, and each airspace weight in the Q airspace weight vectors The vector includes multiple spatial weights; the Q spatial weight vectors are used to alternately precode the reference signals carried on the N frequency domain units;
    所述Q个角度时延对包含的Q个时延向量用于确定N个频域权值,所述N个频域权值与所述N个频域单元对应,以用于对承载于所述N个频域单元上的参考信号做预编码。The Q delay vectors included in the Q angle delay pairs are used to determine N frequency domain weights, and the N frequency domain weights correspond to the N frequency domain units for the The reference signals on the N frequency domain units are pre-encoded.
  39. 如权利要求37或38所述的装置,其特征在于,所述收发单元还用于,发送第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于指示对所述K个加权系数的上报规则。The apparatus according to claim 37 or 38, wherein the transceiver unit is further configured to send second indication information, and the second indication information is used to indicate a reporting rule for the K weighting coefficients.
  40. 如权利要求39所述的装置,其特征在于,所述K个加权系数中的系数c p,q对应于所述P个参考信号端口中的第p个参考信号端口、与所述第p个参考信号端口对应的Q个角度时延对中的第q个角度时延对,1≤p≤P,1≤q≤Q,均为整数; The apparatus according to claim 39, wherein the coefficients c p, q in the K weighting coefficients correspond to the p-th reference signal port among the P reference signal ports, and the p-th reference signal port is different from the p-th reference signal port. The qth angle delay pair of the Q angle delay pairs corresponding to the reference signal port, 1≤p≤P, 1≤q≤Q, all integers;
    所述上报规则包括:从1至P对p依次取值,对于每一个p的取值,上报所对应的Q个系数;或者,从1至Q对q依次取值,对于每一个q的取值,上报所对应的P个系数。The reporting rules include: sequentially taking values from 1 to P to p, for each value of p, reporting the corresponding Q coefficients; or, taking values from 1 to Q to q in turn, and taking values for each q Value, P coefficients corresponding to the report.
  41. 如权利要求36所述的装置,其特征在于,所述预编码参考信号与K个参考信号端口对应,每个参考信号端口对应的预编码参考信号的预编码由所述K个角度时延对中的一个确定。The apparatus according to claim 36, wherein the precoding reference signal corresponds to K reference signal ports, and the precoding of the precoding reference signal corresponding to each reference signal port is determined by the K angle delay pair One of them is ok.
  42. 如权利要求41所述的装置,其特征在于,所述K个参考信号端口中的每个参考信号端口对应的预编码参考信号的预编码包括一个空域权值向量和一个频域权值向量;所述K个参考信号端口中的第k个参考信号端口对应的预编码中的空域权值向量为所述K个角度时延对中的第k个角度时延对的角度向量,所述第k个参考信号端口对应的频域权值向量由所述第k个角度时延对的时延向量确定。The apparatus according to claim 41, wherein the precoding of the precoding reference signal corresponding to each of the K reference signal ports comprises a spatial domain weight vector and a frequency domain weight vector; The spatial weight vector in the precoding corresponding to the k-th reference signal port among the K reference signal ports is the angle vector of the k-th angle-delay pair in the K-th angle-delay pair, and the The frequency domain weight vector corresponding to the k reference signal ports is determined by the delay vector of the k-th angle delay pair.
  43. 如权利要求36至42中任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,所述收发单元还用于,发送第三指示信息,所述第三指示信息用于指示Q的值。The device according to any one of claims 36 to 42, wherein the transceiver unit is further configured to send third indication information, and the third indication information is used to indicate the value of Q.
  44. 如权利要求36至42中任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,Q的值为预定义值。The device according to any one of claims 36 to 42, wherein the value of Q is a predefined value.
  45. 如权利要求35至44中任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,所述处理单元为处理器,所述收发单元为收发器。The device according to any one of claims 35 to 44, wherein the processing unit is a processor, and the transceiving unit is a transceiver.
  46. 如权利要求35至45中任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,所述装置为网络设备。The device according to any one of claims 35 to 45, wherein the device is a network device.
  47. 一种处理装置,其特征在于,包括至少一个处理器,所述至少一个处理器用于执行存储器中存储的计算机程序,以使得所述装置实现如权利要求1至11中任一项所述的方法。A processing device, characterized by comprising at least one processor configured to execute a computer program stored in a memory, so that the device implements the method according to any one of claims 1 to 11 .
  48. 一种处理装置,其特征在于,包括至少一个处理器,所述至少一个处理器用于执行存储器中存储的计算机程序,以使得所述装置实现如权利要求12至21中任一项所述的方法。A processing device, characterized by comprising at least one processor configured to execute a computer program stored in a memory, so that the device implements the method according to any one of claims 12 to 21 .
  49. 一种处理装置,其特征在于,包括:A processing device, characterized in that it comprises:
    通信接口,用于输入和/或输出信息;Communication interface, used to input and/or output information;
    处理器,用于执行计算机程序,以使得所述装置实现如权利要求1至11中任一项所述的方法。The processor is configured to execute a computer program, so that the device implements the method according to any one of claims 1 to 11.
  50. 一种处理装置,其特征在于,包括:A processing device, characterized in that it comprises:
    通信接口,用于输入和/或输出信息;Communication interface, used to input and/or output information;
    处理器,用于执行计算机程序,以使得所述装置实现如权利要求12至21中任一项所述的方法。The processor is configured to execute a computer program, so that the device implements the method according to any one of claims 12 to 21.
  51. 一种处理装置,其特征在于,包括:A processing device, characterized in that it comprises:
    存储器,用于存储计算机程序;Memory, used to store computer programs;
    处理器,用于从所述存储器调用并运行所述计算机程序,以使得所述装置实现如权利要求1至11中任一项所述的方法。The processor is configured to call and run the computer program from the memory, so that the device implements the method according to any one of claims 1 to 11.
  52. 一种处理装置,其特征在于,包括:A processing device, characterized in that it comprises:
    存储器,用于存储计算机程序;Memory, used to store computer programs;
    处理器,用于从所述存储器调用并运行所述计算机程序,以使得所述装置实现如权利要求12至21中任一项所述的方法。The processor is configured to call and run the computer program from the memory, so that the device implements the method according to any one of claims 12 to 21.
  53. 一种计算机可读存储介质,其特征在于,包括计算机程序,当所述计算机程序在计算机上运行时,使得所述计算机执行如权利要求1至11中任一项所述的方法。A computer-readable storage medium, characterized by comprising a computer program, which when the computer program runs on a computer, causes the computer to execute the method according to any one of claims 1 to 11.
  54. 一种计算机可读存储介质,其特征在于,包括计算机程序,当所述计算机程序在计算机上运行时,使得所述计算机执行如权利要求12至21中任一项所述的方法。A computer-readable storage medium, characterized by comprising a computer program, which when the computer program runs on a computer, causes the computer to execute the method according to any one of claims 12 to 21.
  55. 一种计算机程序产品,所述计算机程序产品包括计算机程序,当所述计算机程序在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行如权利要求1至11中任一项所述的方法。A computer program product, the computer program product comprising a computer program, when the computer program is run on a computer, the computer is caused to execute the method according to any one of claims 1 to 11.
  56. 一种计算机程序产品,所述计算机程序产品包括计算机程序,当所述计算机程序在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行如权利要求12至21中任一项所述的方法。A computer program product, the computer program product comprising a computer program, when the computer program is run on a computer, the computer is caused to execute the method according to any one of claims 12 to 21.
PCT/CN2020/084017 2020-04-09 2020-04-09 Channel measurement method and communication apparatus WO2021203373A1 (en)

Priority Applications (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
PCT/CN2020/084017 WO2021203373A1 (en) 2020-04-09 2020-04-09 Channel measurement method and communication apparatus
CN202080098856.0A CN115315906B (en) 2020-04-09 2020-04-09 Channel measurement method and communication device

Applications Claiming Priority (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
PCT/CN2020/084017 WO2021203373A1 (en) 2020-04-09 2020-04-09 Channel measurement method and communication apparatus

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2021203373A1 true WO2021203373A1 (en) 2021-10-14

Family

ID=78022438

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2020/084017 WO2021203373A1 (en) 2020-04-09 2020-04-09 Channel measurement method and communication apparatus

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (1) CN115315906B (en)
WO (1) WO2021203373A1 (en)

Cited By (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2023131256A1 (en) * 2022-01-06 2023-07-13 维沃移动通信有限公司 Channel measurement method, terminal and network side device
WO2023236535A1 (en) * 2022-06-10 2023-12-14 中兴通讯股份有限公司 Beamforming method and apparatus for channel state information-reference signal (csi-rs), and storage medium

Citations (7)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN107196749A (en) * 2013-12-31 2017-09-22 上海华为技术有限公司 A kind of channel condition information measurement, the sending method of reference signal and device
CN107370558A (en) * 2016-05-13 2017-11-21 北京华为数字技术有限公司 A kind of channel information sending method, data transmission method for uplink and equipment
CN107889141A (en) * 2016-09-30 2018-04-06 华为技术有限公司 Measurement and report method, terminal and base station
CN108631891A (en) * 2017-03-24 2018-10-09 中兴通讯股份有限公司 The measurement method and device of link between communication node
WO2018201495A1 (en) * 2017-05-05 2018-11-08 Zte Corporation Techniques for communicating beam information
CN108933745A (en) * 2018-07-16 2018-12-04 北京理工大学 A kind of broad-band channel estimation method estimated based on super-resolution angle and time delay
US20180358688A1 (en) * 2016-12-16 2018-12-13 Futurewei Technologies, Inc. High dimensional (hidi) radio environment characterization and representation

Patent Citations (7)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN107196749A (en) * 2013-12-31 2017-09-22 上海华为技术有限公司 A kind of channel condition information measurement, the sending method of reference signal and device
CN107370558A (en) * 2016-05-13 2017-11-21 北京华为数字技术有限公司 A kind of channel information sending method, data transmission method for uplink and equipment
CN107889141A (en) * 2016-09-30 2018-04-06 华为技术有限公司 Measurement and report method, terminal and base station
US20180358688A1 (en) * 2016-12-16 2018-12-13 Futurewei Technologies, Inc. High dimensional (hidi) radio environment characterization and representation
CN108631891A (en) * 2017-03-24 2018-10-09 中兴通讯股份有限公司 The measurement method and device of link between communication node
WO2018201495A1 (en) * 2017-05-05 2018-11-08 Zte Corporation Techniques for communicating beam information
CN108933745A (en) * 2018-07-16 2018-12-04 北京理工大学 A kind of broad-band channel estimation method estimated based on super-resolution angle and time delay

Cited By (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2023131256A1 (en) * 2022-01-06 2023-07-13 维沃移动通信有限公司 Channel measurement method, terminal and network side device
WO2023236535A1 (en) * 2022-06-10 2023-12-14 中兴通讯股份有限公司 Beamforming method and apparatus for channel state information-reference signal (csi-rs), and storage medium

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN115315906A (en) 2022-11-08
CN115315906B (en) 2023-08-22

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
WO2020125510A1 (en) Channel measurement method and communication device
CN112751592B (en) Method and communication device for reporting channel state information
WO2021063178A1 (en) Channel measurement method and communication apparatus
WO2020221118A1 (en) Method for indicating precoding matrix, method for determining precoding matrix, and communication device
WO2021083157A1 (en) Precoding matrix processing method and communication apparatus
WO2021037200A1 (en) Channel measurement method and communication apparatus
CN114204970A (en) Method and device for channel measurement
CN112312464B (en) Method for reporting channel state information and communication device
WO2021203373A1 (en) Channel measurement method and communication apparatus
WO2020244496A1 (en) Channel measurement method and communication apparatus
WO2021159309A1 (en) Channel measurement method and communication device
WO2021081847A1 (en) Channel measurement method and communication apparatus
WO2024027394A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus
US20230164004A1 (en) Channel parameter obtaining method and apparatus
US20230013510A1 (en) Method for indicating channel state information csi measurement and communication apparatus
US20220271900A1 (en) Method for configuring transmit port of downlink reference signal and communication apparatus
WO2021189302A1 (en) Updating method and communication apparatus
WO2021159537A1 (en) Channel state information feedback method and communication apparatus
CN114070436A (en) Channel measurement method and communication device
CN112398516A (en) Method and communication device for restricting codebook subset
WO2023165458A1 (en) Channel state information feedback method and communication apparatus
WO2024001744A1 (en) Channel state information reporting method and communication apparatus
WO2021146938A1 (en) Method and apparatus for determining downlink channel state information
WO2021146961A1 (en) Method and apparatus for determining downlink channel state information
CN115276733A (en) Communication method and communication device

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 20929980

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 20929980

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1